^
A^c
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
4^
ill 1.0
I 1.1
ltt|2J
Itt
5 Itt
|2J
I2j2
12.0
1.25 lu
■ L6
ISOmm —
6"
/^PPLIEU
IIVA^GE.Ino
lesSEMtMakiStrMt
RoehMttr. NY 14600 USA
Phon*: 716/482.0300
Fax: 716068-5908
ji
e len. ApplM Nnag*. tne. M mgM RmwvM
^
gi'
V:v^
CIHM
Microfiche
Series
(■Monographs)
iCMH
Coilection de
microfiches
(monographies)
CanadiMi Imtitut* for Historical MicroroproductiofW / liwtitut cana<Kafi da microroproductiom hiatoriquaa
Tadinical and KMoflraphte NolM / Ne«M
The Imtitutt (im •tWmpMd to obtain tha bait ortfinal
copy availaMa for fitaiNif. Faat«ra> of iMt aopy wMali
may ba WMioirapMeaNv iNi^va. ivMali may ahar any
of tba imatB* in tba raproduetion, or wbMi RMy
tifnifieanHy chanfi tba hmmI matbod of fibnini. ara
chacliad balow.
0Colourad ce«ar«/
CoMvartura da aoulaw
□ Co«ar< damafad/
CoMvartura
□ Covart ratterad and/or laminatad/
Covvartura rastaurte at/ou paNiewMa
□ Corn titia minint/
La titra da covvartura
D
D
Colourad mapa/
Cartas fio«rapbiquat an eotilaur
Colourad inli (i.a. othar than Mua or Waefc)/
Encra da coulaur 0.a. autra qua Maua ou noira)
□ Colourad platat and/or illuttrationt/
manchat at/ou illuttratiom an coulaur
Bound with othar mattrial/
Rali« avae d'autrai doeumanti
D
j^ Ti|ht binding may causa shadows or distortion
D
D
alone interior martin/
La raliura sarrte paut causar da I'ombra ou da la
distorsicn la lonfl da la marga intiriaura
Blank laavas addad durinf restoration may appear
within the text. Whenever possible, these have
been omitted from filminf/
II se peut que eertaines pafes btanchas ejoutfas
lors d'una restauration apperaissant dans la text*,
mais. lorsque cela *tait possible, cas pa|as n'ont
pas M filmtes.
Additional comments:/
Commentaires supplimenuires:
L'Institwt a mierofitan* la maMleur exemplaiia qu'il
hd a M possible da saproeurw. Las dMails da aet
a a amplaiia qui sont paut-«tfa uniques d
b ib l i np apblqu a. qui paiwant modHiar una I
niNodMita. ou qui pauvant axitar una modHiaation
dans la m«thoda normala da f itaiafe sont indiqufa
ci-dassous.
j I Colourad
D
□ H§n restored and/or laminated/
Htm rastaur«as at/ou paN icuW e s
HNps discoloured, stained or foxad/
Papn d«color«as. tachetias ou piqutes
□ PkfM detached/
Ptfles d«taeh«as
0Showthrou|h/
Transparence
Quality of print varies/
Qualit* instate de I'impression
□ Continuous peginetion/
Pafination continue
0lncludM index(es)/
Comprend un (des) index
Title on header taken from: /
Le titre de l'en-t«te provient:
□ Title pate of issue/
Pate de titre de la livraison
□ Caption of issue/
Titre de d«pert de la livraison
□ Masthead/
Gin«rique (piriodiques) de la livraison
This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked betow/
Ce document est film* au taux de rMuction indiqui ci-dessous.
'OX 14X itx
r
12X
1IX
zn
20X
SX
26X
XX
24X
28X
32X
TiM eopv fHiiMd lMr« Imw bMn rapreduesd thMiks
to tiM e«iMro«ity of :
Nattonol Ubrary of Canatfa
L'oxomplairo fNm4 fut roproduH grieo A la
O«n«roaiti do:
■ibIlottiAquo nationolo dii Canada
quality
laglbillty
tho
Tho imagoa appoaring horo aro tho
poaaiblo conaMoring tho condition
of tho original copy and In kaaping
fllming contract ipoeif ieatlona.
Original copioa in printod papor oovora aro fNmod
boginnbig wHh tho front eovor and anding on
tho last paga wHh a printad or INuatratod improa-
•ion. or tho back covor wfion appropriata. AN
othor original copioa aro fllmod boginning on tho
firat paga with a printad or iliuatratad improa-
•ion. and anding on tho last paga with a printad
or iliuatratad improaaton.
Tha iaat rocordod framo on ooch mlcroflcho
•haN contain tho symbol -^ (moaning "CON-
TINUED"), or tho symbol ▼ (moaning "END"),
whichavar appiiaa.
Maps, plataa. charts, ate. may ba fllmad at
diffaram raductlon ratios. Thoso too iarga to bo
ontlrohr included in ono oxpoauro aro fllmod
beginning in tho uppor loft hand comor, loft to
right and top to bottom, as many framaa as
rsquirod. Tho following diagrams llluatrata tha
mathod:
Las bnagaa suhwntaa ont «t« roproduitoa avoc lo
plua grand soin. compto tonu do la condition ot
do la nottot* do I'oiiomplairo film*, at an
oonformM avac laa conditions du contrat da
fMmaga.
Las anamplairaa orlginaux dont lo oouvorturo on
poptor oat Imprimte som fllm4s on common«ant
par la pramiar plat ot on torminant soit por la
doml*ro paga qui comporto uno omprainta
dimproaaion ou dlNustration, soit par la aacond
plat, aalon lo cas. Tous los autraa axamplairaa
orfglnoux sont fllm4s sn common9ant par la
promlAra paga qui comporto uno omprointo
d improaaion ou d'lNustratlon ot on tormlnont par
la dami*ra paga qui comporto uno tolio
omprointo.
Un daa symbdos suhrants apparattra sur la
dami«ra Imaga da chaqua microfieho. solon lo
cas: la symbolo -♦. signifio "A 8UIVRE". lo
•ymbolo ▼ •ignlflo "FIN".
Lo^ eartos. planchaa. tablaaux. ate. pouvont *tro
fiimaa A das taux da riduction dlff«ronts.
Lorsquo lo documont ost trop grand pour Atro
roproduft on un soul clichA. il ost fUm« A partir
da I'angia supAriaur gaucha. da gaueha A droito.
ot do haut an bas. an pranant lo nombro
d'Imogoa nAcaasaira. Las diagrammas suhrants
iilustrant la mAthodo.
1
2
3
4
5
6
THE
FRENCH-CANADIAN SCHOLAR'S COMPANION
AN
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
BASED OX
FRENCH GRAMMAR
COMriMSIXG THE SUUSTANrE OF THE BEST
ENGLISH GRAMMAKS
COMHILKD BY
J. E. CHAMBERLAND
Teaclii-r of English, iu the College of Saint ', lui
lie la rmatiert'.
-^^=€-^
29
: /
r ^
QUEBEC
lilPKlJIEltlE DAUVEAL'
Jofi. Beauciiamp, PuopniETou
1901
I (
M
w.
I t
! 1
«wwi anAOfAir •(MuiPs companioii
AM
MGLISH ORAMMA^
BAUD M^
FRENCH GRAMMAR
flmnftlHO TBI SUBtTAVai <9 TBI BEIT
IB0LI8B OlAMiUill
OMUriUftIT
0. 1. OHAMBERLAND
-H^^«^
QETBBflC
Uirillltlll BAIf lAO
InUred Moording to Aek of ParlkniMt of CuuMla, in
tho yoar 1901, by J. B. Chambbblaxd, priMt, in tho Offlo«
of ih« Minister of Agrieoltor*.
,- \,
INTBODUCTION.
If wo oontider the nomber and varietj of Boffliah
gnmm^n «, yot pablisbod, and (he ability with
whieh tome of thorn are written, there U almoat
noihi: g to be ezpeoled fVom a new complUitioii.
except perhaps, a caroftil choice of the moHt utfU
roleii, and a special attention to the manner in which
they are proeented to yonng undorotandlnK^ In thia
ranHMJl^ there % wo thinic, iKMnolhinic to bo done to
be nacAil to joang popils.
Another roaeon which decided as to prepare thia
now grammar, was the absence of an Bnglish-text
book complotely based on the French language. We
teach Frenchmen ; let u ehow the resembUuice
existing between the two languages, and so, we will
take away a great many difficulties. Moreover, by
obliging our scholars to study and recite in Bnrfish
we will make them insensibly take the habit of speakl
ing this language ; we will rid them of this timi^
this fear of speaking which is so prejudicial to a gri J
number ofour own people. »Kreat
. i"\^'',''*'**^P~''«^i*«»''tobeacompihiUoii.
and which by its nature chieily consists in materials
nmoMFonoir
u ltB t id from th« writiagt of olhon, U Mtmt actmiij
■•0MMU7 to apolofiie tbr th« ft«« nao tho eompiltr
BUido of tho worka <tf bto prtdiet m o w . MoNortr,
▼•ry ofUn bj nodUyinf th* tost to giro » nU
•onottmM clMitr, ■omotimM mort prteito, we
tbovght Ik no loogtr neewtarj to mention the npteee
ct their nnthori after the mlee giren. Let at m-
knowledge howrver, that fbr the general plan, #e
IbUowed the excellent grammar of Leelair, and eeleet-
ed materiale from the well known writings of Brown,
JTeming, Kerl, Haoron, LMnie, Oohbet, etc., eCe.
Before clodng thia introdnclion, let na taj, that the
anth<nr of thia book, had no interaet in it, bat atmply
wiahed to be naefril to his joang IVen^i-Ganadian
ftlenda, and to help thoee who are empiojed in their
edneatic n. May thia book procure the greater glory
of God, uad the welfkre of our dear Vrenob^nadian
youth. •
THE PRINCIPLES
OF
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
yrJSS^.'S^T^ i- the art of .p.,k„.g ^nd
Writing the Bngliah Imngtu^ oorreotly.
««»ph7, •tyraology, .y„t«x and prowdy
^^^I. gmmmor will only treat of the flr.t throe
OKTHOORAPBT.
.pe'fJllS'nlS:;"'^" o7.otte..^,|.hlaH,.„d th.
There are twenty^ix letters in Englleh.
^^tert and their prmuneiatUm,
A, a, sounds 4. in Prenrh
N, n, wands enn.inFionoh.
O. o. « A «
o.
pi.
kiOQ.
arr.
u
u
II
II
II
tl. ««
ioa. •«
vi. ««
denblioa "
ox. «
ooal. ««
sedd. "
6
PRIMOIPLXS or SNGLISH OBAIOIAR
Lettera are either Vowela or Oonsonttnto.
▲ Vowel i8 a letter which moy be sounded by it-
8el£ ^ .
A Oonsonant ia a letter that cannot be aoandea
distinctly unless when it it joined with a vowel.
The Vowels are a, e, i, o, u, and sometimes w and y.
The Oonsonaiits are 6, c, d, f, g, A, j, k, i, m, n, p,
Wond Y are consonants when they begin a wora
or a syllable ; in ©very other position thoy are vowels.
ADiphfhoag is the onion of two vowels in a double
sound ; as, oi in boil.
A proper diphthong i* a diphtong in which the
two vowels are sounded ; as, ot in boil.
An improper diphthong i» one in which only one
of jthe TOwels is sounded ; us, oa in loaf.
AfjUable is one or more letters pronounced in
one sound ; as, gram in grammar.
A Monosyllable is a word of one syllable ; as,
hoAsa.
A DiMyiiable is a word of two syllables ; as, horise-
boli
A TriiyUable is a word of three syllables ; as,
hottsdiolder.
A PolyijUable is a w jrd of many nyllables.
Spelling is the art of expressing words by their
proper letters.
ITYMOLOOT.
Btymology treats of the different sorts of words,
thei^ T«riOM modifloations, and their derivation.
0»'TH1 HOUR. 7
CHAPTER I.
OF THE NOUN.
ro awtiDguwh a pei-son or a thing.
Bx.: Poter, hoiiBe, barn.
Pierre, maison, grange.
The commcm noun aiid the proper noun. "
A common noon is a noun which reDrwont.
person* or things of the same species. ^ "^^
Bx.: Man. book, river, garden.
Jiomme, Hvre, riviire, Jardin,
li^^jr^^ °®"* '* * "°"" «»«<» to distinguish
^ Bx. : James, London, the Canadians.
Jaequee, Lmdres, ksCanadieMs,
JV: J -Among the common nouns, we mav dis.
Mredfrom . verb and has the form of a participle,
«x. : -ae triumphing of ,he wicked is short.
-U tnmphe de» t^Aaafs est etmrt.
An itMraet noim is the name of «>mo particular
'■•I
6
PaiNOIPLKS or KMOLISH OIAMMAB
quality con(*idercd in itself, or uport from ito sab-
stanoo.
Ex.: Wittdom, pradonoe, kindness, frtdlty.
Lasiigesie, laprudmee^ lahmU^ lafragilvtL
A COllectiYe noun is u noan, which though being
singular, isubed to represent a collection of several
persons or things.
Bx. : Army, mob, fleet.
Armie, foukf fiotte.
Two things are tc be considered in nouns ; gmdert
and numbers.
OEHDEiUI. .
There are three genders in Bnglish nouns :
iKt The masculine.
2nd. The feminine.
8rd. The neuter.
Nouns representing persons or animals of the male
kind ore maKuline, as :
Bz. : Man, d(^, horse.
HomvM, dden, eJuvatf
Nouns ropreMnting persons or animals of the
female kind ore fmninine^ as :
Bz. : Woman, bitch, mare.
Femme^ cAteniie, jument*
Nouns representing things, and animals whose sez
i§ not given or expreiwed are neuter, a» ;
Bz. : Book, tnble, bird.
smnroinoir or ohidiu. a
mszmonov or axRDiBS.
The dittfictlen of genders fofanlmated tkinn
"Mybemndeintbreedifferoni wny»: ^
different At>m those of the raasonlino. ^^
Ex.: B07. Girl.
*'»"• Woman.
So"- Danghter.
Uncle. Aunt.
'^Of* BitdL
a* B7 using different terminations.
Bar.: Counl. Counless.
-^bbof. Abbess.
^•ro» Heroine.
8»B7 placing ao attribote of distinction generally
before the noan and sometimes after it. '^ ^"^
heSl'"! '^u *' ■'^'"'"'^ "^^^--^ ^'^ nouM
belonging to the commm gender. .
For penont.
Ex. : Servant (common /render).
Kan^nrant Mnldnwrvant
&rt»i<««r. fiisr„«^^
Malivcoosln. P|Mnale.«oasfn.
For uimalt.
Goat (common gender).
A he.goaty a nho-^oat.
A dog-ibx, a bltch^x.
Bx.
10 . PBuroiPLBs or xmoliih obaxmab. ^
- For birdg.
Bz. : Sparrow (common gen<Ur).
A cock<sparrow». , a han-oparrow.
Un nunneau male, untnoineaufoMH*.
A poa-cock) a pea-ben.
N, B. — Noans which sigoUy both males aid
females, are snid to belong to the common gender,
because they are common to both sexes.
NUMBERS.
Nouns ^ave two numbers in Bnglinh, the iinguht
and the plural. ,
The plnral is formed by adding 4 to the singular.
Ex.: Ffithftr, father*,.
Book, books.
N. B.—l"* Words ending in e\ th, m, x, z, «, form
their plural by «i' /"g e».
Ex.: Chuit,«, charthes.
Fieb, fishcH..
Glass, gla!»ses. '
Fox, foxes.
Nouns ending in ch (bounding k form their plural
regularly.
Ex.: Stomach, ^tomac, stomachs.
Patriarch, patriarehe, _ patriarchs.
Epoch, ipoque, epochs.
2** Nouns ending in preceded by a consonMit
form their plural by adding ei:
Ex.: Hero, hero<«i.
Cargo, cargoea.
NiniBBBg. 11
Konns endi g in o prccctJed by a vowel take onlyi.
Ex.: Polio, folios.
Trio, (rioK.
Proper iioiuik in o and all coiniiion iioana in o
oomin^ from foreign langoages tuke «.
Ex. : Cato, Catos.
Cicero, Ci«'oi*oi»,
Solo, Solos. ^
3" Koans ending in y preceded by a consonant
change y into t und add et,
Ex.: County, countiee.
I^dy. ladiefl.
Body, boiHe»f.
City, cities.
Nouns ending in y preceded by a vowel form their
plural with e.
Ex.: Play, piuyn.
Day, dayc.
Boy, boys.
4® The following noans in / or fe are rendered
plural by the change of/ or fe into vet.
Ex.: A calf,
Afi elf,
A half,
A knife,
A leaf,
A life,
A loaf,
Self,
A ahee^
unveaUf
vn lutiti,
vne moitii,
un couteauj
vne feuille,
unevie,
ymgwhtt
oalvee.
elves.
halves.
knives.
leaver.
livef.
loav».
selves.
sheaves.
12
PKIMOIPLBS or BMOLiaH aKAMXAB*
Asbelf,
A thief,
A wife,
A wolf,
ehelyet.
thiey<M9.
wives,
wolves.
une tabUtte,
un voleWf
vneipoutef
un loup,
JV. JB.— Noans in / (except 8ta£P moaoing b4tOHf
which has staves for its plarul) and all douds in / or
fe not mentioned in the preceding list, form their
plnral with s.
itat'tnajor, staffn.
Ex.
Staff,
Hoof,
Strife,
iGalf,
Chief,
Wharf,
toit, rooi».
querelle, strifes.
golfe, gulfrt.
chef, chiefs.
Quai, Wharfs or Wharves,
60 Several noons have an irregular plural.
Ex.: Ox, basuf,
Chid; enfant,
Brother, frire.
Man, homme,
Woman, femme.
Foot, pied,
Gooee, oie,
Tooth, dentf
Loose, pou,
Mouse, souris,
60 Some other noons have two pliirals, and each of
them has a different meaning.
Ex. : f 3n)ther, pii(ral : brothers (frires de mm).
I brethren {fit^^ de tocUU),
( Die, Ml (^ . j»^<i2: dies (tfwiis),
oxen.
children.
brethren.
men.
women (wimen).
feet.
geene.
teeth.
lice.
mice.
HUMBIU.
7« Some ifabttaniiyos have no plaral.
Bz. : Silver,
Iron,
Gold.
Pride,
Wisdom,
Baaincsfi,
Darkness,
Rubbish,
Hair,
Knowledge,
Wealth,
la
argent
fer.
or,
orgueif,
sageue,
affaires.
tHUbree.
ddcombres.
chevelure,
emnaissancea. .
richeuef, etc., etc.
8« Hero is a list of noans having no singolur.
Alms,
Brawere,
Eaves,
Means,
News,
Oats,
Scissors,
SnufTers,
Todgf,
Yictoab (vitlee),
Troosei-s,
Measles,
Tidiii'^H,
aum^.
calegone.
bwde cCun toit.
moyen.
tumveiie.
. avoine.
cieeauij.
mouchettes,
pincettes,
vivres,
pantaUm.
rougeole.
Houvelte.
■^•^•r"A*"^"> "'^!"i ' •« hw aro ij -i.cral! y considered
«w Mngoliar. i' . ■^. rp-
B'* : 111 news nn:i uimmw.
Um mamauni nouvelte oa vitt.
14
PRUfOIPLIS or llfaLISH OBAXMAR.
in
9" Koaiiit which have been ailopteU without change
from foreign iungaago6;i;onoral!y rotJiin their original
plnrali.
Ex.
AiiiilhiwiM,
uiiiitheHec.
Bu8ii»,
bUfCK. ,
Ciiiiiii,
criiMM.
(Jritei ion,
criteria.
Addondam,
udJundu.
Arcanum,
ui cunu.
Cherub,
cherubim.
Banditio,
banditti.
*Genut(,
genera.
10« The following iionns have the same form for
' the two numbers.
Gron«e, eoq de bntyire.
People, gena.
Sheep, moutons*
Salmon, tatanon.
Teal, mreelle.
Trout, irvite.
Dozen, doiaainr.
Pair, paire.
However wo somotimes see the last word pair nsed
in the plural.
Ex. : fifty pairp.
llo Proper names of ])ersons form their plural
regularly ; t. e., they always add « to the singular.
Ex.: Ctito, Cat05.
Mary, Marys.' '
Wolf, ■' • Wolf^.
poniMiVB rom.
Ift
Prop«r iwroM of nations being Teriuble adJ^oUTM,
sboald b* iiivariuble a* tbe adjective itself; nerer^
tbeless they all takn the plural by s, except those
ending In eh, th, ese, which do not vary.
Bx. : Tho GermiiiiH.
The ^inericaud.
The CunadianH.
tho Fion.h. ^-
The English.
Tho Chinese.
N. JB.— Proper names of nations ending in a hissing
sound do not vary.
Ex.: The Swiss.
Lea Saiuet.
P0SSE8BZVB FORM. g
The ooroplement of a noon (if wo may use a French
term) is expressed in French by the proposition de j
we have the same uonstraotion in Bnglish.
Ex. : The house of my brother.
Sometimes, the preposition of denotes possession,
then, we may u«e tho possessive form by '«.
Ex. : My brother's- house.
La maism de monfrire.
As we see by the last example, the possessor is
placed first with an apostrophe and the letter «
coming after it.
Ex.: The scholar's duty.
Le devcir de C4QoUer.
le
P1IH0IK.U OV BNOLini OlAlflCAB
N. A— !• When th« plural •ndi in «, the other
« it omitted, b«t the apoetrophe it retained.
Bx. : On eaglet' wingm
Sur let aiU$ du aigUs.
My frlei^ds' hoosee.
Le$ maitont d« mr% omit.
2« If tho niiiga'^ur ui.ils ii. «, ^, or >», we nse only
the apottrophi'.
Ex. : For ^roodneM* t»ake.
Par cause de bonti.
(Soomteft* wife.
LafenmedeSocrate,
A partrMge' wl- g.
Une aile de perdrix,
8» Tho '« is rarely ased after noant repretenting
thinge. We nse it generally for percent only.
Tha#wo muflt any :
The gate of tho garden.
La porle dujardm.
and not : the ;;ni*den'8 gute.
CHAPTER II.
ADJEOnVXS.
An adjeotiTe is a word added to a noan to ezprett
a qoalily, or to limit i he signification of this nonn.
Hence, two ela88C8 of adjectives : the qoaliflcatiTe
and the dtttrmiiiatiTe ndjectives.
Ofti.— lo Qoftliftoativc adjeotiyet are those which
AlUKCTIVBS.
17
ezprew quality. They are not variud on aocoont of
wmbeTf gender <» case.
Es. : A ;;ood boy, n good girl, good boy«.
A good boy'd book.
Le livre dun hon gar^on.
Obs.—2'> The qnnlificative adjectivo goDorally pre<
cedes tho noun.
Ex. : A good brother. ^'
A red apple.
Exception. — Adjoctivea ore Bomctimcs placed after
their noans :
1' When those adjootlveH hove a complement :
Ex. : Tho hor5io is an aniraal nf>efal to man.
Le cheoal est %tn animal utile d rhomme.
2o When Mvoral adjectives qualify the same noon :
Ex. : A boy good, virtaoas and amiable.
Uti garfon ban, vertuetuc et aimable.
06a.— 8« Tho only variation whioh the adjective
admits is that of the degrees of comparison.
There are commonly reckoned throe dogr3es of
comparison; namely: Tho |>ortiiivo, iho comparative,
the superlative.
The positiye is the adjective in its cimplo form.
Ex. : Gkx>d, wise, grout. »
Bon, eage, grand.
The eomparatiye increases or le>scns tho positive
in signification.
Ex. : Groat, greater or l«8f« great.
Wise, wiser or loss wise.
Pi
16 . PNINCIPLIS or BNaLltB OBAMMAB. \
thi (rtlfttiTt) miptrlatiTt inoroiixM or Iommi
tho potitiT* to iho higho't or lowMt degrto (with
com portion).
Ex.: Tho wisest). .. , ,
The tftlloit [ '" ln« '*<•""<»'.
Tho least wIho in the sohool.
Le mains sage de iieofe.
The (abiolate) iiip«rUtiT« oxproMv« quality in
• very high degroe, without uny comparison.
Ex, : This man is very good, very tall.
, Cet hmme est frit bon, tris grand,
Fouunov or thi dioriis or
CrOMPA&IBOH.
The i^mparative and tho superlative moy be
formed in two different ways :
!• If the ttdjeotivo has only ono syllable, the com-
parative and relative superlative are formed by
adding er and est to the positive.
Ex. : Strong, stronger, the strongest.
JV. if.-Some other adjectives will also follow the
same rale.
!• Adjectives of two syllabled ending in mute «.
Ex.: Wise, wiser, the wisest.
Sage, phusage, U plus sage.
Brave, braver, the bravest.
Grave, graver, ihegravAJst.
2« AdjeoUves of one or two syllables ending In y :
but, these adjectives have a special formaUon.
DBOKBBB OP OnMMVItOlT. If
When the fliml y i« procoUod hj n (ronvoiiant, it
mitft be obangod into i buforu er or ei/.
Kx. : Hiippy, heweux; hnppier, the happioet
If the flnul y Ih prcvriivd l»y tt vowel, there ii no
change.
Ex. : Qmy, gai \ gayor, the g../eiit.
N, B, — When un uJjuciivo oroneiiyllnblo ondt by
A eingio consonant pioccdcd Ity a «ingle vowel the
consonant nlll^t bo doubled bcfoi-o er and est.
Ex. : Big, bigger, the biggest.
II* The advcrbH more and most placed bcforo adjeo-
tiTee have the aame oiToct ae er and eet,
Ex. : Wiw, sage ; more wleo, the moet wiee.
Bat, the tjompari-on by more and most is mote
correctly ascd with dl>wyllable8 and polysyllables.
Ex. : Frugal, frugal ; more flmgal, the most
fragal.
Some adjectives have an irregular comparison.
Ex. : Good, bon ; bettor, the beet
Bad, mawais ; worse, the worsts
Much) .u .
Many/ »"<>»•«, th© most.
Beaucovp, plus de^ leplmde.
Little, les», the least.
P/eu d«, moint^ le moins.
N, B.— Little meaning petit has no comparative ;
we then use the adjective email, oomp. smaller, jup.
I the smallest. •
Ex. : He is the smallest in the school.
Jle9tU plus petit de VMU,
20
PRUI0IPL18 or BM0LI8H ORAIUIAB.
Little meaning peu de in used with t\ singalur noan ;
«rith a piuml nuun, w** niUMt iiso few.
Ex. : Hii huH liulu umbilion.
II a peu d ambition.
He hiM low fi'iuiidtf.
II a peu d'amia.
The French conjunction que after a uompamtive
is always trnnsluteil "by than.
Ex. : Poter in loss ioui nod than John.
I Pierre est moins instruit que Jean.
He i<i more learnud than his brother.
II est piui savant que sonfrire.
After the superlative (relative) wo ase of; if the
following noun denotes a place, in is hotter than of,
Bx. : Ho is 1 ho most learned of his schoolfellows.
He is the most learned in the school.
The absolute superlative represented in French by
the words trie^ bien, fort, eSetrimement, is translated
into English by the words very before adjunctives and
much or very much before purticiplop.
Bx, : Good, bon ; very ;;ood, tris bon.
Admired ; very much admired.
In some ouses moat is used instead of very with poly-
sylhibles..
Ex. : Be was a most loving son.
CTifait ufiJtU trU aimant.
ADnorrvn TAxdir At irouirt.
ti
Oompariion of •quality.
39ie n«Doh comparatiro of eqaallty is ezprMted
in BoglUh by m or «o.
Am is asod with un aiBrination.
Ex. : He w as tall as joa.
II est auasi grand que vms.
80 w ased witli a negation.
Bx. : Ho is not so tull as you.
U n'ett pat ei grand que voua.
N. B.—ln nogatiye-intorrogative sentonoes we vm
a$,
Ex. : Are yoa not as tall as I ?
N'itet-wm pae aiuri grand quemoif
In saeh sentences, que is always translated by as.
Bx. : As good at, not so good as.
• With n perfect or past participle, we use as much or
» mmeh instead of as or so.
Bx. : He is as ranch admired as yon.
He is not so much esteemcNl as yoa.
ADJI0TIVI8 TAKBN A8 NOUmi.
When an adjective, with the definite article before
i^ is used alone, it is taken as a noaii.
Bx. : The virtaoas are always happy.
Lis wrtueux soiU Umjews hetareux.
H ' miioiPi.u or wroLisH fl«AifftA« , v .
y» ^.•*->Tb9 adjeoMTe ased as a nonn must represent I
awholeooUeoiionofindividoals. '
Ex. : P^videncu r^ward.s the, good tiod punishes
thsbad,
JJaProoidence rieompeme Ics lHm$i!tpmit\
let tniehants.
The blind are unhappy.
Lu aveugUi aont tnalf^eux.
If the ndjectivo rop^'escnts only ono person or a
certain number of persons, it rou^tnl^fays be followed
by a ndbn.
Ex. : A blind man, unaveugle.
Twoblinf boyti, devx peti1» av^ugles.
One bund fed blind men, eient aveugtes,
^' ^.— The following adjectivoii are now considered
as nouns and take the plural form : The mortatt, the
immortals, the oHOiente, the modems, the infidels^ the
heretics.
NOUNS TAB3SN AS ADJEOTIVIS.
Nouns are sometimes used 'ns adjoctivcn to qualify
another noun; then, like adjectives, they are not
varied, and ate always placed before the noun which
they qualify.
Bx. : A silveivwatob. . . «
Silver-watches.
A five^ollar bfl!.
A school-master.
OKYUUmNATiyK ADJ1CTIV18. 88
JIT. B.—EngMeh grammarians give to adjectives
some other denuminationfi alwuys usofally knowo.
Oommon adidcUTes ai-e thuM) which merely
ezpreite qmilii^ .
Ex. : Gkxxi, great, tall, wise.
Flroper acyectives are thoce whii h me derived
from pi*opor noaii(<s. They are writ on with a capital.
Ex. : French, English, Canadian, Irish.
Participial or verbal adjectives arc those which
are formed from avert; they have thu form of a parti*
I ciple, and cxprefls qaality.
Ex. : A loving child.
A lying rogue.
Nomeral a4J0Ctiyes are those which express
nnmW. They are either cardinal or ordinal.
Cardinal acUectives are those which merely
exprem number.
Ex. : One, two, three, etc.
Ordinal adjectiyes expreiM order, rank.
Ex. : First, second, third, finirth, etc., etc.
DETSRMINATIVE ADJEOTIVSS.
The French language culls determinative, those
adjectives which are used to limit the signifioation of
nouns. Y. g. Here is a book ; the sense of this word
I is quite indefinite ; but, if I say: Sere b my bgok,
1 the signification is limited by mj^ to a special book,
I which belongs to m^.
AiVe ma> consider in English as well as in French,
I six kinds of determinative adjectives, namely : the
24
PRIN0IPLB8 OF UI0LI8H QKAlUfAB.
article, the nuinciul adjecUvos, the (iemoiMUaUve, the
posseaeive, the reialive.and the indefinite lu^tiTes.
Among thette, the lost four are tometimet uaed as
pronouns, they are called, for that reason, pronomiBAl
a^Jeotiyes.
OF THE ABTIOLX.
The article is a short word U8od before noans to
limit their Mgnification.
Ex. : The glory of Napoleon.
Therd is only one article in English, it is the, which
is derived from the demont^trntive adjective that.
The is never varied.
Ex. : The boy, the girl, the fathere, the sisters.
N. B,— The mast not bo used ;
10 Before ail those nouns which are taken in their
widest i<on^e, as are abstract nounsi.
Ex. : Wisdom, sagesse ; prudence, prudence.
If the sense in limited, the article is used. .
Ex. : The w Jtdom of Peter.
2* Before nouns denoting a Bub^^Uince, as iron, gold,
sliver.
Ex. : Gold is precious. Cor est pricieux.
However, I wili say : The gold of California, be-
cause the sense is limited.
3** Before plural nouns having no complement.
Ex.: ^ends are osefbl. .
Bot| I wii: tay s The friends of Peter.
BTOMWUL ABJtOTIVM. ^5
4** Before names <>f counlHoa.
Ex. : England, Prance, Spain:
followed by proper nonns will not take the article.
Ex. : Queen Victoria, King Edward.
Capo Cod, Lake Saporior.
6* Proper names of persons preceded by tlie a<U^
Ex. : Poor Thomas, old Jack, brave Peter.
06«.-In an enumeration, the article most not be
repeated, unless we wish to draw attention to each
object spoken of.
HUMERAL AOJE0TIVE8.
Numeral adjectives are those which express num-
ber and order.
They pre fither cardinal or ordinal.
Cardinal adjectives are those which express nam.
ber.
Koii/fht
One
Two
Three
' IVMr
Five
*:x
Semen
S^jlht
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Ton
Eleven
Twelve
Thirteen
FoarCeen
Fifteen
Sixteen
Seventfl^
Bigbteen
l^lMteeu
10
11
12
13
14
16
16
17
IS
19
-M
PBIlfOlPLM OF SNOLISH ORAllllAm.
twonty
thirty
forty
my
•flfty>one
«ixty
«izty^iio
suty.iwo
seventy
20
'30
40
50
51
60
61
62
70
eighty «o
ninety 90
ninety^no 01
handi'ed 100
thousttnU 1,000
million 1,000,000
We i»ny ; a or one hundred.
a or one thoaaand.
«»veniy.one 71 <^ or one milHon.
Ow is used in,ie«d of a before hundred, thouwnd.
-toannmber, v.g., i«,.ou„tyear8. i"^™"n
Ex. : One thousand, nine ha. dixxl and one.
-iuii^f^'-'^""'*'^' ^*»°'«"d» »"<* million oMd as
-^eotivcs are never varied, and al way. take a oTl"
are they used as nouns, they may be plural. *
Ex. ; Stars are 10 be heen by thousands
-&« Hoiles 86 voientpar milUere.
h-t^fu^"""*"**' thousand, and million, and is used
Defbre the ^«», ; if there «re no <«,., befor; thu unir^
Ex. : One thousand, one hundred and fifty-four,
One ihou8;ind and five, 1006.
^dlnal a<«ective8, ai e those whkh express order.
Second ^^rf 8,^,,,^ ^
™^ troieiime Eijjhth kuUiinu,
^h guatriime Ninth neuvUme.
^^ ctnqui^ Tenth dixiime.
Blevonth
TwelAh
Thirtoonih
Foartoenth
Fifteenth
Sixteenth
Seventoenth
Bighteenth
Nineteenth
Twentieth
Twenty-first
thirtielh
thirty-firet
thirty-second
fortieth
forty-first
mrmBAL ADjcorms.
n
onziime
douziime
treizime
Uime
IMme
IBime
llime
18me
19ime
20ime
SOime
31ime
32me
40ime
4litne
flfYivth
fifty-fii-Hl
Mixtiuih
sl.xly-sovoiiih
Revontieth
Hovonty fifth
eightieth
eigAty-fiitit
ninetieth
ninety-first
ninety-second
ninety-third
ninety-fonrth
handroiith
thoa»«undlh
iOime.
Sl^mc.
60toie.
Slime.
lOime.
75hne.
80^me.
Slime. '
dOhne.
9lime,
22ime.
9 dime'.-
94ime..
lOOime.
rail I ion 1 1) maUonniinfe.
If. i?.— Ordinal nnmberH motit bo preceUcd by the
definite article the.
Bx.: The first. tbo second, the thii-d.
Le premier, le second, letroUieme.
Except, when there is ai.oih.i- ileiciminutivo ad-
jective.
Bx. : I resolved to pass a Hccond year with him.
Je ritolvi de passer une seconde annie avee lui,
Obi,^First used as an adverb does not take thee
artiele.
Bx. : He stands first on the list
II eat te premier sw la liste.
f{
^ »miKOIFLM or MKQLlgU QMMMMAM.
I'^ie day of the month.
««.: Tl»« tenth of December
TheeiathofJune.
in«iehe«mplee,d«yi«„,j,^^^^
a»jrheorferofeacce8sionof«,vereiir„a.
X.: Senry tho Fifth,
Victoria the First.
a-ThediffeVentpartsofabook.
Ex.: Chapter the eeventh.
Canto the second.
Proportional nnmberi.
"Single or simple,
Doable^
Treble or triple,
Fourfold,
double,
triple.
quadruple, etc
Hnmbers of repetition.
Oocfl^
Twice,
Thrioe or three times,
Four times,
Six times.
And
«»« fois.
deux fois.
froisfois.
imtrefois.
fix fois.
4«iv";°' ^ **"■« *• ^ «'•« '» -»««-..
ADJKCTIVBS AUD PBOVOUlfa. f$
P»i-titiv0 numben.
Thehaify ^ lamoitil
The ihird, ; Utiers^
Theqimnter, the fourth part, le quart.
The flfih part, leeinquiime.
The sixth partj IgtixOme.
Conhiiiereil as sabstantives they may take the ploral
form.
Ex. : Two halves,
Two; thirds,
Foar fifths.
deux demies,
daiix fieri:
qvatreeinfuiimett
OIH0H8TIUTIVB ADJI0TIVE8 AND
PRONOUNS.
The demoiistiatire adjectives * are those whiqh
precisely point oat thu Snbjects to which they relate.
They are;. ;;
This, ee, cet, cette .... ci. These, cm ... . ei.
That, ee,cet,cette.... Id. ^hos«^ce»....W.
Somotirhes yon, yond or yonder, «, eette, cet.ces..
liUae, f6r very distnnt ohjeoip. .
^' ■9' — ^nWj refers to tho. nearest person or thing
that, to the more distant.
Ex.: This garden,
That house,
eejardtn-ei.
^ nnomn or uolub obawuk
-«««<]■(« rM /oniMr or fine mentioned.
to. :^ W«.ltha„d poverty nreWh tempt„,|«n. •
thai or <A« .Am€r ^ndH to excite pride,
this or th^ latter, dl«5ontont. ^
<>f geXf""'*"'^"^- «- ""^-••^«« on account
to... Thfaboy, this girl.
They me Taried in Bomber,
to.: Theeeboyn, tho«eglrI«.
ftonowii The domow.in.iire i.djeotivc bccom.
J>ronoon^ when they are n«ed alon... """•
^U.(«fnjalar) ce/W-c/, ce/fe«; ^.
^h«e(pl„r„„ , ceu^c; c»«^,.
hw pleasure,
iron j4K» et mmftnre tx^agent t<m deux;
AMiemru aito vtoRouvt.
81
With of, that and thote aro preferred to thii ond
<AeM^ which aro not naed.
Ex. : This hoase it thut of mj father.
Cette maiaon eat eeUe dt num pire,
Theio booki aro thoM of my brother.
Get livre$ aont eevx de mon frire. ^
In iheeo caMk wheo.o/ denotes powesfion, the
poMcaaive form by '« U elegantly and very oAen
employed.
Sz. : This honeo is my father's.
^^ — The French domonatrative prononnii, eelui,
e$Ut,'et¥X, eeltu, are soroelimcK followed by the r«»la-
Ur9fuiorqw, in anch oaaen they moMi be changed
iato hewiheythey or tho»e, if they are HubjeciH, and
Mm other, tltemor thote, if they aro objects.
Bx. : Happy hO wlio ia Tirtnons.
Meureux eelui qui est vertueux.
Happy Hho who lovei* God.
Bettreuae eelle qui aime Dieu.
I aaw her whom yon met yeHieiday.
fTai vv celle que vous avez tmrontrie her.
In sneh inatancefi, the prononn niny b»' lepliu'cd by
the correapoading nuuM,
Bx, : I saw the ^romnn whom you met.
>rai vu celle que vow nr, z renc^ntrie.
V<»f thiugs, celle, ceux, eellet, »re iranslatod by tht
OM or the meg.
Bx.: r prefer iny baok to ibo one which you
have.
Jepr^ite mm livre «k eelui que vwa avez.
tS nxmnrLBB or hmlim «^»m i»>
voMiMiTi AsiBOTiyii Aim nunrouvii.
FtMMMiTe vdjeetlTM are thoM which r»bito lo
propcrijror pofwoMion.
^niey are ^r the iti ii^ u lar :
lo My ; moR, ma, me$.
Thy; t<m, to, tet,
HIm: ton, to, iei(maec.).
MM, «a, .M«(fem.).
ton, ffo, tu (neater).
' Her ;
It«;
For the plaral :
• Oar; notre, not.
Tour ; votrtf oog.
Their; Uut, Imtn, •
2f. B. — His is aaed with lit masealine poeseMor.
Her" " " "feminine «»
Ito " " " "neater
Speaking of,
A man, I will gay, hie head.
A woman, •• " her head.
A bird, ^" > « itehead.
Ptonoiins. Po88C88ivo prodoans are thoee which
are need instead ol u noun and at the wime titne denote
poesessiob.
They are for the lingular :
Jf iiio ; Le mien, la mienne.
miennes, A mot.
miem,
Th
ino; L4 tim, la tienHCf iea ^ietu, les
tieHHei.Atoi.
^-p
KKLALITM PftONOUNS. 81
Bin ; X« mVn, /<? iifiijie, /e« «i<ii«, tei f imMii
d ^Wi' (lIUlM-.).
Heiv| Xm «/«a» \a siennt, lei timst /et
iiennef, A elU (f«m.).
lt#, ii«*iiUM', in rnr«ly umnl.
Ow'j rouHt not lio iimhI n« a po«iiM»Hnlvo pronoan.
For the plornl :
Oartt ; U nStre, la nitre, /« nitra, ck nw?.
YoorH ; /« v6fr#, (a vdtre, lt$ v6tre»^ h voiu,
Tboin ; U lew, la lewr, let Uws, A eux.
Obi,— Thorn |tronoiinR are novor rnriod, and never
I take tho article.
Id poetry, mine nnd thine titv often iiMcd instead of
I fny and f Ay boforo a rowol.
Ex. : Mine eye, :nino equal.
Mm tdl^ moH 4gal.
BILATIVE PBOHOUIIB.
BelatiTo pi-ononn^ are thoM which relate to some
I word going befoni and called, for this rouson, oafe*
' cedent. They ore :
Who, which and that.
Who, (maso. or fem.), i« only subjoot.
Which, (for thing* and nnimalu), may bo enbjeei
jorob^t
That, (m. f. n.), subject or object of a verb.
What U a kind of compoand relative inelading both
ft-:
** MINCIPLIS or BXOLISH OBAIfUAB.
the antecedent und the reblivo, it is equivalent to
fhat which OP the thing which,
Ex. : This Ih what I want. ^'
Void ce gueje veux.
That 18 : this is the thing which ; w.int.
M B — Wbo, (masc, fom.)i has three forms.
Who, qui, (masc fern.), subject.
, WhoN), dont, de qui, possessive (masc..
fom.). '
Whom, qui (mmc., fcm.), (with a prepo-
sition), que (with a verb) is object of a
verij, or of a preposition.
Ex. : Tho boy who speaktt.
The boy whom I sec.
Tho boy to whom I speak.
Tho boy whose hat yoo have.
^ Who^ denotes possession, it mast nlwnys be follow-
ed by the nnmo of the thing possessed, and preceded
07 the possessor.
Ex. : The man whose hoose you built
Jyhomme dont vous avez bdti la maison.
Whose is sometimes used as the possessive case of
which.
Ex. : The tree whose leaves fall.
Which and that haTe always tho i«me form. Tbe
r«»gular po^est.ivo of which ifi of which; Hisalwi^
BXLATiVB PROMOUNl.
8ft
preceded by the immo of iho pa>MMSor tiDd that of
the thing pO!(6u«i!4(.>d with the defliiilu article.
Bx. : The i reo the leavuH of which fiall.
L*arbre df.nt lesfeuilles tombent.
That has no po^voHive cuho.
Which and wJuit uri; both UKud to irauslutu the
French pronoana ce qui and ce que,
1« Beginning a Huntenco, ee quij ce que, are tt-ans-
lated by what.
Ex. : What in good in lovely.
Ce qui est ban est aimable,
29 Ce qui, ee que, I'epreeonting what has been said
before, are translated by wfuch,
Ex. : He does not behave well, which makes me
sad.
Ilnese conduit pas bien, ce qui m*attriste.
8* Ce qui, ce que, being objects to a preceding verb
w preposition, ai-e translated by what
Ex. : I know what yon think of it.
Je sais ce que vous pensei de cela.
I heard what yon said.
J^ai entendu ce que vous avez tUt.
Ho is satisfied with what I have done.
Jl est coHUnt de ee qwfaifait.
I speak of what yon told nie.
Je parte de ee que W/W tn'avez dit.
I
36 PftlNOIPLIS OF INQLISH QBAMMAB
INTEBBOaATIVE FBONOURS.
Who, which and what, become interrogative pro-
nonnu, when they are nged in asking questions.
Who t qui ? (niasc. or fom.).
Whose r & qui ? de qui ? denotes posRession and is
always followed . by the name of the thing
pOSKCSKOd.
Whom t qui f object of a verb or a proposition.
Ex. : Who speaks so ?
Qui parte airui f i
Whoso book is this ?
A qui est ce livre f
To whom do you speak ?
A qui parlez-vous t
What ? (masc. f . n.), quel ? quelle f que f qu'eat-ce
que t quoi t
Ex. : What do you see ?
Que voyez-voui 1
Which ? (m. f. n.), quel t quelU f lequel t laquelle f
Ex. : Which book will you have?
Which of these men is yoor brother ?
N. A— Who t is used when one wishes to know the
name of a person ; consequenUy we answer to i^ho by
a noan representing a penon.
Ex.: Who made this table'?— Petw.
Qui a fait ettt4tdbk f -^Pierre.
Whatt it Med when we want to know the nature,
the quality of a f«ni»a or a tltei^.
Bx.: Wliat It he ?(P«tte>-A joiner.
Qu*ett^quHlimf — Oik«i«iiMii«r.
UIDBrilfm AMKOnVM AMD PBONOUirS. 3Y
Which t in xmd when two or Hevoral penons or
thingg are to be di»tiDguiiihed.
Ex. : Which of ihette books will you have f
Leqvei de ce» livrea tmUezwna f
Which of ilioHe men ih yoar brother ?
Lequel de ces hormes est voire frbre f ^
Oba-- What I (exclamatory) muttt always be follow-
ed by a or an before a ttingiilur noiin.
Gz. : What a fine gafdcn I
QMel beau jardin I
Wilh aUliacl houhh ui.ii plmai Mib^tuuiivos*, what
is UM'd {|lnfn».
Ex. : What coum^'o I what fine {fardens I
Quel courage I queln beauX jardins t
WDirnriTE adjectives and pronouns.
Indefiiiito adjectives aro those whi« h modify their
nouns ill .m indoHiiite or genorul manner. Thoy are :
A or All ; unouune.
Some and any (sing, and plnr.) ; dUy de la, des..,
quelque.
All ; tout, toute ; tow, toutes.
Whole; tout, entier.
Kach; chaque. '
Bvery ; ehaque^ Ume let,
little ; pen de (sing.). Ex. : Little goodnen.
ffiw, peudet plnr.). Bx. : Few friend*.
Maeh ; beawoup de (sing.). Bz. : Mooh gkuy.
Mmj i btancoup 4$ (plur.). Ex. : Many books.
38
PRikoiPLBS OP XMOLISH ORAJOIAB.
I '«
Several ; pluaieun. . .
Both ; t<m let deux, Pun et Cautre.
No (sing, and j)lur.) ; aucun, pasde. ^'
Ex. : No books ; no glory.
Not any (sing, and plur.) ; aucun, pas de.
Other (biog. and plor.) ; autre, autra.
Another ; vn autre. Ex. : Ai'e yoa of another mind ?
Blse; autre.
Such (sing, and plur.).; tel, teh / telle, teOet.
N. B.^A or An is also called in English the " in-
definite article."
A% is used before a vowel or A silent, as : an hOnr,
an age, an elf, an acom.
A is used lo before a coosonant
Ex. : A boy, a girl.
2^ Before h sounded.
Ex. : A house, u hammer.
30 Before u long, ir, y, and one.
£<x. : A universal music.
A week.
A year.
Such a one.
A modifies iUt noun in a general manner.
Ex. : This is a fine house.
Foict tow belle maiwn.
One is employed to give more precision ; it means
only one,
Ex. : There it but one pian in this Jiouse. ■
II n*y a qu'un hmme daiu cette maiton.
WOltlHin ADJBOTITM AMD PBOROIJRB. 39
Any is used in iDt«rro|patir« sentenoes.
Bx. : Have you any pens ?
Avez-voui de$ plumes t
In negative sentenoos.
Bx. : I have not any pens, ^-
Je n'ai pas de plumes.
In dnbitative or doubtflil sentonoe?.
Bx. : If I had any pen?.
8i favais des plumes.
Some is used when the senteneo is affirmative or
both negative and interrogative.
Bx. : I have some good pens.
Have yon not nome peim ?
AU ma(»t alwnys procedo the artiuio and the demon-
strative or ))o«DOi<8ivo udjectivcfl.
Bx. : All the boolu which you have.
Tous les livres que vous avez.
All my bookf>.
Aii thune b<ioks.
AU followH the iiranouii to whii-h it rolates.
Ex.: I kxow (hem all.
They ull ttpokc.
lis parlerent tous.
Whole, tout, tout entier, hoA a collective meaning ;
it precedes the sabstantive.
Bx. : Whole citien were desti-oycd.
i>M vHles enti&esfureiit ditrnites.
The whole eoantry.
Tout lepays {en entier).
^
^
i
._-J!
'::i
•40 PSnoiPLSf 0# MGLiaB n»Aw,m ,
Both comet befo^ the noun, bat follow* the pro.
noan. *
Bx. : I took both his hands.
J^i lui prut lea deux mains.
I saw them both.
Je let vie tow deux.
Pronomii. When indefinite adjectiTes are need
alone, they beco.rto prmomB, Here are the principal •
One ; on. *^ r •
Bach; chacun,^
Bach other; Fun I' autre.
One another ; lei wm lea autree.
Every one,everybody,anybody; chacun^toutlenmde,
■Kverythjng ; toute choee, tout.
Somebody, Bome one; jiie^u'toi.
Anything ; quelque chose.
No one, none ; aueun.
Nobody ; persorme.
Nothing, naught ; rien.
Some i lesuns,les autres, quelques-uns.
Else ; (used after somebody, nobody ; . .^elhing
nothing; anybody, anything; who what, intel
rogatire) ; autre, autre ehose '
Othors; d'autres.
-Z^^,— The indefinite pronoun one must nof lu.
confounded with the numeL adjectre Z ^
Ow taken as a pronoun, has no plural. The numeral
adjective «^taken as a noun, hm for plurul ones,
Jfix.: The young ones of an animal.
^^pctitsd'unmmal.
One or ones is used to rtopresent a noun underatood
Qr precedently ezpr«ited. "«o"roott
or THI PBONOUN.
4t
CHAPTER III.
OF THE PBONOUN.
representiDg a noun. *
Pronoang are either ai^eotive or personal.
«>f5**^^* pronouns are those which are used
jometomes .« adjectivee, aometimea as p,^nocrs.
Ibey were seen before.
P«nonaI prononns are those which repreaent
the ^amwa^fcoZ persons. represent
h^^K^^r^'^^'P*'^'*'"*' pronouns, namely, I, thou,
he, *he, It, we, yon, they. ^ ' '
.nl^"*' ''~""""' "'""'^ "^P*"^"' ""'^t^'-. gender
The persons.are three in each number.
Sint-ular: 1, j,^ is the first person.
is the second person,
is the third person inaaac.).
" ' (fern.).
PI , « . " " •. .. (neater).
Raral : We. nous, is the first person. .
Too, von, is the aeoond person.
They, iU, elUs, is the third pewon.
jaoje pronoun, hare two »u«bers ; gender ha.
«»Peot only to the third pe«on singular.
He, she^ it (maM. Um. neuter).
Thou, M,
He, ,7,
She, elU,
It, it, elU,
*> nmoiFLu Of KNOLiin orammak.
Personal prononns have ihreo ta««a :
!• The nominative, le n^feU
2« The posnenive, le eas potseasif.
30 The objective, U Ngim ou empUment.
The objective cale of u pronoon Konerally hue a
form different from that of the nomiiiativo or the
poesessive.
Personal
Ist person :
2nd person
8rd person :
(masc.)
(fem.)
(nenlor)
* Decltniioii.
pronouns are thus dccii
Sinj^nlar
now. I,je.
pon. Mine, h moi,
obj. Ml', moi.
: nom. Thou, tu.
p08S. Thine, a toi.
obj. Thee, te, toi,
nom. Ho, i7.
poas. m», i tui.
obj Him, le, lui.
nom. She, elle.
po$s. Hoiv, a elles.
obj. Rut, la, elle.
nom. It, il, elle.
post. Its. (not QBcd>
obj. It, fe, la, lui, elle.
ned : *
plural.
W»', nous*
OiirK, d nous.
V>>,nous.
You, vous.
Y<mi-H, a vous.
Y<ni, vous.
Thoy, ifo
Thcii*H,aettx.
Thorn, /«. eux.
Thoy, rftes.
Tholrs, a elles.
Them, /«, g/fej.
They, ils, elles.
Theirs, a ««:.
Them, les. eux,
[elles.
ooMrouRo nBrninAV pborouns. 4S
OOMPOUHD pusoval pbohouvs.
The peraonal pronouns of the third person, and the
poiMMive adjective pronono* of the first and sec'ond
person, compoundod with the word telf, are called'
compound perso lal pronoons.
They are eilber reciprocal, when (hey refer back
to the nominuti ve, as : "We droMH oowelvos » ; or they
arc employed to denote emphsisis or distinction.
Bx. : I saw the person myseli.
^<»i vu la pertonne mi-mlme,
Shu herself will doit.
Bile lefera elle-mtme.
The compound personals are :
Mynelf,
OorsQlf,
Thyself,
Yoarscif;
Himself,
Herself,
Itocif,
Oarselves.
Yodrsolves*,
Themselves,
One's self.
moi-mime.
notu-mime,
toi-mime.
vow-mime.'
lui-n^ne.
elle-mtme.
lui'i elle-mime.
nou$-mimes.
vout-mimes.
eux-mime$.
9oi-mime.
The last componnd oneself or onoV >«clf is nscd ih
indefinite sontencei).
Ex. : One dresses or.o'H »elf with onv'^ dresses.
Oh s'habille aoec ges habi'e.
• \
nUNOIPLBl OV IHOLIfH OKAMMAB.
i i
CHAPTER IV.
OF THE VIRB.
A verb is a word which signiies to be, to act, or to
bo acted apon.
Ex. : I am, je suis.
I, speak, je parte.
I am loved, jetmii aimi.
Properly speaking there is odIj one verb in Bnglish
as well as in Frencli : it iM the mbltailtiye Vtrb to be,
considered as neater in Eiii;iish, because it expresses
existence and not action.
Every verb may be resolved into the verb to be and
the imperfect pai'ticiple used as an attribate.
Ex. : ' I speak, I am speaking.
I sleep, I am sleeping.
It is the reason why every English verb, except to
be, may be called attributive, becaaso it contains in
itself the verb (to be) and the attribate.
Ex.: The san shines.
Tia son in shining.
lie eoMl brille.
TbiB man sleeps.
This man is sleeping.
Get homme dort.
To verbs belong Bwnbtn, ptnmu, taniM, and
'noodt.
* OF TBI VIM. 45
Mvmbtri ud p«noBi. Bngiitih yerU hare two
nnmbeiv, the Mngolarand tbo plural.
Ex.: I run, ^ ho run.., (.ing.).
^®""»» th«yjun, (plnr.).
In each number there ure ihroe persons. ^
Singular let person : I li»vc, faime.
2nd person : Thou hivest, tu aimea.
3rd person : He loves, ilaime.
Plural Ist person : Wo love, nous aimona,
2nd person : You lovr, vous aimez.
3rd person : The^ lore, il» aiment.
iV. B. — The first person denotes the speaker.
The second person denotes the hearer.
The thiid person denotes iho person or
thing spoken of.
TtnMi.. Tenses in English veibi form the dis-
tinction of time.
There are three principal tenses :
Tht preient expresses what i^ going on or existinff
as : I love you. *'
Thf past represents the action or event as past or
finished.
Ex. : Ho broke the boitle and the water was
spilt.
// brisa la bouteille et I'eau fut ripandut.
Bw future represents the action as yet to comr.
Ex.: He will come and you will see him.
^ viadra €t vou$ le verrez.
If, ft- The past teose may be sabdivided into
iHree aecoodaiy tenses.
^ nnroinu or uioLm obaioub.
l»n«prtttrttorimptr«MtWnM (patiid^o
•zprMMt «ti action which took piaoo in » time ftilly
Mtt.
Bx. : I saw hiin yeetcrdMy.
Je U vi* hitr.
what haa taken place in a time not yet fUlly pott
Ex : I have koen hira thiv week.
Je raf vu cette iemaine.
3« TlM phipwfiMt tollM (ptw^ue-parfait) ex.
prewci whut had taken place at a past time mentioa-
Ex. : I had i»lopt when you arrirod.
J'avaii darmi quand voiu anivAtu.
The fntaru hat two tenHee.
!• the lint ftltore exprcHgoa whttt i» to come.
Ex : I will see him.
Jele verrai.
«• The leeond ftitore oxpmsHt* what will have
taken piaio before nnoihcr action which in to come.
Ex. : f hhuM huvo fiiii»hed when you corao.
Tawrai fini qwnd vow viendreg.
MOODi.
A mood is a particular form of the verb showing
the manner in which an action is represented.
There are six mooda in English, namely : the
tod^tiYo, the imporatiTi. the poltiitial, the rab-
frnmy, the inflaitiTo, and the putieiiiU.
MOOOI.
4t
!• The todlo»tiT0 mood Himp\y decltrM or Indl-
o«t«. a Ibing : he Iotm, he ii admired ; or a«k« a
qaeetion : do you speak f T^
«• The imptrfttiTt mAod ie used for commandinir
exhorting, entreating or permitting. "'^
Ex.: Speak, let iw call, go in peace.
J'arta, appelona, alUx m paix,
^ The potOBtiia mood implies po«»iblIlty, power.
w«I or obligation J ae: it may rain he mayi^TdS
ride, he would walk, wo Hhuald go. •'•»"•»
40 The inllfimotiTO mood repre^nu a thing under
a condition, motive, wiah, Happoslilon.
Bx. : If he bj good, I will reward him.
8 U ut boH, j€ le Ncompenterai.
60 The inflnitlTo mood uxpreews an action io a
general and nnlimited manner, without any di*.
Unction of number and poi-«or. ; for thie laat reason
thia mood ie called impcrwiial a» well as the parti-
ciple. *^
60 The participle expre.we« an action in a general
niani.er; luoreover, it ha« the properties of an ad-
jective, because it may qualify a uoun.
Ex. : Admired and applauded, be became vain.
Admiri et appiaudi, il devint orgueiUenx,
Bveiy Bogliah verb has two elements, \hfi radical
and the terminatiOH,
The radif^i or root does not vwy. On the con-
trary, the «n»imitte« ^always varies aocotding to
numbers, persorts, moods and tenses.
OoitfllfatioB. The conjugation of a verb ia a
48
rswoipLis or bmolub cmuuuub.
regaliirarniiigement of its moodH, teniMM, penoiMand
nnmberH,
There w only one conjugation io iSngli..h for reiralar
Terbs.
The saino model h uxed for MtiTe-transitiTe
•ctivi-intrMirittTe, Milter and reflected verb*. '
Tlii« conjugation is bastid on two form«, the infini-
tivo and the perfect participle.
The inflnitiye is the verb ilself wiih the preposition
Bx. : To speak, to call, to love.
The perfect participle in nothing dse than the
infimtive to which d or ed has been added.
Ex.: To call,
To arrive,
uulle*!.
arrived.
Aetive-traniitive verbs are those which exprew
an action and have some person or thing for their
object (rrfj/iw). ®
Ex. : I call my brother.
J'appelle mm frire.
AetiTe-intrftlUitiye verbs express an action, bat
have no object. '
Bx. : I walk, I speak.
Vevter Terbe do not ezpraas an aotioB but a state.
Kx.: lam, Je utit, (fexUt^),
I«»«^ Jeicn.
VMMMa,
49
fMiiw Terbi are tbofti which ezpran m aoUon
received or miffttrod bj (h«ir vobjeot.
Bx.
I iiin loved.
I am called.
Btfleclad verbl exprciM an aclioo reverling upon
the agenr, or h. <.iher wordi., on acUon made by iho
rabjecl on hiiiiNolf. '
.£x, : 1 drcHB myself.
Je m'habille.
Impersonal or nniperional verbs are ihoKo which
arc oonjagaUHl only in the third person of all iheir
tenseH. •
Bx.: It rain*, it rained, it will rain.
Ilpleut, ilaplM, ilpleuvra.
B«gttlar verbs are those which form their preterit
and perfect participle by aasmning d or ed.
Bx.: Love, aimer, I loved, loved..
Oall, appeler, I called, called.
IlWflllftr verbs are those whicb do not form their
preterit and perfect participle by awaming d or erf.
Bx.: To rteal, Dlroier, I stole, stolen.
Dr^!^* Z^^ "' "^ ^*»'^'» «>"" tboir
prrterit «,d perfect participle in two or more way/
•0 « to be wgular aod irregoUr. ^
Bx.: Tb dwell, *aWler, Idwel^ dwelt
I dwelled. dwelW.
50
THE NEUTER AUXH
IMOIOATITE MOOD.
Pn$nUUn$t.
I WB.
Thonurt.
H«lB.
Toa«n.
Jmper/tet.
Iwaa.
ThoQ wut.
H» WM.
Yeamn.
They wen.
i hav« been.
Thou hatt beM.
Ha hu bean.
W« iiare baen.
Ton hare baan.
They hava been.
Plufrftct.
I bad baan.
IRwa badat baaa.
Ha bad baan.
Wahidba^
,Y«Blttdb«m.
They had
Firtt futwre.
lahallbe.
Vinn wilt be.
Ha wUl be.
WaahaUba.
Yon will be.
They wiU be.
Second futwe.
I ahall have been.
Thoa wilt hafa beeu.
Ha will have been.
We ahaU have baan.
Yon will have baaa.
Thay will hare been.
POTBXTUt. MOOD.
Preunt.
I may be.
Tiino mavat be.
He may be.
?remayba.
on may be.
They may be.
Imptr/eet,
1 might be.
Thou mightat ba.
He might be.
Wami^htbe.
Yoa might be.
They might be.
PerfsO,
I may have beeu.
ThoQ uiayst have been.
He may have been.
Wf may hare bees.
You may have been.
They may hare beaA.
Piuper/tet.
1 might haw bean,
Thoa mightat bare bean.
Ho might hatm baaa.
Wa mfi^t ha«o baoa.
Yoa mfi|fat hara baoa.
They night bare
UAiiY"TOBE
51
mraBATiTB mood.
Singular.
Sb4 ptnoB Be.
Sri '< Let him be.
avBJiaferiyB mood.
Flural.
let penoa Let lu be.
Sad <• Be.
3rd «• Let them be.
Pnm,'
If I be.
Ifthoabe.
If he be.
If we be.
IfyoQ be.
If they be.
Imper/eet.
It I wen.
If thoQ were.
If he wen.
If we wen.
If yon were.
If they wen.
Piffeet.
If I hare been.
If tbon beire been.
If he have been.
If we hare been.
Ifyoa hare been.
If they hare been.
Pluptrftet.
If I had been.
Ifthoahadbeen.
Ifhehadbaea.
Ifwe had been.
If yo« had been.
Iftheyhadbeni.
wrmiTiTB.
Pruent.
To be.
PAKTtOa«B.
PmmUor
Imptrftct.
Being.
To hare been
ttrftd.
Been.
iVt(fMi/«e»er
HariaghNft.
^ :
Ttotrliatt.
HthM.
W« hare.
They hare.
Imptrftet.
IIumL
Thoohadtt.
H«h«l.
We had.
Toahad.
Thayhad.
ftr/tet.
I lura had.
thtm hast had.
Ibhaahad.
Wa hare had.
Toahafahad.
Thaj hare had.
fliiftr/tet.
I had had.
nMhadathad.
Stiuidhad.
Wa had had.
YMhadha.
TiMf hadhad.
IwiUhaTe.
Thoa ahalt have.
Hf ahaU hare.
We wUl hare.
Ymi ahall hare.
They ahaU hara.
Seamd frnture.
I wiU bare had.
Thon ahalt hare had.
Ha ahall hare had.
We will hare had.
Yon ahall hare had.
They ahall hare had.
Prettmt,
I may hare.
Thoa nuyat hare.
Hr may hare.
We may hare.
Yon may hare.
They may hare.
Imptrftd,
I. might hare.
Thoa mightat hare.
He might hare.
We might hare.
Yon might hare.
They might hare.
Ptrfea.
I may hare had.
Thou mayat hare had.
He may hare had.
We may hare had.
Yoa may hare had.
They may hare had.
Pluftrfttt,
I otight hare had.
niaamightsthara had.
He ffii^Uura had.
We might hara had.
Yoa might bar* had.
They might hara had.
VERB •'TO HAVE
63
f ■
IMPXSATIVB MOOD. SrBJUKOTITBMOOD
Singular.'
2Bd penon Have.
Sid '< Lethimhav«.
IKVIIIITITX. TABTIOirLB.
Plural.
lit ptnonLet as harr.
Jad " Hare.
Srd *< Let them haT«.
I
Premnt.
If I hare.
If thon hare.
If he hare.
If we hare.
If yon hare.
If they hare.
Imper/eet.
If I had.
If thon had.
If he had.
If we had.
If yon had.
If they had.
Perfect.
If I hare had.
If thon hare had.
If he hare had.
If we hare had.
If yon hare had.
If they hare had.
Pluper/Mt.
IflhadhMl.
If thon had had.
If he had had.
If IN had had.
If yoa had had.
If thay had had.
Pretent.
To hare.-
Premntor
imperftct.
Haring.
Perjket.
To hare had.
Perfect.
Had.
PligptrflMtmr
RaviBghad.
-%
REGULAR ViRf
Prttent
I love.
Than loyMt.
HeloTtt.
We lov«.
Ton love.
Th«j loT«.
I lored.
Thon lovedtt
W«l»««d.
Ton loved.
They toved.
PtrfttA.
I h«v« lotred.
Tbea hut loved.
Bo hM lored.
We hftve lored.
Ton hftve loved.
They beve loved.
IhMlbved.
I^on hadet loved.
^w OSS iovea.
We had loved.
Tovhadbved.
Tlnqr had loved.
J^^/tUure
I will lore.
Thoo ahelt love.
He ehell love.
We will love.
Too eball love.
They shell love.
Second futmrt.
IwiU heve loved.
numahiUt have loved.
He ehaU have loved.
We wUl have loved.
Jon ehall have loved.
They ehall have loved
Pr'tmnt.
I may love.
Thou luayet love.
Ha Biav lav*.
Ha Biev love.
■9 lovt*.
We ay lov**.
You way love.
They nay love.
/iKj»tr/M<.
I might love.
Th<.u mightet love.
He mi^ love.
We mqpt love.
Yon might love.
They mipht Jove.
Perfta.
laiay hare loved.
Thoo maykthave loved.
He may have loved.
We may have loved.
,YoD may have loved.
They may have loved.
Pluperfea,
I migiit have loved.
Thott mif^tethaveloved.
He Bight hsveloved.
We migh^t have loved.
YoBflrighthave htved.
They might have loved.
65 H
IIIFMATITlllOOD. UwiniOTITtllOOI).
iNVmiTITB.
Singular.
fad ptnon Lore.
W •• Let him lore.
Plural.
IttmnonLctiulorf.
«»* " Lore.
W " Let them loTe.
I'rtaefU.
It I love.
If tbon loTe.
IfbeloTe.
If we loTe.
If you lovr.
If they love.
Imperfect.
If I loved.
If thuu loved.
If he loved.
If we lovwl
Ifyonlove<l.
If they loved.
PABTIOirtB.
Pretent.
To love.
Prttent or
imptrftet.
Loving.
Perfect.
If I have loved.
If thou luve loveii.
If he have loved.
If we have loved.
If you have loved.
Ifthey have loved.
Pluperfect.
flflhttlloved.
If thou had loved.
Ifhahadkved.
If wa had loved.
Ifyoahadlovad.
Ifthajhadlovwl.
^«/«rt. j Perfeet.
To bare loved.' Loved.
Piuperfeeter j
preperfeet.
Having lovMLi
' \
66
PRIM0IPLE8 or XNOLISa QIUBIIUB.
0BSIRVATI0N8 ON REGULAR VERBS.
6omo rogular verbs uie sobjeot to 8omo modifi-
CfttioDs alreud J spoken of in ooaos and adjeotivM.
1** In all the verbe of one syllable, and in those of
two sylltiblcB having the stress-accent on the last, the
final eonsooant mast be donbied before ed and tfi^
whenever 'his fonsonant is preceded by a single
vowel.
Ex. : To rig, iqviper, I rigged, rigging.
To omit, omettre, I omitted, omitting.
To dig, creuser, digging.
N. B. — To VDcr&hipf and the verbs which end in el
follow the same rule.
-Ex. : To travel, voyuger, travelling.
To expel, ehtuseer, expelled.
To worship, adorer, worahipped.
12° When the infinitive ends in mute e, this e most
4>e taken off before ed and ing.
♦
JBx. : To grave, graver, I graved, graving.
To exhale, exhaler, I exhaled, exhaling.
To continno, continuer, I continned, oontinn-
ing.
N. B. — E most be retained before ing, when-ever
It is preceded by a vowel, except t land u.
Ex. : To shoo,
To dye,
ehaymer,
teindn,
shoeing,
dyeing.
OMlBVAnOM ON BBOULAB YBRBS. 67
the iofinitiTe, or to dintingoi^h two rorba.
Bx.: To«i„ge, fianU^^ singeiog.
^«i^% i.H a«nl to keep the Moft wand ofg, .od to
dittingowh st»^«<ii^ from singing. . . ^' "^
vJh f?'.^ *"^'"* '" '' '^'^ ''"'y ^ to the radical
verb for iho preterit and the perfect participle.
Ex.: T» agree, coih«»m>, a'occwAr, I agreed
agreed. ° '
4«» Verbs ending in y preceded by a consonant
change y into ,' before est, es, and ed. ^*'"«»"»»^
Bx. r To cry, pleurer, thoa cricBt, he cries, cried.
If the final y Is preceded by a vowel, the general
rule ought to be followed. "e general
Bx.: To dismay, consterner, he dismayed, di*.
St or 7''*^ *""*'"* *" '** **• '•' '^' '' '' ^' ^^« '^ »>««>«»
Bx. : To catch, attraper, thou catchest, he
catches. '
Togo, he goes.
6« When the infinitive ends in e preceded bv i
^ese vowels W must be changed in?o y tfore^J;
ofthe imperfect participle. '^^r^ing
Bx. : To die, mourir, dying.
To lie, reposer, lying.
i
JK
FinrtJIFLM or XIIOLMB aSAllllAft.
roBKATiov or Turnt.
. All the tonaea of Boglitb ▼erbs ara formed fH>m the
infinitiye.
1" The preterit it formiKl by adding ed or d to the
radical Terb.
Vs.: To call, I called.
To We, I loved.
N. B. — The socond poreon singolar enda in at :
thon calledat, thia ia the only modification for thia
tanae.
2** The present of the indicative mood ia formed
by placing the peraonai pronoona I, thtm^ he, the, or
if, toe'f yoUf they, betore the radical voi b.
Ex. : I call, we love, they admire.
N. :B.— Thia tenM haa two modificationa :
1** The aecond peraou singular takes »t or est.
Bx. : Thoa calleat, tu appellet,
2* The third peraon atiignlttr takca a or ec
Ex. : He lovea, ho dreaaea, he fetobea.
Thia p«r8on ended formerly in M or «(^A: he oalleth,
he hath ; thia form ia no longer naed, except in poeby,
in the Bible and aa a law-term.
3o The ftlture tenie ia formed by prefixing the
anziliariea AaU and witf to the radical verb.
Ex. : I shall qmik, I will love.
FouunoN o» Timis. 59
^40 The prewnt of the potential mood i« fomed
Sili'clltcfb •""'*"" '"^' ^^"' '"•^' ^«^-- '»»•
Ex. : I may call.
60 The imporfeot tonse of the ume mood profixe.
the auxiharie. might, could, should to the radical verb.
Bx. : I might lova.
I eoald speak.
I woald go.
faZ^^t P«*Ctn"»-« «^ «»« potential mood i»
fomed by prefixing /nwyA«„e. I can have, I must
have, etc.. . to the perfect participle.
Ex. : I may h^ye called.
I must have loved.
70 The pluperfect tenie of the same mood is
etc., prefixed to the porfoct participle.
Ex. : I might have culled.
I shoalU have Hpoken.
I would havo loved.
tntZ^'J^J^^^' '^' pluperfect and the eecoad
fWm of the indicative mood are formed froT tKe
P^^t particplo to which wo prefix I have, I had,
^^^ I will or shall have. *
Ex. : I hjivo loved.
I hud loved.
I shall have lovi-d.
90 The impentiye in „<Hhi.,|; else than the simple
60
MUNOtmS W KNOLtM UltAMMAB.
form of tb« wtub for tb« iMK-ond poravii. Tho oU>«r
ptnoiiW pretlz tho uaxUUry to t*t.
First pcrMii. Let mo oall, (rare).
2iid " Ckll.
Sfd '* Ltt him call,
liii " Lot tw uull.
Sod " OaU.
8rd " Let them oall.
lOo The teiMM of the rallJlllieiiTe mood uro alike
to those of the indicative mood, except tbut they have
no modificattuni>. The verb to 6« m to be excepted
irom thiti rale, becauuo ii htt» a'pai'ticular form for
the present und ibe iiii|>urfix't.
Ex.: If I bo, Uthottbi'.
If I were, If thou wert or were.
11» The imperfect participle i* formed by adding
ing to the iutitiiiivc.
Ex. : To call, calling.
To Hpouk, . speaking.
12* The perfect participle commonly cods in ed
or en, bot has particular forms for irrcgalar verbs.
Ex. : To love, lovod.
To forsake, forsaken.
To grow, grown.
130 The preperfBCt partieiple is formed by pro-
fixing ibat;% or Aat;ui9 ftesn to the perfect participle.
Bz. : Having ' «d.
Having bee. wv«a.
AQJULUftT TUBa.
kVJXLUMY YMKBM,
«1
Av^lUulM, or htlpiiif YtU are thoM by tho
help of which English vorb^ are conjugated. They
I>o, be, have, shall, will, may, con with their modifi.
oatioM, and let and must which have no modificalioM.
The*e auxiUarie», except to have and to be, are
followed by the inflnitive witliout the preposition to,
Ex.: I will go, I can apeak.
I may go, I do work.
I moMt go.
To be .nuiit be followed by the perfect participle
for the im^ive iorm, «,,d by tho impoifect participle
for the prosroiwivo or coinpoimU form.
Kx. : Puwive form : I urn loved.
Pnigrewsivo : I am playing.
form •*'"'' " ^**""'^'''* ^^ '*"' ^"■''''' l*"'-^*«'P'« to
ftil^*!!* JT*^ '^ Pluperftct, and the MOOnd
xarare ot tiio nidiujitiva mood.
Bx. : I have nailed.
I had called.
1 8hall have oailed.
^The ytrllMt «nd -phiperlKrt of the potential
Bx.: I may have loved
I might have loved.
V2
PUJICIPLX8 OF SNOLItB OlAXMAB.
m^^^^^ *"** l»Ii>P«*ct Of the .ubjanoUve
Bz.: Ifl have called.
If I had loved.
the prtpofeet jMurtidpIe.
Bx.: To have ealled.
Having ealled.
liball, IwiU.
^The English language han i.o simple form for the
Thia teu«e in formed by prefixing shall and will to
the infinitive.
Theeo anxUI«rie8. having u different meaning, form
two different futures. «» "»«u
1" The first one called ftitHre Of jimple nradietifln
(^foretelling) cake, skall forTZ^^lTa
«>««forthetwoothew. It wmply forotolls. .
Ex. : I .hall speak, we shall speak.
Thou wilt speak, yoo will speak.
Ho will speak, they will speak.
IW^tbo two others. Itproml««,eomn\ands,threa!«..
^' |Lr"'««. . we will go.
Wioaahtltgo, yott shall go.
Htihallgo, th^ahallgo.
AVXtLXAWr VIRB8. ^
sentence is interrogative 'TZ^JL' ' ?*" ^^
place. ^"" ve, e rerewe com monly takes
^S».: Shall you have money ?
^»irez-vou» de I'argent f
Will you have money ?
V<ndez^<m avoir de Vargent f
Shall yoo oomo ?
ViendreZ'VouB f
"Will you come ?
W7tf most never be used orStk fk a .
interrogations. ^ "^'* ^"' P®"®" *«>
To let.
p^'Cir^'thir;^^^ ^^ ««^
of the imAmtiVe w!!^ lu "* P*"**" P^»~»
inibltiveC^ea J^':i7; "^^ •°'*''*'7 *«»<» «»•
case. '^"**"*' ^~"^»" ^^ '»ie objective
Bz.
^t him speak.
I*tM speak.
^t them speak.
64
PBINCIPLEB or KNGLISH OBAMMAH.
I may.
I may and the imperfect / mig^ are uited to form
the potential mood, which, as noted befoie, im)jlie8
power, possibility, obligation.
Present : I moy go.
Imperfect : I might (bhonid or would) go.
Perfect : I msiy have gone.
Pluperfect : I might (ehoald or would) have gone.
•^•^• — The imperfect and the pluperfect of the
potential mood translate our French oonditional.
Bx. : I should speak.
I WQuId speak.
Je parlerais,
I vhould have i«poken.
, I would have spoken. •
fPaurais parU,
To be.
The auxiliary to be, joined to the imperfect parti-
ciple of another verb, forms a particular conjugation
eiXltA compound or progreuive.
Thb particular form is used when :
!<» The action is actually going on (for the present).
Ex. : I am walking.
Je narehe (dans le momenf).
2f> When the action takes place in the same iirae
-mother .ction : this i* the rwlFwnoh imperfect
Bx.; I was mding when you come.
J^lisaittiirgquevoiuvtiUeg,
30 For the other tenaee, the compound form denotei
a continuance of the aoUon. "enoiea
Bx.; We have becA liitening for hooM.
Jfowavms^couUpeiuiaiUdegkeuns.
nr^ltT.""*.!"''* *^ ^' -peoially for the
pMjent, with verbs expro«i„g an acUon which has
no domtion. and is in «>me manner inaUntan^
Bx. : I call yoa.
Je vcw appelle.
PrewU.
I am speaking.
Thoa art speaking.
He is spMking.
We are speaking.
Yon are speaking.
They are speaking.
Model
Pret, or imperfect,
I was speaking.
Thou wast speaking.
He was spettj^ing.
We were spewing.
Ton were speaking.
They were speaking.
i. t"l~ '^''^ ^^ '^^'"^ *** *" '*»*» ^'o of the verb
tobe^e imperfect participle of the verb which is to
be conjugated. "*
IStii^ If ^ •**''^" immediate ftiture, that !., Z
•otion which is to take place right away
66
nnOIFLBf OF WQUpB OftAIUUB.
Bz.
I am going to ttody my l«aton.
{ Je vai&Hudier ma Ugon.
I WM goiog to biame him.
J'aliaii le bUbner.
a* To be, followed by the p«rfeotpftrtioipIe, is used
to form all the tenMp of the passive conjagation.
Bz. : Ikn lored.
I was loved, etc., etc.
8« Followed by an infinitive, to be may ezpreas
obligation, necessity or fotnrity.
Bx. : We are to entertain our people with the
wordoflifo.
Mua devom nourrir noire peuple de la parole
de vie.
We are to go thore.
■Abttt iroM liL
4* Tobe, followed by the prepositioo about, answers
the French expression .Hre^urle point de,Ureen train
de.
£k.: I am abont to fight.
Je mis en train de me battre.
What are yon abont ?
Que faitet-voue U t
I am abont to write.
Jeeuiien train <fierire.
To do.
TIm present J <l9 and the preterit / did, joined to
&6 infinitive are nsed to form :
1« The priMot and the imperfoct tense of the
AmULUBT TlBBt. ^7
J»*««<f conjugation which expmMi an action with
ampJiaua, or answeif • contradiction.
Bx. : I do speak.
Je parte*
. Too do not woi-k.—! do worJc.
Vim ne travailUz pas. - Je travaille (cer-
tatnemmt),
^ The present and the imperfect ie„«o of inttr.
rogative, negative, and Degalivc-interi-ogaiive verb^
Bx. : Do you come ?
Venez-vouat .
I do not come.
Je ne vieiu pas.
Do yon not come ?
^e venez-vous pas f
refLr^Hr ^ "*! *^ "• ""*^*"' ^*'«" ^0 do not
repeat the principal verb.
Bx, : Bo you know me 7
^e eoHnaisseZ'Vous f
Yes, I do.
Ouif Je vous coHnais.
Bx. ; He plnys as well as you do.
^ joue aussi bien gw vous.
He sang better than you could have done.
M ehanta mieux qm wms n^auries pufaire,
ae spoke bettor than you did.
It parla mieux que wms.
68
PEIirOIPLU or ■NOLMH OBAMMAB
If. B.-^Todo it eometimes iiMd ii an indepeodeat
yerb. To do cm exereue, faire un dnoir. It also baa
tbe meaning of to feel (se porter),
Ex.: Hdwdojoado?
Conmeiit vom portez-^ous f
That irt : how do yon feel.
IBBtOULAR YMXBB.
t
An irregnUur Terb is a verb that does not form
the preterit and perfect participle by aasaming d or
ed; or, in other wordp, an irregular, verb is a verb
which, in its formation, does not follow the regalar
oonjogation.
Bt d nndant ynrbl are those which form their
preterit aiid perfect participle in two or more ways,
so a-t to bo both regular and irregular.
Bu. : To bereave ; I bereft, ber«aved ; bereft,
bereaved.
^' B. — ln the following list, redundant verbs are
marked with an asterisk.
LM of «*e irregular verba.
fo »Mde, demeurer ; I abod^.
To ariM, M Uter: I now,
. To ftwake, tttiUer, $'i-
vHtttr : I awoke,*
abode.
ariMo.
swolco *.
IKftBGOLAB VKR^S.
To bake, euir« au/our ;
Tobe, «r«;
To bear, porler;
To bear, produire ;
To beat, boUre ;
To become, ckvunir ;
To begin, eommetuer ;
To behold, amtempler;
To bend, plier, courber ;
To btrrave, priver ;
To beaeech, mpplien
To beapeak, commandtr
To bid, eommandtr ;
To bind, iter, relier ;
To bite, mordrt ;
To bleed, mignar j
To blow. Milkier ;
To break, eotwr ;
To breed, prodMire;
To briog, apporter ;
TobBild,«d«r;
To barn, briUtr ;
To bunt, eiv«er ,-
To bay, acAeter ,-
To beUy, Ututre uns
embteke;
Toflaat,><er;
To eateh, attraper ;
To ehide^ grotuUr ;
To obooae, ehoitk- ;
Totlnv9,/endre;
To eleave, fattaeher ;
To elimb, grimptr ;
ToeUiig,«'attadk«r/
To elotlie, haiai$r ;
To eome, mmtr ;
I baked,
I waa,
I bore,
i bore or bare,
I beat,
I became,
I began,
I beheld,
I bent,*
I bereft,*
I beaonght,
; I beapoke,
I bad* or bid,
I bound,
I bit,
I bled;
I blew,
I broke,
I bred,
I brought,
I boat,*
I burnt *,
I burst ♦,
I bought,
I belaid •,
least,
I eanght,
I chid,
I chose,
I oloTe, cleft,
I elare,
I clomb *, ■
I clung,
I clad*,
I came.
baken*.
been.
borne.
boru.
beaten, beat.
become.
begun.
beheld.
bent\
bereft •.
beaonght.
bespoken,
bidden or bid.
bound.
bitten or bit.
bled.
blown.
broken.
brad.
bronght.
built*.
burnt *.
burst *.
bought.
belaid*.
cast.
caught.
chidden, chid.
chos»n.
cloTen, cleft.
cleaved.
climbed.
clung.
ckd*.
OOOM.
70
nxKomw or iholiih okaioiab.
To oott» eetltr; I oott,
T« efMp, nrmfMr ; I crept,
To Ofow, ekanttr ; I crew*.
To cut, eouftr ; I cut.
To dan, om ; I durst,
To dan, itUr, trattr ; I ducd.
To dttJ, tro/fuer '; I dndt.
To dig, MeJUr ; I dug *,
Todoi/a<r«/ ' 1 did.
To dnw, denimr ; 1 draw,
To drink, boirt ; I dnnk.
To drire, eonduire ; 1 drore.
To dwell, haUUr ; I dwelt •,
To Mt, nmngtr ; I ate, eat.
To fall, tombtr / I fell,'
To feed, nowrir ; I fed.
To feel, anUir ; I felt.
To fight, « batir* : I fought.
To find, trmmr : I found,
To fiee, «'«i0(t> ; I fled.
To fling, y«faf/ i flung^
Tofly, wtor; I flew,
To foige^ mMUr ; I forgot.
To forgive, T^rdmmtr ; I forgare.
To foraake, fOttmiomiMT: I fonook,
To freeae, gtUr : I frose,
To1n^\LX,aiargtr,frUtr: I fraught •,
To get, obUnir ;
To c^d. dotw;
To gird, egimArt :
To give, draner .*
To go^ aUtr ;
Togmire, fmter;
To grind, mnidn;
Togiow,erB<fr«;
l^ohMg^jMMirw/
I got,
Igilf,
Igirf,
Igare,
I went,
IgCSTOd,
I ground,
I grew,
I hung, *
coat.
crept*
crown*.
cut.
dunt.
dared.
dealt.
dug*.
done.
diawn.
drunk.
driven.
dwelt *.
eaten» eat.
fallen.
fed.
felt.
fought.
found.
fled.
flung.
flown.
forgotten.
forgiven.
forsaken.
frozen.
fraught *.
got, gotten.
gilf.
girt*.
given.
goa:
graven*.
grwind.
grown.
hui^*.
uuiouLAm ynuM.
71
T* ktm, vHtptr, tatikr ; I h«ir«d,
To h»f, avoir; j had,
TohMr.mKMuin; I hewd,
To liMTf, mrffwr / I horo •,
To hUo, eadUr ,- j t^^
To hit, fragpir i I w*,
To hold, Imjr; i h^d,
Tohnrt,/itnmaiA/ I hurt,
Toke*|vjonfcr.. I kept,
Tokaoel, •'o^NOMiU^; I knelt*.
To kait, trieoUr ;
To know, aavoir ;
To lede, ekarg$r ;
Tohj,poaers
Tolt^eonduini
ToU»p,»ataer;
Toleavt. laifMT;
To lend, prftr ;
To let, laitter, louur /
Tolie,r»/>oier/
To light, a2;«m<r/
To loee, perdre ;
To nuke, /aire/
To mesn, vovJUtw din ;
To meet, reneontrer ;
T(iia.vm,faueh»r i
To pay, paytr ;
To pea, tn/ermer, par-
qugrj
Topnt, Dwftre;
To quit, quitter ;
To iMd, lirt 1
To IMM, «er ;
To read, d4ehir«r ;
To rid, (MomuMr;
Toride,a22H-<teftMNii/
I knit •,
I knew,
Ilwled,
lUid,
lied,
I leapt •
Heft,
I lent,
Hot,
Hay,
1 lit •,
Host,
I made,
I meant,
I met,
I mowed,
I paid,
I pent *,
I put,
I qnit •,
Irrad,
Iwft*,
I rent,
Irid%
Iiode,
liawn*.
had.
beaid.
hoTe, hoTen.
hidden, hid.
hit
hold.
hurt.
kept.
knelt •.
knit*.
known.
Udep*.
laid.
led.
loapt*.
left.
lent.
let
lain.
lit*.
loet.
made.
m-ant.
met.
mown •.
paid.
pent*.
pat.
quit *.
nad.
»tt*.
itat
rid*.
ridden.
72
PtIlfOirLM or INQLISH OBAMMAE.
J.
To ring, tornntr ;
To liM, m ItPtr ;
To rir», fmdn ;
To nuit eourir ;
To Mw, $eier ;
To My, dirt ;
To M«, voir ;
To wuk, ek«reMer ;
TotMthr, ioMiMr.t
To sell, Miulrv ;
To tend, envoyer ;
To Mt. potr ; ,
To »h$k», tteoHtr ;
To ahftve, n»»er .•
To ahear, tondh ;
To ahed, n^K<ire ;
To ahine, ArtVfar ;
To ahoe, ekavtttr ;
To ahoot, tinr .-
To ahow, mflntrer ;
To ahnd, Aa«Aer ;
To ahrink, m r^rietV ;
To ahrive, w con/euer ;
To ahar, /erm«r ;
To aiog, chanter ; .
To aiuk, 't'enf oncer ;
To ait, a'aueoir :
To alay, f««r /
To aleap, dormir ;
To alide, ^/icwr ;
ToaliD^r, lanetr avee
KM fronde ;
To dink, M d4r(titr ;
Todit»/<iHir«;
1feaiBita,>a9qMr ;
To aow, «NMr ;
T6 mm ^), wiHirf ;
inng,
I HMe,
Irired.
I nut,
I aawed,
I Mid.
I a«w,
I aooght,
laod*.
laold,
I aeut,
laet,
I ahook,
I ahaved,
I ahore,
I alied,
I ahone,
lahod,
I ahot,
1 «howed, .
I ahred,
I alirauk, abrnuk,
I ahroTe,
I abut,
I "Mg.
I aank,
I aat, a«t«,
I Blew,
lalapt,
laUd,
I alaiif^
I alank,
I alit %
I amote,
iMwad,
Imrad,
rang.
riaeu.
riren •.
ran.
aawn *.
aaid.
MMn.
aought.
■oddan *.
sold
Ment.
aet.
shaken.
aliavea *.
shorn.
»hed .
shone.
ahod.
ahot.
shown «.
shred.
shrank, abrnnken.
shriren.
sbnt.
aoiig.
sank.
Mt.
akin,
dopt.
alid, aliddea.
slang,
ainnk.
"lit*,
amittmi
•OWB*.
T0»plB,/far;
TotpUt,/«iid^;
To •prnd, «Md>v /
To stead, N <»iii> OtboHt / 1 Stood,
IBUOOLAB. TSIM.
Ispok»,
Isiwd,
Ispsnt,
I spilt •,
1 spsu, spaa,
I split.
I spit, spst,
Isprssd,
I sprsog^ •prangs
73
Tostey, atUndre ;
To stsd. AM«r ;
To stick, s'attaeA«r d ;
Tostiacjiignwr;
To stiak, jmir ;
Tostitw./oiMJUr;'
To straw, Ummift ;
Tostriag^Mi/Ufr;
To strirs, t^m^nrcer;
To stride, M^^omiM* ;
Tostriko,/r«>ffMr;
To swsAr, >«rw y> ' •
To swsst, Mwr ;
To sweep, telsyer;
To swsU, ti^Ur ;
To swim, Mfer :
To swing, M Aa/ancer ;
To tsks, j»reiM(r« ;
To tesdi, entcifner ;
To tesr, dtehinr >
To toil, din :
To thiak, /Miiwr .•
To thrive, pnttftrtT ;
"fo iknw, Jeter;
Tothnut,jM««sr
X stsid •,
Istelr,
Xstaek,
Xstaa^
Istaak,
rstrewed,
I strewed,
1 stmag •,
I strare *,
I strode,
Istnek,
■ I s«rore,
I •wort-,...
Iswep^
I swelled, ^
Iswiai,
I swdag,-
I took,
1 tON,
I told,
I tfaoagkt,
Ithrave*,
i: tkiew,
Itiirast,
spokeu.
sped.
•Ptnt,
spilt •.
spaa.
«pUt. .
•pit, spittea.
•pNsd.
•P»«ng,
stood.
staid*.
stolen.
stock.
stnag.
stoak.
stnwed.
- Mtrawa. •
•4tiBag •.
..^trfren *;
striddea.
slndk, striekea,
•■•tswora. ■■ .
tsweeted.
swept.
swoUea *.
Totmd.faulerayafieibt I tn»d,
swaag;. .•
tsfcen.
teogbt.
torn.
told.
tkeegUt.
thrirea*.
thrown.
thrast.
*»«WeBortawd.
f* *miifc»wM or BNOLim
To WM, tirtr /
To W9MX, porUr ;
to wukYt, Utttr i
To w-p, plettnr ■
To win, gagmr aujtn ;
To wind, tounw ;
To work, tmwaitkr -
Towriat,tordn;
Tbwritht,«etor*»;
To writ*, rfcnr» ;
I
IWMltd,
I WOT*,
Iwow,
Iwtpt,
I WOB,
I WOOftll, -
I wraogbt •,
I wraog^
I writhod,
Iwroto,
OIAMMA
wazcB •,
won.
WOTtB.
wtpt
won.
WOQud.
wrooi^t
wnwg.
. writhtn.
WrittOB.
I>IFIOTIVX VttBt.
•nd art .«Kt l,i bot f«w of tbo mood. an^Sml^^
whicb art eoMfckred n^ pri««|^ -"l^i-i^M «
^Tbeylb*vt,.ot lw«t«.«,«,„,^^ ^^
then eqairutawt to lougkt, ^^ ^ "*
Bx.: Aratw,»bottldlov«Ebn6igW»Br,
iTn ;i0mm« doit ainm mm proehttm.
Y<M» shoald hnve «poken.
20 Win wo«M.
Iwiil, I waul', ou- ««•.. _^ • I
^^^^^^^ •<'oi« , ou.. «.c. . ., TOgr have tbo mam of
*^^^^,
DUICTIVB TMB*. 7;,
JBx. : Hfttr mc, for I will nponk.
Scoutez-moi, carje vtux park,.
Ho woold not (CO when h« could.
3« ICay, might,
with th« meaninff or/A<}t;« /A« «o.<,«. #1 li '^"^*'"^
Ex. ; I miiy go tli«ri\
Je puis atirr /A.
«
4- Oan. eoQld.
le^, leouid men pouooir wHh the .enso of I am
Ex.: I can go there.
•^« puis aiter iH.
I can elide.
Je puis gtisser
I can hwirn.
«^e MM fM^«r.
verb r. JX ^'"" ""' ^^y »»«^° "o^ ^« ««o thu
.iSx.: I hare boeii able 10 go ihere.
«^tf » ;>« atier Id
I shall bo ablo 10 do it.
76 PftlirOIPLIS OF ENGLISH QRAMMAB.
miwt bo joined to the present / can, m iw to form only
one wo-d.
Ex. : I cannot come to-day.
Je ne puis venif aujourtThui.
I could not do it.
Je rCai peu puie fain.
f'O Mint.
Immt has only one form. It translates the Primob
verb devoir, and dxpressos absoluio necessity.
Ex. : W.- must die.
N<mi devons mourir.
Yon must work.
Vbui devez travaiUer,
60 Ought.
I ought, like I must, has only one form, it translates
devoir, and expresses a moral obligation, a duty.
E.x. : Yott ought. to love your parents.
Vow deviz aimer vos parents.
Yon ought to servo Grod.
Vous devez aeroir Dieu.
N B.^lo Defective verb, followed by an infinitive
do not :uimit the lue of to before this infinitive.
/otf^A^ n lone, is excepted.
Ex. : I should go there.
J'iraislh. . .
I may come.
Je puis venir,
I ought to work.
Je doit travaiHer.
DKWcnVK VEOBS. 77
Ex.: Imustwoik ii *»..*
Thon mus, wo. k. // faut que tu travaiUea. -
We must wo,k. Ilfaufquenoustravaillions
^ll^^^yy^o'k n faut guevous, etc.
Thoy must work. ///a„;^«V^,,^^
I was obliged lo wuik. // /,,/7^.> ^
I have been obliged i« wo, k 7 {1^, ^"' *''' '''•
I had been obli-^cd i„ Zk ^ ^ !; ^"' ^'- ''"'
I shall be oblig:d t wl k 7 Z!, ^'''" ^"' ^'^^
in»8ent we hare in Fromb '''*
Ex.: You ougbtiobuve worked.
Foiw awrJ•«^ da ttavaiUer.
H« might have sung.
n await pu chanter,
8« Awars h„ only ih.. im,«.,«iive forir.
^•■^manotauiumn.
^(o-dtz pma da /hltnri.
78
PaiNCIPLBS or BRQLI8H OOAIOIAB.
40 Wis, pi-ctoiii uj,it, mvoir, sunpoter, i> „«,w nearly
Obsolelo; 11 H «iiiK-Jiirie» i« bo ioim . in ihc Bible.
5» Wit, sacoir, preiorit wot, in 1.0 longer ii^ed,
except in Hn^ l^hran^ to wit whhh memiHinamelu, that
:« to Mj/f
INTIRROOATIVS OONJiraATION.
Eveiy. English verb may be conjugate.! inter
rogatively, by t'be transposition of the nominative,
which !,< placed after the verb Or after the fiwt anxi-
Iiary.
JV:^. — In the intoii-o^.aiiv.. fo- Jngmion, shall and
should arc u^«d instead of will an.l wmld in tliu .ooond
perRoii.
IndieatiTe mood.
Present. Imperfect.
Do I love ? Est^e quefaime f Did I love ? Aimai^je f
Dost thon love ?
Does ho lovfl ?
Do we love ?
Do you love ?
Do they lovo ?
Perfect.
Have I loved ?
Hast thoa loved ?
Has he loved ?
Have we loved ?
Have yon loved ?
Have th«y loved ?
nid!<t thou love?
Di«l he lore ?
Did wo lOve ?
Did yon lovo ?
Did thoy lovo ?
Pluperfect.
Had I loved ?
Hadst thon loved ?
Had he loved ?
Had we loved ?
Had you loved ?
Had th^ loved ?
IKWRROOATIVB OOIMOOATION. Q
laifutwe. 2nd future.
Slull I love /
Shalt thoa love ?
Win he love ?
Shall we love ?
Shall yon love ?
Will ihey love ?
Shall I have lovoU ?
Shalt thoa have loved ?
Will he have loved ?
Shall wo have loved ?
Shall yon have loved f
Will ihey have loved f
Potential mood.
^'•*»^'- Imperfect
May, can or must I love ? Might, coald or «bo«ld he
«»y»t, oaoat, mast thoa lovo ?
love ? ■%£' 1.
Mav can «„.* k I o ^'ff»»»''t.coalti«t,8hoald«t
Jlay, can, mast he love ? etc. thoa lovo ? etc., etc.
^ ^'^*'^*- Imperfect.
May, can or most Might, could, shoa Id *
I love ? etc., etc. I have loved ? etc., etc.
iV.^.-_lo When ihe subject is « noan, the verb
« constraed i.. the s.»me way as with a pronoun, bat
Ex. : Does John como ?
Did yonr sister see me ?
Vctre feeur m'at-elle vu f
^n^lL'^ i"""™g»tiv« co„j„g»,i„„ of dof«,i„
vero, without any aaziliary.
Ex. : Are you rich ?
JStes-vous rieke f
80
PBIN0IK.E8 Olf ENGLISH OaAIIlIAB.
Can you lomo wiih n» ?
Pouvez-voui venir avee nous f
Must wo work now ?
Devons-nous travailier maintenant ?
30 When the sulyoct i» one of tho interi-ogatlve
pronouns who f or what f, tho auxiliary verbs do and
djVf are not used. The same rule must be followed
when which, whose, how much, how many uro joined to
the snbject. «
Ex. : Who comes ihcro ?
Q^i vient W f
What goes on thoro ?
Que se passe-t-il in f
Whose houHo burns ?
Quelk est la maison qui brttle t
RIOATIVE OONJUOATIOir.
The aame ttaxiiiftrioii do and did are used to conju-
gate negative verbs.
The negation not simply precedes the verb in the
tenses of the infinitive and jwrticiple.
In the other tenses of the conjugation, not is always
plaoed after the first auxiliary.
In the iraporalivo mood, tho noguUon comes after
the proBoan.
IndioatiTe mood.
Imperfect.
I did not love.
Je n^aimai pas.
Present,
I do not love.
Je n'm'me pas.
NEOATIVE
Thou dost not love.
Tu rCaimes pas.
Etc.. etc.
Perfect,
I have not loved.
Thou hast not love- 1.
He has not lovcd. oic,
1 St future.
I shall not Iovt>.
Thou wilt not l«»v<".
Ho will not lovr, flc.
OOKJDOATION. gj
Thou didst not love.
Tu n'aimas pas.
fit-., .-t.-.
Pluperfect
I hmJ not iov«'d.
Thou hadst not loved.
Ho ha<i not loved, etc.
-nd future.
I h.-ill t.ot have loved.
Tho.i wilt i.ot have loved,
llowrll not i,:,ve loved, etc.
Potential mood.
, .^'■'*''"'- Imperfect.
^'r'^'y^^ ' <"'-l.!, .houid, would not
Jove, etc., otc. loye, etc., etc.
Perfect. Pluperfect.
I can or m.mt not h:.vo I .onid, sho.dd, would not
• lovod, etc., oto. h...vo lovod. etc., etc.
Imperative mood.
Singular. p^,,^^;
l«t Let mo not love. 1,,. Let m not love.
2nd. Do not lev... Ond. Do not love.
3rd. Let h.m not lovo. 3rd. Lot ihom not love.
Sntijanctive mood.
^^^nt. Imperftct.
If I do not love. If I did not lovo.
^^«' «<^- Etc., etc.
$
f "tent.
Sfoi ' love.
Imr iect.
Not io ^ing.
Hi
82 rmiwoiPLEs op x.vulish aiAsiitAR.
Perfect. Fivperfwt.
If I have not lovod. If I had not lovol.
Et€., etc. Etc., etc.
IiflBitive.
Ferfeet.
Not to have lovud.
Participle.
Perfect.
Not loved.
Preperfect.
Not having loved.
Jf.B.— lo Wiih defective and auxiliury verba,
• with the verbs to dare (oser), to need (avoir besoin))
we do not use the auxiliaries do and did.
Ex. : I am not learned.
Je ne suis pm itutruit.
I miiHt not go there.
Je ne doU paa alter li.
You need iioi lome.
Vou8 navez pas besoin de venir.
We dare not laugh.
Ifbus n'osona pas rire.
2o Do and did are not used with Ibo negations no,
nothing, nobody, never.
Ex. : I possess no books.
Je ne poitide pas de livres.
I fear nothing.
Je ne crams riem.
NBGATIVB-INTEBBOOATiVB CONJUOATION.
Wo noToi' i<))euk.
^om ne parlms jamais.
Wo udmire iiobo Ij-.
Mus n'admirons //ersonne.
83
MlOATnrE-INTBBlOOATIVB OOHJU-
OATION.
Nefative-interrogatlvt rerbs :«ro tboso which
wtpress a qaestlun wiih a notfaii.,.,. They aro forme<r
67 phicing the mgaiiou «f,cr iho noinirmtiro when
It IS a pronoun, or before it. who.i it is a noon.
Ex.: Do I not speaJc f
Bit-et gm j^ne parte pas f
Ibm Mit yoQr friviid mmb I
Will not Peter go ihere ?
tbeprottOM.
Bx.: Don't yottijmJfc?
iBdJcfttiTe mood.
Do I not loire r
Eic^ etc.
Perfect.
Have I not loved ?
Etc, e$e.
Imperfect,
Did I not lore ?
Etc., etc.
Pluperfect.
Hud I not loTed ?
Etc., etc.
84
PUINOIPiBS or INOLUH GBAMllAm.
I
I
Ut future, 2nd future.
Sh«ll 1 not lore ? Shall I not have loved ?
^'«-» •»«• Btt'., etc.
Potential mood.
■'*'■««'»'• Imperfect.
May, cau or ma^t I not Might, could, ehould, would
lore ? etc., etc. I not love 1 etc , etc.
"^^ff^ct ^ Pluperfect,
May, can, or must I not Might, could, should, would
have loved ? etc., etc. I not have lovod ? eto.,eto,
PA88IVI VIBBB.
Pailiye verbl arc thoee which represent their
■ttbjoots a8 being acted upon ; or, in other words,
PM8IV0 verb* ezproaaan itotion received and suflfered
by their subjeote. / , :. ;
A passive verb is fbrmed by Adding to all the tenses
of the verb to be the perfect partijBiple of the verb
which is to be conjugated pa«uveiy.
IndioatiTi mood.
Imperfect,
Preunt.
I an» loved.
Etc.
Perfect.
I have been loved.
Etc.
lit future.
I shall bu loved.
Etc.
I was loved.
Etc.
Pluperfect.
I had been loved.
Etc.
2nd future.
I shall have been lovwl.
Etc.
Pruent.
PAMITK VIHBS.
Potential Mod.
8ft
Imperfect.
I nuy, olc, be lovnl i .- l
Etc. '^**'' '*"'•• *»" '«^««»'
_ * K»c.
T_ JPluperfect.
ImperMiT*.
2nd.a,i.v«i. 2,';ii i!',"" ';" '"'"'•
3rd. Lot b,m bo loved. 3.,. L^t ibom be lo^ed.
Snbjonctiye mood.
Present. If
If I beloved. .. mwZloL.
Ifl^T Pluperfect:
If I have been loved. ifi^^ been loved.
Inflnitiye. '-'■
To be loved. To have been loved.
Being loved. Having been loved. '
N. A— The indirect object ipf a aaMive verb i.
rrwcn , the English laogwge has by and toi/A.
Ex. : On.- place waa beweged by enemies.
^fe place fut astiigie par /« ennemis.
Oar chareh was destroyed by fire
-'^«''*« *7^»»c /Wf di«n«Ye par le fat!
89 pBiNomu or wvolish oiaiuiab.
With is uMd frith tho nuroo of th« inatrament.
Ex. : Hu was killed with a aword.
// fut tui av$c une 4pie.
The city was surrounded wilh a wall.
La vilie fut enlourie cTitn mur.
A0TI?I-niTRANBITI7l V1BB8.
An MtiTt-faitnikiiitiTe rtrB is that which ex.
presses an actioo, but ban no person or thing for its
object.
Bz. • I come, I spealc.
Je viem, Je parte.
These ▼erbA are ronjoj^nied like activo-tnmaitiva
▼erbs, tb^ fake tbe anciliary to Aom hf tlktir oO«.
pound tenaat.
Bs6: IbaiWeosMk
Je wit venu.
He arrived yeeHtee^,,
II est arrio* Ueft,
KB,-^lo Thu vei:b/0 4« aeeM»tob»a«siHne(|l^
some intransitivo vcrb^ : I am cOnae, be is arcfive^
Unjf ii« gone. In aiich <'««o« td ie expresses a sCal^
wBne to kate express^ oh aeiiom.
Bx. : We arrivoU yesterdaj at ten o;olodc
iVbtts sommee arrivh kier & dix ieuree.
They are nrrivod.
lie som (trrivie. (T6«y are no longer
' absent).
2o Aclivcintransitive irerbs, connected with pre-
UVLIOTBO TUBS. 97
p«ition. have .tho force of iictivc.tran.ltive verb,
•nd, for that r««o„, muy 5, „^ .„ ^^ ^^^.^^ ^«;;^
To .peak to. To bo H,.okon to.
To.p«Ucof. T.. be .,Uon of.
To laugh at. To bo lau^^hod ac. '
Ex. : We wuro !»p<.keii to.
Oh nous parla.
They uro Hiwikoii oK
On parte d'eux.
You wui'f IttiijrhwJ ni.
On a ri <ie vous.
.ir«t'!!r';""',:""'''" ""'" ""J- «•"»•"".<» hare
Ex. : I slept a Nlef|..
, t^ <2onni« tt/t somme.
He fought tho ^ro,Kl fight.
// livra le bon combat.
He breathed bin last br.'aih.
// rendit le dernier aoupir.
&BFUOTXD VCSBS.
clal o? vc,t wh K *^"'"' •" ^""'•^' ^° " -^'^•••^
Bpon the agent; or, i„ other wo,xl.. an action wh i
18 made by the subject «„ f r.olf *****
Ex. ; I droKH myMolf.
Jem'habilte
They flatter thondMelvoii.
Its te fiattent.
^
^<
%.
<.*'
x-u . v^
V.V
N^^
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
^
1.0
I.I
ltt|2£
Itt
u
133
m
1^
|2j2
12.0
^'^l
L25 1 U I L6
150mm
y^PPLIED^ INA4BE . Inc
_^^ lessEMMamstTMi
.^^'^ RochMMr, NY 14609 USA
.^^^ Phone: 718^82-0300
'^S'.SBS Fax: 718/288-5988
e 1993. ApplM kntg*. Inc.. M nghli RmwvM
^
^
^
A
'^
4ip^^ ^
o^
;^
88
PBINO.rLIt OW eifOLtSH GRAMMAE.
Tboao voiIm :irc coiijiigatoU in Engliiih by adding
to tilth* teiiiM>i« und p<i><M.>( of iho regular ooojii-
gstion the ioin|H>iii<d |M'i>ouni pronoans myUlf^
thy$elf, himstlft fmrnlres, yourseloes, Iheniselves,
Ex. : I drer« myM.*lf.
TIioii Ul'utlHt•^l thyMclf.
Qo drui«m.'M hitiihcil.
Wu draMt oui-MolvuH.
You <ii'i'Ki« youiMilnsM.
TJu*y drcj*> ilh'iiooiveM.
ftnd so on, l«y (ollo^^n:; i\u- ircnerul riilo given.
JV. JJ.— Th«* ronsiiiiciioii of ih'wo verbs is very
differeiil in the two Innsriingui*.
• I* Tn EogliKh, ihu compontKi pcrnonul pronoan is
always plticutl iilier iho v. rl»; in FreMtb, iho pronoan
is simpiu iind alwayn pli«*u<l bcforo.
Ex.: 1 flaitdr mysulf.
Je meflatte.
i!» Tho Bjigli^h uw» ihu auxiliary to have in tho
oompoand UMme* of thvKu verb:!; tbo French use
to be.
Ex. : I have flattered myielf.
Je me aus flatti.
I shall have dre«8od myself.
Je me serai hubiUL
30 To become reflected, a verb mast be ootiva-
transitive, bernn.Ho this verb expresses an aetion
which has nn object ; ai«, when I say : I dre$i myul/f
the object is n^ielf, but wo know that an aotiT»>
BtrLKCTlD VSBB8. 39
Ex. : I creep.
Ex. : Ton hoIU well.
X« /A4 M vend bim
Thoao bodksaro much read.
(^^iivm^lUgntbeaucoup.
The lotier do«:, „ot icud well.
^f^ lettre ne se lit pas bien.
To abstain.
To agree.
To tNube,
To beware of,
To blow,
To boaet.
To catch cold.
To care for.
To complain,
To ore«p.
To delight io,
To dialooate.
To diatmst,
To endcaToor,
Toereape,
**tf6»/enfr.
»*aecorder.
w bttigner.
*e gardtr.
9e vanter.
''oeenper de.
*e plaindre.
**in»inuer.
»« plaire rJ.
«« dAnettre, (»e dUloqntr),
tdifier.
t^iehapper.
00
PBWeiPtBS OV BNOLISH 6BAMMAR.
To «!xpeot»
9*atteHdre.
To exolaim.
fierier.
To evaporate,
t''ira:torer.
To fade away.
»»/aHer.
To fkini awa^v,
»*icatuntir.
To fall a«Ieep,
$'endormir.
To flee.
*'enfkir.
To flock io crowds.
t'attreuper.
To flow out.
»*ieouler. .
To fly away.
a'eHvoltr.
To fly into a passion.
a^emporter ide'eotire)
To get up,
te kvtr.
To get ialoxioate^.
s'enivrer.
To get ready.
te preparer.
To grow better.
a^amender.
To " bold,
»*en*ardtr.
To *• drowsy.
8'a$$oupir.
To '* familiar.
at familiariMer.
To " impatient,
aHmpaiienter.
To " milder.
ae radoucir.
To " proud.
a^enorgteiUir.
To •* rich.
a^enriekir.
To " tire.1.
ae laaatr.
To keep ready,
aetenirprit.
To kneel down,
a^agenouiUer.
To laugh at.
ae nu)quer de.
To lean upon.
a^appuyer anr.
To make haste.
ae kdter.
To make one's escape
, a*iehapper.
To nmldle with.
ae miler de.
To mistake,
ae tromper.
To mistrnot.
ae mifier.
To oppose.
a'oppoaer.
To perceive.
a'aptrtevoir.
To read.
ae lire.
To relvl,
l'" rejoiirv.
To rtMiieitibfr,
T<» reiiri',
To retract.
To resign,
To aeixe.
To sell.
To sit down.
To stick to.
To stoop.
To stop,
To subscribe,
To surrender.
To take oftense,
To take refuge,
To take r^st.
To wake,
To wonder,
IMCIPBOCAI. VlfHB.i.
■■"■ r^Pol/tr.
»t rifouir,
*e aouveitir.
»« retirtr.
»e ritraeter.
n.demtUrt.
9'empaicr.
Me vendre.
, is'attachtr t).
*« penck«i,
t'arreter.
x'ahottner,
lit reitflrc.
x'offenaei:
He r&fiigier.
He repoHer.
a'SoeJUer.
H'ilonner.
91
BEOIPROOAL VERBS.
Bedprocal verbs arc those whi.-h ovprcs. tho
•ntorcbange of an action between two ornovoril
eon.eqnent,y, they are neve.- used b..t in thoH;:!;
The Kngh-sb languaffo has two compound pror.ouns
rr^tnto^^ ^''^ '^'*^'*^'-- -^«--«n-L
Reciprocal verbs are conjugated by adding to all
PBINCIPLE8 or XNOLIhH UHAMJIAB.
the pcrtiOiiH ot the rf;:u!m- • oi jii;i;jilioii Ihu pronountt
each other ov one another.
Ex. : We love «:ich oilit'i.
Aoti5 nous aimcnff (lous «kux).
Tbi'y o.«!c'eiii ohu atiotliur.
lis a'C'timent k» ms Ics autres.
Duvid Mild Joimihiiii lnvi-ii i-ucli other tciidurly.
Peter, John, uiid Jumc^ luvu (inu unolhcr.
If. ^.—Wlicn each other and one another arc indirect
objcclH, tlitt pioposition in plucctl bifuio tbu first
pronoun tnid uoi utlvr it.
£x. : WoidH uro derived tn»m one another in
vnrioiiH ways.
Jjes mots ttirivent tes uns des autres de
dtffirentes mamires.
UNIPER80NAL VERBS.
Unipersoilftl verbs are tlio^c which arc conjagfttcd
only in tbu third person ot nil tbeir tcntictt. Their
aobject is the porhonal pronoun it, uned absolutely,
that if, roprcscntin*; no noun or pronoun prcvionsly
oxprotiHcd.
It pteut.
11 plui.
It raint>,
It rained,
It has rained.
It had rained.
It will r:\ii),
Does it rain ?
Will it not rain ?
ft does not ruin.
// a plu.
II avait plu.
II pleuvra.
Pleut-il f
Ne pleuvra-t-il pas f
It ne pleut pas.
It would not rain, // ne pleuvrait pas.
tmiPEB80.VAL VEDBst 93
-y.^-Sovoial v,.,bs which aio impoi-gonal in
*ronch are ,.ot ^o i,, H ..,i,|, , „,„, ^,,;^^.^ .^ ^,.^^^^
luted by rf<?t>o<> i.. tho lollowing ,n..i„„or :
///au< queje marche, I ,),„si walk.
Ilfaut que vous marchiez, Y,.ii must walk
Ilfaut qu'ils partenf, Thoy ought lo start.
IlfaUait queje, . , ..etc. I w«s obliged to. . . .etc.
Ilfaudra queje etc. 1 ^h.•.ll be obliged to... .etc.
To bappcn, aniver, il arrive, et.-., is „ot impersonal
m r'ngliMh.
Rv. : I happened to 8co him.
U arriva queje le vis.
To allow, pcrmcttre. is ..abject to ihe same obser-
VAtion.
E.x. : Yon me allowed tospf-nk.
II vous est pemiis de parler.
There is.
The French unipei-sonal verb il y a, followed by a
noun is translated into English by the adverb there
and the verb to be, which .agrees with the following
nonn. *
Ex. ; There is u man.
liya un homme.
There were men.
// y avait des Jiommes.
There is or there are, // « ^
There was or there were, // y avait.
There has beep or there have been, Itya eu.
There will be, j^ ^ ^^^^^
M
PHINOIPLKS or K.V0I.IMI1 QBAllMAU.
Thvre will huvu buun,
Thoro would be,
Thoro would huvu buun.
Thoro muj bu,
There might be,
II y aura eu,
II y await,
II y aurait eu.
II peut y avoir.
[I pouvait y avoir.
\
N. B. — lo Thittojnttiructiuii with tho udvoib f Aere,
may Bomotimcs bo u^cd to Inuislulu tK)rnu bVonch
activo-iiiUtiiisilive vurb^ uimhI n» uiii|)ui>orial.
Ex. : There cumo u mun out of thu woods.
// wttit tin hcmme <lu boia.
29 Id aD iDtonttj'ation, there follows ibo vorb to be
in Himplo tonso» :
Is there, y a-t-it t uru there, y a-t-il' f
In the compound tensoD, there follows thu auxiliary
verb.
Hub ihuro been ? Y a-t-it eu t
Shall there be ? Y aura-t-il ?
30 When the verb to become has for its subject the
interrogative prononii what, it must be construed as
an impersonal verb, and thu i«ubject of the French
verb becomes the indirect object in English.
Ex. : What will become of him ?
Que deviendra-t-il f
A.-* II y a, expressing time fully past, is translated
by it t«.
Ex. : It is twenty years sinoe he went off.
II y a vingt ans quHl at parti.
95
(list
OV TIIK P.iHTlOIIM.E.
Ex.; 1 1 is iliive
L! iiiilt.-* li om Bwiu|)ort lo Qaeboq
Itya trois nUlles de Beaiiport ii Quibec. '
, >
f
CHAPTER V.
OF THE PARTIOIPLS.
Tho parikiple in a ceriafn fonn of the verb which
enve. .u name from i.« parlicipaiing. 0070^1^ of
U.o^propcr,lo« of a verb, but al-o of thoS of an ^dje^f
®'- • ^^^^^'^ «'« J«iro«» of knowing ov«y
Aam.«d a»d ap,»la«dttl. h« b^mmo viUn.
j4j/m»r< et applawU, it dmitu ^gueaieiix.
The boy, haviog ttndied his Iomod, w»
uliowod to play.
L'enfant,aymt itudU sa Ugm, eutlaper-
mmim dejouer,
fe.fr "'''i^'^ participlos : Tho pi^otor imper-
fect, tho perfect, «,.d tho compound peifectorSrl
perfect : m, loviiig, loved, Imvil^loveT ^
The present participle uu.ia in w^.
Ex. : Working; chiKlron.
The perfect participle ond« i„ ed in .-ogular verb.
and has a particular tormination in irregular verb.. '
96
PBUfOIPLU or IMOLMII UUAUXAft
1
Ex. : Lovi'd, uUmired, onteomud.
Broken, wrought, khrunkon.
The dvmpound fttrfcct w preperfect participle in
formcil by pi'efixiiig havimj or having been to the
porfout purticipio ; it oxprwMcit tho previoui* complo-
tion ol nil action, thut if, uii ucliuii tuking placo
before anolbur./NMt or to come.
Ex. : Ckurioa, buviiig writtuii the letter, des-
ptttched it.
CA ^ve«, ayant 4crit la lettre, t'envoya.
Peter, having Hiudicd hii« lcii»on, wiU play.
Pierre, oyant itudii sa le^n^jouera,
^JV. if.— 1*» Kvery Frcnvli verb in ihu infinitive
mood, coming uflor u piepositiou, im translulud into
English by the iinpei'lcot purliciplu.
Ex. : I was far from thinking you would eome.
J'itais loin de penser que vous viendriez.
Tho preposition to, which must be excepted from
the preceding rule, on account of its being the sign
of the infinitive mood, is sometimes fallowed by the
imperfect participle, when the verb does not present
the idea of an intention, an aim.
Ex. : He hud a great aversion to shedding blood.
n avail une grande repugnance h ripandre
le tang.
2o The imperfect participle sometimes performs
the office of a substantive, and is used us such ; then,
it is preceded by the definite article or by any other
det^minative adjective.
or TBI PUPOflTIOX.
97
Ex. : Tho ii iumphiiig of th« wicked i* nhort.
Le tricmphe des michanti est court.
That burning; of tho Capitol wjw an
ouiruj(o.
Cet incendie du CapitoU fut une infamie.
Tho impoifect puiiicijilo a»0(l tu> u noun ha» no
direct object ; iho jiroposiiioi. of mu^t bo inserted
between iho puniciplc and the direct object to govern
the luttur.
Ex : Sludyiii-,' |jhiloM.|iliy i^ moMt usvfal.
The Hiudyiii^r of philosophy i>« most usoful.
L'Hudc de la pkilosopkie eat tri . utile.
CHAPTER Vr.
OF THE PEBP08ITI0N.
A preposition ia u word which connects iWo or
more words, cxprosing the rehitioii existing between
thoni.
Ex. : My book U before mo on the table.
Mon liore est devant moi sur la table.
Propositions may express Uifforcnt relations.
1° Tcndoncj', end or aim, motion, separation.
Against, eontre. Off, loin de.
^^<i>de. On, pour, d.
For, pour. To, d, pour, ekez.
From, de: Towards, vera.
Near, pria de.
■• m.fCIPLKt OF BNOI.INH ntUMIUK.
2° Piute.
About, autotir de. Bjr, /) tdU de, jtris de.
Above, OH-danu d*. Down, en but d*.
AorotK, a travtrt. In, dant (aant mouvmmt).
AloBg, /« hmg de. I,uo, done {atte mouvement).
Amid, Amidst, au miUeu de. Off, d la hmHeur d^.
Among, Bmongtt, parmi. Orer. att^eeeua, par-dmut.
Aroond, roaod, antouT de. Tbroagb, d travere.
f *» ***** ThroHgboiit, d'ttn bout d Taufre.
Athwart, m travera de. Up, <( Adii< de.
Before, drvan/; behind, d#r- Underneath, «om«, deaaotu.
'^«- ' Under, «on«, dcMOM.
Below. beneath,ati(f«MON«d«. Upon, aur.
Beeide, d eoM de. Wifhin, au dedana de.
Between, enir* daut. Without, kora de.
Bejrohd, on deld de.
8» Property^ origin, oaas«.
By, par.
Ooneeming, touekant
Coodderinf, pm, attendu.
VntpoTtdt.
From, jMVf d eavae de.
About, p<r«, aur.
After, t^ria.
At,d.
Before, avan/.
By, per«, d, en.
Ere, atanf.
During, dana, pendant.
For, pnur. jumh nt-
Of, de.
Regarding, enr, ioueJtmnU
Respecting, attr^ iouekant.
Through, d eauae de.
From, de, dJe, d^ufe.
In, en, d, eoice.
On, a.
Past, au deta.
Since, depute.
TiW, Juaqu'd.
To,*d.
Unli],yM«7NV2.
tV riH! IMIKI'.HIllo.V.
99
Fri»iii. d'tipfin.
I'". «i, en, lit, pur.
Noiwiiht-tttiiiliii;:, mulf/r^.
^Vill^, aete, i), dr.
Without, $ann.
6® Jltthiicr, iiui.i •
AfUr, atloH, d'aprit
Bat, exe«pt€.
Ezotpt, tacepU.
Ezoeptiog, kormit.
^^' A— Of, dc, ox|iieit«o> ;
!• PoMOSnioii.
Ex.: The lKX)k of Peter.
Xe tivre de Pierre.
2o Affinity :
Ex. : Tbo son of Jume».
Le fit» de Jacques.
So Quality :
Ex. : A man of virtue.
Un homme de vertu.
40 Sobstance :
Ex. : A house of stone.
Une maiaon de pierre.
From, de, expresses :
!• BemotencHs nnd bO|>urutioii.
Ex. : I come from New- York.
Je viens de New- York.
The letter comun horn my father.
Xa lethe vitnt de mm pire.
2o Origin, cause.
Ex.: The EnghVh arc dcKondcd from the
Stixoiix.
Les Anglais dearendent des Saxons
He did it from h:itred.
It Fa fait par haine.
100
MUNCIPLES OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
In, en, dans, denotas rest, or motion in iho same
place.
Ex. : I am, I walk in my room.
Je aut'a. je marche dans ma chambre.
In is also used with tho name of a couotry, or of
a capital.
Ex. : He in in England.
// est «n Angleierre.
Ho is in London.
II est a Londres.
At is used before towns and vilLigoc
Ex. : At M6ntreal, at Quebec.
A Montrial, a QtUbec,
Nevertheless, wo often use in instead of at especially
in conversation.
Ex. : He is in Qaebec, in Montreal.
II est a Quibec, d Montrial.
Into expresses entrance, or a passing from tho out-
side of a thing to its interior.
Ex. : You are out of the ^'ai-don, come into it.
Vous ites hors du jardin, entrez-y.
Come into the house.
Venez dans la maison.
It also indicates tho pat^sin,:; of a thing from one
form or state to another.
Ex. : Ico is cohveriible into water, and water
into vapour.
La glace pent se convertir en eau, et Veau
en vapeur.
To translate French into Enirlish.
Traduire du frangais en anglais.
OF THE PBEPJSITION. 101
To and St.
To denotos : 1© Motion towards a |labe.
Ex. : 1 am going to IViagara.
Je vats & Niagara.
2» The person in consideration of whom an action
is made.
Ex. : I gave an apple to my sister.
Je donnai une pomme & ma santr.
30 The reason of an action.
Ex. : I come to see you.
Je vietu vous voir.
At expresses an idea of direction, and is also used
before the name of the person Against whom an action
is directed.
Ex. : They are firing at a Aark.
lis tirent d la cihle.
They laughed at mo.
lU se moquirent de moi.
They throw the stone tt me.
lie me jetient la pierre.
By and with.
By denotes the agent, the principal cause.
Ex. : The city woS destroyed by fire.
Ita ville fut tUtruite par le feu.
This table was made by the joiner.
Cette table fut faite.par le menuitier.
With denotes the instrument with which an action
is made. >
102
Ex.
PRINCIPLES or ENGLISH GKAMMAB.
Wo supplied the poor with broad.
Nbm donndmes dupain auxpauvres.
Th|y aarroanded tho city with a wall.
lU entourirent la ville d\in mur.
On and over.
On denotes the state of a person, or a thing, lying
on something.
Ex. : The patient is on his bed.
Le matade est sur son lit.
The book is on iho desk.
£e livre eat sur le pupttre.
Over denotes si superposition without any contact.
Ex. : The fly flew over the table.
La mouche vola au-t/essw de la table.
The eagle hovered over us.
L'aigle planait sur nous.
JV. J.— Some prepositions are sometimes used alone
after a verb, they are then taken as adverbs and
modify the signification of tho vorb.
Togo up, monter; to t^o down, deseendre;
to go in, entrer.
The following prepositions are often used as ad-
verbs.
About. lit.
Across. Ne«r.
Along. Off.
By. On.
Down. Out.
Over.
Past.
Koun'd.
Through.
Up.
Some wc -ds m«y bo prepositions, adverbs or con-
junctions. Such are : After, before, since, etc.
COMPOUND I'BEPOSITIONS. 103
Ex. : The book is boforo me.
Le livre est devant moi.
I shall como before you have finished.
Je viendrai avant que vous ayez fini.
It would have been better to come before.
II aurait 4U mieux de venir avant.
COMPOUND PEBPOSITIONS.
This denominaiion may bo given to an assemblage
of words used instead of a prepo<.ii ion
According io, ,eIon,d'apri,. I„ „«pect of. sous le rapport
As for, as to, quant d. j- ^^
Because of, a cause de.
Bat for, sans.
By dint of, d force de.
By means of, au moyen de.
Bjr virtue of, en vertu de.
Close to, iouiprisde.
Down to, jusqu'd
Even with, au niveau de.
Psrfrom, loinde.
For fear of, de erainte de.
i!or the sake of, pour Vamour Up to, jusqu^d.
Fo,. »t„» «/ /• . J ^*"* ""P**' ^ relative-
Forwantof,/aii<«rfe. mentd.
J^'.^T^ preposition generally (Jomes before its
object; but sometimes, espeeially in conversation, it
Itence '' '"** ^'''"^ "' '^' «"^ ^^ «»«
Er. : Whom do yon speak to ?
A qui parlez vous f
de.
In eight of, en vue de.
In point of, en fait de.
In front of, en face de.
In spite of, en dipit de.
Instead of, au lieu de.
Next to, aupris de.
On account of, d cause de.
On this side of. en depd de.
Out of, par, hors de
0?er against, vis-d-vis de.
104 PBIN0IPLI8 01" ■N0LI8H GRAICICAJU
The man whom I speak of ?
L'homme dent je parte.
Where do you come from ?
D'oti venez-vous t
CHAPTER VII.
or THE advx&b.
An Adverb U a word which is used to modify a
Verb, an adjective or another adverb.
Ex. : This child walks tlowly.
Get enfant marehe doucement.
Thin mull is extremely good.
Cet JumtM est exirtnement bon.
Ho acted most wisely,
n a agi tris sagement.
There are commonly reckoned eight modifications
expressed by adverbi>.
lo Manner. go Interrogation.
2' Time 6« Affirmation.
3" ^'««e- 70 Negation.
40 Degree, or quantity. 8" Donbt.
Manner.
Adverbs of manner are formed from adjecUves, by
adding the termination ly, which i^ the short form
of like. Those adverbs are the most numerous, they
answer the French atlvorbs in meiit.
Ex.: Bravo, brave; bravely, bravement.
Wise,- sage-, wisoly, sagement.
OF THE ADVBBB 105
K B.^lo A>ljectivo8 ending j,, ly d„ not . hanije
when need as ad verbs. *
Ex.: Hourly, H toute heure.
Dai' J, jownellemeiit.
Ex.: Nobli., nobly; mblemenf.
y into I before ^y. *
Ex.: Merry, gai ; monily. gatment.
40 Adjectives in their o,^mmyfo,m are.ometimeg
ascd OS adverb*.
Ex. : The flowoif. of tho ga.dm smoll sweet.
i/M /icwra du jnrdin senfent bon.
■^go. il y a, paw^.
After, aprit^ ensuite.
Again, «icor«, <f« nouneau.
Always, ioujoura.
Already, dijO,
Before, avani, auparavani.
By and by, tantdt.
Early, <fe 6onn« A<ure.
Ever, Joaiat* (tana n^gaUony
First, at first, d'abord.
Late, /orA
Long, longiempa.
Jfever, jamah.
Now, mainienani.
Now... now, iant6i...tant6L
Adverbs of time.
Now and then, deiempsen
iempg.
Often, jQHven^
Once, une Jot's,
Seldom, rarement.
Since, depm's.
Sometime*-, qnelqutfoit.
Soon, Wen/d<.
Still, encore, toujonvs.
Th^n, a/or*.
To-day, aiijoimVhui.
To-morrow, demain.
To-»ijrht, ce »otr.
Yecfenlny, hier.
Ye*, encore.
106
PRINCIPLES OP ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
Place
Above, en haul, ci-deasua. Irwide, didans
Around, antour.
Away, au loin
Backward, en arriire
Before, decant.
Behind, derriire.
Below, deasous.
Beneath, desaous.
Downwards, en baa.
Par, loin.
Penh, en avant.
Forward, en avhnt.
Here, id.
Hither, iei (with motion).
Hence, <r»W.
Degree or quantity.
Inwards, intMeurement.
Near. pria.
ThL're, Id.
Thither, /<J (with motion).
Thence, de /<i.
Upwrtrdi. enViaui.
Up and .lown, gil et Id.
Wlieie, oii,
Whiilier, oh (with motion).
Whence, rf'oft.
Within, en dedana.
VVitliOut, en hors.
Yonder, Id-baa.
About, environ.
Almost, preaque.
But, aeulement que.
Enough, €Laatz.
Far, heaucoup.
Hardijr, ^ peine
How far, combien, (dia-
iance).
Little, peu.
Much, beanenip, (qitantut/).
Many, beaucoup, (number).
Only, aeulement.
Pretty, aaaez.
Quite, tout d fait.
Rather, aaaez.
Scarcely, a peine.
uow ioDg, combien, (time). Somewhat, tin peu.
How much, co»i6t>„,,j„a«- Thoroughly, eniiirement
„ '*'y>- Too, irop.
now many, combien, (num- Very, bien. iria.
bar).
Interrogation.
How, cowmen* f ^hj, pourquoif
How much, combien t (quan- Where, oU t
r,^*^*^^- Whither, oii?
aow many, comftiVn f (num-
ber).
OBSEnVATIONS ON ADVERBS.
AiBrmatioii.
Ay, Aye, out. Ju^t go, pr£ciaimtnU
By all mean*, certainement. Nay, bien plus.
Certainly, aasur^ment. Of cource, naturdlemtnt.
Faith, mafoi. Truly, vraineni.
Forsooth. ataurimtnU Undoubtedly, mns doute.
Indeed, vraiment. Yes, oiii.
Negation.
Not, ne pae.
No .way?, nullement.
Not at all, pa« rfu ton/.
Doubt.
PoenibJy, pent-Hre.
Probably, probabtment.
107
By no means, aucunement
Nay, non.
No, non.
May be, peut-itrt.
Perhaps, peut-Hre.
OBSERVATIONS ON AOVIBBS.
1« The English langnago has foaradvorhs to trans-
late the French word eneore»
Encore, exprcssinif the continaation of an action
must be translntod bj still. *
Ex. : He is still in hiti family.
// est encore dans sa famille.
Encore, moaninir the lopetiiion of an action, is
translated by again.
Ex. : I went there la-t yoju, I shall go again
this year.
Je suis alU Ih Fannie derniire, firai encore
cette ann4e.
Encore is translated by yet, when it expresses an
108 PIUNOIPLXS OF XNOLMB GRAMMAR.
action which is to come ; in such cases, yet U .re„o.
rally preceded by not, "^
Ex. : We hove not yet finished.
Nona n'avoM paa encore fini.
Lasily, encore, meaning davantag. is translated by
more. '
fc«x. : I Want some more.
II vtCen faut encore.
20 Instead othere, there, where, wo may use hither,
hence ; thither, xthence ; whither, whence ; with verbs of
motion.
Ex. ; Whence do you coino ?
Doii venez-vous ?
Whither do you go ?
OH altes'vous f
I tfo thiihor.
Jevaisia.
30 Where is used 10 forrii the compound adverbs
of place.
Anywhere, n import e cH.
Elsewhere, ' ailleurs.
Evorywhere, partotit.
Nowhere, nullepart.
Somewhoio, quelquepart.
Wherever, partout cH.
40 The Freeh adverb assez may be translated
into Jiinghsh in three different ways.
Enough, meaning sufficiently.
Ex. : He is rich uiiough.
It est asses riche.
OB8KBVATI0M8 ON ADVUtBS. 109
Pretty, meaning lo a certain d<^ree.
Ex. : I feol pretty well.
Je me parte aatez bien.
Rather.
Ex. : A ruther considerable town.
Une vitle asaez considirahle.
That i8, u town which h rather oonsiderable than
QOt.
Enough generally comes after the word which it
modifies.
Ex. : You have eaten enough.
Vous avez assez mangi.
6° Like adjectives, some adverbs may have a
comparative in er, and a superlative in est,
Ex.: So(in, t6t ; sooner, thesoooeat
Often, souvent; oftener, the oftenest
6*» Adverbs in ly are compared by more and the
most.
Ex.: Wisely, sagement ; more wisely, the
most wisely.
lo Some adverbs have un irregular comparison.
Badly, ill, mal ; worse.
Far, loin ; farther.
Forth, en acant ; further.
Little, peu ; loss,
Much, heaucoup ; njore,
Well, hien ; bolter,
the worst,
the farthest
the farthest
the least
the most,
the best
f!
I
no PBINOIPLBS or BNOMBH OHAMIUK.
OONSTRUOTION OF THI ADVERB.
The adverb should bu placed near the word it
modifies.
!• Befuru the adjective.
Ex. : Your IraitM are rudly good.
Voi fruits mxt rietlemeot bona.
2o After the verb, in aimple ten^fs.
Ex. : You speak prudently.
Voua parlez prudemment,
3« Between the auxiliaiy and the participle, in
compound tensofi.
Ex. : Ho will surely come here.
// viendra sArement iei.
4p Adverbs of time are generally placed before the
▼erb in simple tenses.
Ex. : We often come to see them.
Mus venons souvent les voir.
5o When an active-transiiivo verb has a direct
object, this objocl must never be separated from the
verb by an adverb.
Ex. : Hu tenderly loves his son.
He loves his' son tenderly.
It aime tendrement son fits.
OP THB CONJCROTION.
Ill
CHAPTER VIII.
or THE OONJXJNOTION.
A eoxyanctioil U u pun of ttpoech that is used to
coDneot words and seniotices.
Ex. : Petor jiluyri and John worktt.
Pierre joue et Jean travaille.
Two and two are four.
Deux et deux font quatre.
Conjaoctioas are either oopnlatiYe or d^jonctiTe.
A copulatiye conjunction berves to connect, or to
continue a sentence by expressing a supposition, an
addition or a cause.
Ex. : I will go, if he accompany me.
JHrai «'i7 m'accompagne.
Peter, Paul and Andrew work:
Pierre, Paul et Andre travaillent.
Tou are hup]>y because you are good.
Vous ites heureux parce que vous ites bona,
A dujimctiye conjunction serves, not only to
connect or to continue, but also to express an
opposition of meaning.
Ex. : Pelor or Pjiul woiks.
Pierre ou Paul travaille.
Though ho wus frequently corrected, yet
he did not reform.,
Quoiqu'il ait Hi friquemment repris, il ne
a'est pas corrigi.
I
if
112 riuroipLu or mmqum osaioub.
OoDjonoUoDi may be divided ioto two other olatset :
conjonoUona of ooordilUktion and conjanotions of
mibordiiiatloii.
Oa^nnotioni of ooordiiution uro thoiie which
merely eenru to connect independent propositions.
Ex. : Peter play« and Pual works.
Pierre Joue et Paul travaiUe.
Neither my brother, i.or my sister is there.
Ni mm frire, ni ma emur ne aont lit.
Also, amui. , po,, car.
™» •*• N«iUier oor, »rf. ni.
iMb..»Maad, eim„^»t. jf^^^ ^,
HattfM^. Stilly pourtom.
ThtD, done.
Too, atuH. Ttt, Umiifoit.
BithcrM»M.or, oii*..mi ou
Else, auiremenU
Oadimotioiii of inibdNlllttiw art those which
are need to e^aoeo^dependent propositions.
Ex. : I shiall^eome when you have finished.
Je 9iendrai ^mnd v<m$ aurez ^ni.
ATlsr; i^Ha qm.
'4s,'MMme-
:Befort, mount f ne.
Bre, avantqut.
If, ti.
I«est, d€ pew que.
ProTided, pourvu que.
«de«, jpaiijiM.
So, pourvuque.
Thoagh, qwtiqne.
Tfasi, qfin q^e.
Than, qne*
Till, jutqu^a ce que.
Unleff , d tnoin» que.
Whedier, H.
WhetherM..Mor, »oU que.
When, quand, lortque.
While, whlht, pendmt que.
OONjrONOTlVI PABTIOLM.
OOV^XmOTlVI PABTIOLIB
118
Thoy are oxprexeions or wordH uned ln«tond 0/
conJoDctiorifi.
Ooordination.
A« well M, ainti que. Neverlliele*8. niaamoiiu.
BeoaoM, pare* 9w«. Not only, non $euUmtnt.
BMidea, d'aiUeurt. Or elae, oh hien.
However, eependant. Therefore, e'eat pourquoi.
Moreover, deplut. Wherefore, pourquoi.
Subordination.
Accordiog m, nivant que. In »4 mneb m, attendu qut.
Although,, quoique. In cane, en eaa que.
Aa,M....H. aiM«< que. Just •-, au moment mime
As If, M though, comme #f. ©ft.
A« loog u, ton/ 9iie. Now that, mamtentmt que.
Ai moeh m,. autant qve. On condition that, d condi-
A« often M, auasi aoutent tion que.
9**** 80 as, «t que.
As soon as, mia»H6t que. So miich....„that,/an/ jus.-
For «e much as, attendu que. So that, de lorte que.
For fear, de erainte que. Unless, d moins que
In order that, qfin que. Until, jusqu'd ee que.
In so much that, (foK/an/ Whenever, chaque foit que.
9"** Whereas, eu gwe.
00BBESP0N8IVS OONJUNOTIONS.
This denomination is given to coiijanctions which
are always used in pairs, w that one correapooda
to the other. Care (*hoDid be taken to give them the
right place in the sentence.
li
114 PBIN0IPLX8 OF KNGLI8H GRA^OIAB.
Though. . . .tm. Ex. : Though he wa« corrected, yet
he (lid not roforra.
Quoiqu'U m repris, il ne se
corrigea pas.
Whbthib. ... OB. Ex. : Whether there le few or many.
Qu^il y en ait peu ou pltisieurs.
EITHBB....OB. Ex.: Ho wa. either ashamed or
tifruid.
Ou il avail honte, ou il avait
, pew
NWTHBB....N0B. Ex. : Ho cjime neither eating nor
drinking.
II Vint ne nuingeant ni ne buvant.
Ex : I am debtor bf»th to -ny father
and to my uncle.
Je suis dibiteur de man pire et
de mon oncle.
Ex. : Soi h a meeting, as earth saw^
never.
UneassembUe telle que laterre
n'en vit jamais.
StroH. . . .THAT, with a noon, and a finite verb follow-
ing that, to express a conseqoynce.
Ex. : My weakness is such that I
cannot go.
Ma faibletse est telle que je ne
puis y alter.
A«. . . . AS, with an adjective or an adverb, to express
equality. - ,
Ex. : He is as wise as his brother.
II est atusisage que son frire.
Both.... AND.
SiTCH.. ..AS.
OOBaiBPONSIVl COKJONOTIONS. 116
As MUCH .... AS, wHh a participle, lo express equality.
Ex. : He was an much admired as his
brother.
II Hait aussi admiri que son
frire.
AS.. . .80, to express similitude or proportion.
Ex. : As two is to four, so six is to
twelve.
Comme deux est d. quatre, ainsi
six est d douse
So... .AS, with an adjective or an adverb, to limit a
degree, by comparison.
Ex. : How can you despise a thing
K) noble as eelf-devotion ?
Comment pouvez-voua mipriser
une chose aussi noble que le
divouement t
80.. ..AS, with adjectives and adverbs, to deov
equality. ''
Ex. : Ho was not kq good as his sister.
// ti'itait pas aussi bon que sa
tour.
He did not speak so prudently
U8 his brother.
II ne parla pas aussi prudem-
ment que son fr'ere.
bo MUCH .... AS, With a participle, to deny equality.
Ex. : He is not so much esteemed as
his fiBther.
// n'est pas si estimi que son
.pire.
116 PRINC^PLIS OF BNQLIBH GRAlfMAR.
So. . . . A8, followed' by the intiiiltive mood, to oxprefls
aconseqaence.
BXi : Tho diffir.iihj wu8 so great as
• to diHconriigo him.
La dijgiteulti itait aasez gramde
pohr le tUcourager.
So.... THAT, followed by a finite verb, to express a
cbhsequeiiCi).
Ex. : He in so wenk that ho cunnot
work.
Jl est si faible qWii ne pent pat
travailler.
So MUCH . . . .THAT, With n |)iirticipto, in tho same case.
Ex. : He was ho much injared that
ho coo id not walk
// itait si blessi qu'il ne pouvait
marc?ier.
JV. B. — The French conjunction que, placed betweon
two verbs, mast be tranHlatod by that, which isgene-
ndly omitted after tho verbs to tell, to hear, to know
and their eqaivalentti.
Ex. : I told yoa yoa woald be sick.
Je vows disdis que vow seriez malade.
I kne% it was beitter to stay.
Je savAis que e'itdit mieux de tester.
or THE INTIBJEOTION.
CHAPTER IX.
or THE nrTEBJEOTION.
117
An interjection is a
some strong or sadden
«i|pjri«^, etc. etc.
yLhl Aki
Alas I HOtu I
Bravo I Braeo I
Bless me I Bon Dieu I
Cornel AnoH$!
l>«w me I Mon Dieu /
Ehl Ehl
Haill^ht//
Hark 1 JS&tHiia !
Hash i Chut I
word that is used to express
emotion, of the mind, as joy,
'Bo\i\ Bolit
How I What I Ommmt t Quoit
^anaht Mourral
Indeed I EnvMUl
l«rd ! Snineur I
OhIO! 0*/0/
BahavIAii/
^Xht I Bam I
WA\\ EkhienI
Why! Comment/ ,
i
I
li !>
ENGLISH GRA.MMA.R.
RULES OF SYNTAX.
Syntax is that part of grammar which treats of the
agreement and constraotion t>f words and propositions
in a sentence.
Hence, two riy^taxos :
1° Syntax of words.
2«> Syntax of propositions.
Apropositum is the utterance of a thought.
In the utierai»ce of any definite thought, there are
three terms : the subject^ the verb and the attribute.
The subject is the person or thing spoken of.
Ex.: Peter is tall.
Pierre est grand.
The verb is the word used lo connect the attribute
to the subject.
Ex. : God is good.
Dieu est.bm.
The verb is is used to connect good to God.
The attribute is that which is said of tho subject.
In the preceding examples, good and tall are attri-
butes.
N» J. —The verb is always to be-, but sometimes it
AaaniciNT or thb vkrb with its subject. 119
is comprised in -the attnbniivo verb, as meiuioned
before.
£x. : Peter sj^Vh.
; ,^^ .. , JnBter i8[»peaking.
AgtWBiMat. Those three tornis have, with one
another, a concord in ^^ender, number und person ;
this ooDcord is cullied agreement.
.f)|<)PE!lein9nt8. The Hubject, the verb and the
attribate arc sometimes followed by other worcjs
which complete their signification ; those words are
called complements.
AGREEMENT.
CHAPTER I.
AOIEEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS
SUBJECT.
I^is bov i9 good.
Every English verb must agree, In number and
person, with its subject.
Ex. : This boy is good.
Ce gar^on est ban.
They work welt.
When the subject is a pronoun, it must be expressed,
but never doubled as in French.
Ex. : They work well.
Its travaillent bien.
120 PWII0JM.18 OF BN0LI8H ORAMMA*.
We will not do that,
^bua, turn ne ferons pas cela,
*rame9 and John Hudy,
When a verb ha* several aubjeota oonneotod hv
Ex. : Jumes, John and Henry study.
Jaeqnei, Jean ei Senri dtudienU
iV: R-^metimes, the subjects connected represent
tnrsV;r: : ''- '-"'' ^^••"^' ^^« -'^-
Ex. : This philosopher and statesmoo was al-
ways happy.
^''^^Phe et fumme dCitat fut totQours
Ex. : Virtue and not wealth renders man happy.
30 If the subjocu, co„nect«d are really different^
bu generally considered oh forming only one tWn^
m their u«c, the verb m«y be singult. ^
Ex. : Bread and baiter is wholesome.
i« pain et ie beurre sont un aliment sain.
You, he and 1 are grateful
When the subjocu (p,t>nouns> are of different
P*»ons, thoy are not summed up as in French.
AaBUMINT OP THE V«BB WITH ITS 80BJB0T. 121
Ex. : You, hu and I ui-e gratefttl.
Vovs, lui et moi, nous sommet reeonnaiatanta,
AcoorilingtothoralegiroM, ihe word now, which
la uaed to «um up iho aubjacU, i8 not translated.
JV. B. — In English, as woll as in French, when the
nominativea are of different persona, the verb agrees
wito the fii-st person in pieferenco to the second, and
with the Kocond in proforenco to the third.
yeUher Beter nor Paui stwiiea.
When a verb ha8 two or moi e si ngalar nominatives
connected hj either.... or, neither ...nor, or any other
disjunctive coujunciio.i, it agrooH with the lant one.
Ex. : Neither Fetor nor Paul Mtudies.
M Pierre ni Paul n'itudient.
Neither yon nor I am right.
Ni voua ni moi nous n'avons raiam.
N.B. — lo When one of the subjects connected by
nther. ...or, neither. . ..nor, 1. plural, tho verb most
be plural. It i« th«i, preferable to place the plural
subject Immi'diately before the verb.
Ex. : He or bis brothers are there.
Lui ou ses frires sont Idt.
20 Nouns which have only the plural form want a
plural verb.
Ex. : Groat pains were taken.
On se donna beaucoup de peine.
However, news meaning nouvelle wants a singular
verb. • *
Ex. : This news is good.
Cette nouvelle est bonne.
122 PBiMoiPus Of nro&iiH obammab.
mpnrivs AHD mpuROT pabtioipijb.
, *» f*^ •••^ <• POOH A»r #*« Aeoie*.
ln^Bngir8l,,thoiiDpeifeotpm^^^ iw well as the
iiiffiiitive may be aaed as sobject or attribute to a
propoeitioo.
Ex. : To rwe early is godd to' tbe Wlih.
Bitting, early is good for the health.
8e^er de bonne heure eit hm pour la santl
Yoar<btet is-to rise early.
Yoar befet is rising early.
^-.^.-10 Gkitiful attention must be paid to the
difference existing between the infinitive and the
imperfect particifylo.
The ififinitivo merely expresses action.
^^nie imperfect participle expresses the continuance
ot the action.
2« When two or more infinitives are used as
subjects, the preposition to must not be repeated,
except for the sake of emphasis.
Ex. : To read, write and sing are useful.
i»r«, icrire et chanter sont utiles.
To read and to write were necessary for a
man to become a mayor.
J-ire4it4crire4taiehtn<cessaires&unfumme,
pour devenir niaire.
The Hudying of phUoeophy i» ueeful.
When the imperfect participle is used as a noun it
does not retain the direct object it has in French ; 4e
COLLIOnYB 8UBJI0T OB MOmNAnTB. 128
prapoBition of most bo inserted between the participle
and the object.
Ex. : The studying of philosophy is asoftil.
L'itude de la pkihsophie ett utile,
Etudier kt pkilosophie eit utile.
Of, in this exumpio, is used to govern the object,
philosophy, which is no longer the object o( studying.
N.B. — The foregoing rule is for u participle which
is taken in all respects as a. noun ; if we use it as a
real verb, it retains its obju<;i.
Ex. : Stuilying philosophy in unoful.
Etudier la philosflphie eat utile.
Avoid reading baJ bnoki.
Eviteg de lire des livrea mauvais.
OOLLEOTIVE SUBJECT OR NOMINATIVE.
'The meeting were divided.
When Jho subject is a (•ollcctive noun conveying
the idea of plurality, the verb ma>t be plural; but,
whc" it conveys the idea of i liiy, the verb agrees
with it in the hinnjuJnr number.
Ex.: Thu meotiiig woro divi'led.
L'assemblie itait divisie.
The meeting do not agroo
L*assembUe ne s^accorde pas.
The mouting was unanimous.
Z'assembUe fut unanime.
The meeting iigrees.
L'assemblie s'accorde.
^ l«l|iqi»l,M, Of BlfQLI«p «!i|^Hlf<H
of the attrftat.. When ,ho >attri««u cxprowes a
*«?cltltL"" ^«:*:^*'«'^««»- "^P^raldy. bo that
w» oiwt De plaral, tw in iho exami^ie iilbre«iid
I* ^tl^ attribute, means ihat they differed in their
opinions, and «>, did ..oi form a whole.
On the cOMirorjr, in the w«ond ewmple. « 7%e
fl«n««<0, wgoiAe. that the member., hayinir cTv one
'^:^:T^ u ^A./.: c.on«e,a.nt.Ahe vJb m^L
l'«!pfe. board, emmiuion, cmmittee, c<mdi ^'
generally r.^oire fi plural verb, ' '
Bx. : TIjjcpurt are di«po«Kl to give them what
^coiir nt dUpoUe A ieur donner ce gu'ils
When the oolle«ivo snbjeet requi,^ a olural
verb, .t likewise require, a plu,.»| l^nZ, ^
Ex. : The council di«,^reed in their opinions
Le tmseil ne fut pas d'accard dans ses
optniotis.
The council agrii;d in i^s o^ione.
I'e conseil fut d^accoH dans ses opinions.
THl rUNCB INDirrNITI PIOKOUN " ON ". 125
ObMnratioBi <m tht traoiUtioB of tte Pmi^i
ind«fliiite pronooA " Q|lv"
Among tho French indefinite prononn^ there in one
which dwervoe a special attention. ThiK pronoa»..i»
' On ", which is translated into BngllHh in nrwA
ways.
One mu$t Buffer on earth,
" On " used in a general Ko..se, or in its widest
sense, ought to be translated by we.one, people, a man,
men, and sometimes a wman, women. In thexe cases,
ON generally represents all men, eroi,' the h|i«alcer*
Ex. : One must suffor on eurih.
A man mnst niiifor o»i i-jirth.
We must suffer on earth.
On doit tovffrir tmr la terre.
One cannot bo eveiywhere.
On ne pent pat itre partout.
A woman is not unhappy because she is
poor.
On n'eet pas malheureuae, parce qu'on eaf
pauvre.
They saw terrible tMnge in 1812,
"On " is translated by they when its meaning is
limited ; that is, when it reproseuta a certain number
of persons, such as the people of a coar^try, of » ciUr,
the persons of a hoiise.
Bjc. : They saw terrible things in 1812.
pa vit dea chafes terrikleeen 1913.
They are going to plant treen in this
garden.
On va planter d^ arbres dans ce jqrdUfi,
r'
126 PEIWOlWli or INOLISH ORAJUUm.
Sameboay eame her* to tee yon.
" On " b sometimes used to represent only one
Pjwon ; it is tlien translated by imebody or mieme;
o^yoody, any one. '
Ex.: Somebody cam© hero to hoe yon.
On e»t lenu ici pour vous voir.
Did anybody send for me ?
M'a-t-on envoyi chercher f
N. B — As a general rnle, the pronoun " On " may
be translated by the p«,^ivo form, whoever it is
possible to do sd.
Ex. : Terriblu things woro soon in 1812.
Troet. will Ik- planted in this gurden.
1 am a^kKd Ut I'o thoiv.
On me demande d aller lH.
I am tanghl jfranin.ar.
On m'enteigne la grammaire.
I was advjb. d to Uo it.
On me conseilla de le faire.
We Were told ho was thure.
On noua dit quit itoit lH
Obiervaldoiii on the translatioii of the French
demonfltrative prononn " OB."
I *iMW tfowr sitter, the it a good person.
The French piorou,, ce, repieseniir.g a noun prece-
dently expressed or undtM>tood, must be translated
by he, she, If, or they, according to the noun which
ee represents
. "■ '»■"«'■ DWIOKtTBATIVl PKONOCN " 01 " 127
*x.: Htro «• my brother, ho i. a rich moo.
r<Hei men frire, st»t vn hmtne riche.
Here i« my .iMter, nbe i. u ^ood perBon.
Vom ma sasur, c'est me bonne personne.
i^k at my houw. it in « good baildintf.
Voyez ma maison, c'est une bmne batiue.
rou know myMivantH, th.y are good men.
Vy emnaiuez mei ^rmtews, ee aont de
oonn hommea,
I* U I, It is they.
i.^n.unV'''V'*""^''^ ^y « P«"'°'"'' pronoun,
is tmnalatod Into English by iho ..enter penwaal
Itwhe; c'e^tlui.
I'iswe; c'e$tnovs.
Itwusihey; c'itait eux.
oJlf T'^ «pre88 OHH, c'«< mo,- y«,-, etc, c^e,t lui
9^* etc., etc., a.^ translated by it is, it was, etc.
Ex.: It is 1 that spoko.
^est moi qui at parU.
It was you that I wanted to see.
C'itait wnu que je voulais voir
It is Peter that spoke.
<^est Pierre qui a parll
Champlain was a great man,
^en que, in the expression c'est . aue is nnt •
relative pronoun, it is not translated! ^ ' '' *
^1
I
il
128 PRiyCIPLKS OF ENGLISH OBAUMAB.
Ex. : Chattiplain was a great man.
C'Uait un grand hoome que Champlam.
Dimnkcnoess is a dangoroas passion.
Ceit une dangereuse passim que Vivrognerie.
Sin i» death.
In some cases, ce or c'est is an expletive, that is, a
word which is not necessary to the meaning of the
Bentence; then, we do not translate it.
Ex. : Sin is death.
Le picJUf c'est la mart.
Do you 9peak ? '
Est-ceque is not translated into English, bat the
verb takes the interrogative form.
Ex. : Bo yon speak ?
Est'Ce que vous parlez t
It is good Inch to have aueeeeded,
Cest. . ,.gue de followed by an infinitive, is trans-
lated by, it is ..,to, it was.. .,to, withoat translating
qme, which is an expletive*
Ex. : It id good luck to have saoooeded in this
hard undertaking.
Cest une botme ehemee que d^avoir riussi
dans cette difficile entreprise. .
Among the Gentiles^ it was folly to wor-
ship Jesps.
Parmi le9 Oentils, c'itait une folie que Sa-
dorer Jisus.
Ceriestpdique is translated by not thatf or, it is
notbeeam: * • -^
.te^>
til
AOftilMSMT OP 7SK A^WBDM W IXH ThI 8UBJ10T. 129
Ex. : Not that he foais mo, bat he likea peace.
It is not because he feare me, but he likes
peace.
Ce rCeat pas quHl me craigne, mats il aime la
paix.
It is our turn to play,
me French c'«r d mot, c'eat h vous, c'est & eux, etc..
fe.: It is oar tarn to play.
Cat h now de jotter.
It is our doty to apolpgize.
Cm ^nonWfaifidesexcttses.
His wUh Ufo a, M^m a Jourmev.
Ex. : It is with Kfe as with a journey.
lien est deiavie cmme dm voyage ;
or, more snnpiy : * y i
ipiileiaMJoarDey.
fi
^S S.BJCOT.
^OAttribate may be a nonr nn «h:->*-
parUdple. no»''. an adjective or a
Bx. : %^lfr6U»ar Vii jbiiidr.
Moik fHre ett menuiiier.
130
PSIN0IPLB8 OV SNQLIBH QRAMMAB.
He was formerly a sailor, he is now a
farmer.
II itaitjadis marin, il est maintenantfermier.
He is u Frenchman.
II eatfrangais.
She is an Irishwoman.
Bile est irlandahe.
In the plurui Dumber, the attribute wants no de-
terminative adjociive.
Ex. : They wore formerly joineiv, they are now
farmers.
Ilsetaient menuiaiers, ils sont maintenant
ferniiers.
llie blind are unhappy.
When the atu-ibato is an adjective, it is never
varied, bvuu when token as a noun.
Ex. : The blind are u^ihtippy.
Le& aoeugles sont malheureux.
The poor ar,e sometimes wicked.
Les pauvres sont quelquefois imuvais.
Look at the»e ehUdren, they are blind boys.
When the attrionte is an adjective taken as a noun,
it most never be used alone when it represents only
one person or a certain number of perrans.
Ex.: Look at these children, they are blind
boys,
f Voyez ces enfants, ce sont de» aveugles.
Look at this child, he is a blind boy.
Begardez cet enfant, cest vn avevgle.
APPOSITION.
131
. They are Frenthmen, Irighmen.
Zte aontfrantais, irlmdais.
N. -B — An adjective is someUmes used as a noun,
m the WDgQlar, to express an ftbstnwtion.
Ex. : The beautifiil, the siiblime.
Le beau, le sublime.
APP08ITIOV.
Amn or a pei-sonal pronoun, used toexplain«
preceding noun or pi-onoun, is put, by apposition, in
the same case.
Ex. : I saw your friends, them whom we met at
the play-ground.
J'ai vu vosamis, eeux que nous avmaren-
cmtris hla eour de rtcrtaXiim.
Alexander, a great king and conqueror,
gave laws to all nations.
Alexandre, grand roi et grand conqu&ant,
donna des lois H toutes les nations.
Appoaitaon is then the use of some additional
words, to explain a noun or a pronoun coming be-
N, B. - 10 Before the noun used by apposition, we
employ the indefinite adjective a or on, to expres.
quality, and the definite article the, to determinate.
Ex. : My master, a good and just man, gave me
good advices.
Mm mattre, komme bon etjuite, m donna
de bans eonseils.
Paul, the son of James, ig a bad fellow.
Paul, fils de Jacques^ est un mauvais < ujet.
182 PBIM0IPLB8 0» KNOLISB QBAlUfAB.
2o JJofoiv some names of titles, preceded by proper
nouns, we do not ose the article.
Ex. : Louis the Fourteenth, King of France.
LomtJCIVyVoide Fiance.
Victoria, Queen of England.
Victoria, reine (TAngleterre.
Napoleon, Emperor of the French.
NapoUon, empereur des Fran^U.
30 Careful attention should be paid to the fiiat rule
given, which sayh that the word used in apposition
must always be in the same case as the term ex-
plained. \
Ex, : I received a letter from my brother, him
whom you mot last wock.
J'ai re^ une lettre de mon frire, celui que
vous rencontrAtes la aemaine demiire.
In this example, brother is in the objective case on
account of the propositiou frcm ; the explanatory
term must be likewise in the objective case. It is the
reason why we siiy Am and not he.
COMPLEMENTS.
CHAPTER II.
OOMPLEMEMT OF THE MOUN.
This denominaiion is given to the words which are
used to complete the signification of a noun.
Ex. : The book of m^«ister.
COMPLEMENT OP THE NOUN. ^33
»1«^*^'"" '' "^^'''' ^^ '^' P-eposition of, aod com-
plete, the .neaMM.gofA,.*, 1.^. expressing a 8McSi
relation, the relation ..f ,,,„,k^ y. ' ** *P*°'*'
J/y sister's book,
Dy Of or by the possessive form.
Ex. : My sister's book.
The book of my sister.
Xe tivre de ma saeur.
The ', is used only with persons or thinirs ner.
sonified ; with neuter nouns and adjecti.es tofa,n^^
nouns, of is to bo used. '«'Je«»'^es taken as
Ex. : The gate of the garJen.
La ports dujardin.
The wars of the Greeks.
I^es guerres des Grecs.
nam^'nnu-^'' '' '" "'*^' ^y "^*'"P«°"' ^i'h some
names of things.
Ex. : To-day's work.
Jj'ouvrage d'aujourdhui.
To-moiiow's lessons.
Les legons de demain.
Yesterday's recreation,
ia ricriation d'hier.
The thirty years' war.
Jja guerre de treute am.
Morrln's store.
134
PBUfOIPLU OF KMGLISH GBAMIIAB.
E>
The house is opposite to Morris's store.
Jja maiton est siUUe visits du magaain de
. Morris,
James^ hAt.
L,e fihapiOM de Jacques.
With siDgalar nooM of more than two syllables
ending in Sj the apostrophe alone is ased.
Ex. : Sociuteti! wifft
La femme de Socrate.
Plural nouns, ^«ading in s, follow the same rule,
that'i% take only, an apostrophe.
Ex : My friends' houses.
Zes mai&msde mes amis,
"With noons which do not take s in the pluml, we
Bse the 's.
Ex. :. Men's clotiiies.
Des hardet tPfummes.
My brother JPhUip*e hou$e.
When several words form the name of the possessor
the last word alone takes the '<.
My brother Philip's house.
JJa maison demon frere Philippe.
The kings of Framie's palaces.
Lespalais d^ rois de France,
JPeter, Faui and Annie's unde.
When the same object belongs to several possessors,
the last one takes the *s.
Ex.: Peter, Paul and Annie's uncle.
L'oncle de Pierre, de Paul et cFAnne.
COMPLKXINT OF THB NODW. 135
I got thi$ watch at Duqaet'8, an old eHabli§hed
iewOter,
The name of the possessor is sometimes followed
by terms used in apposition, or by oxplaoatoiy terms i
the name of the possessor alone takes the '«.
Ex. : I got this watch at Duquefs, an old esta-
blished jeweller.
J'ai aeheti cette mmtre chez Duquet, tm
vieux bijoutier,
I like to read MiltoH% Btfro»'», and Shake-
V««Pe»» good pa§aaget.
When the object is different for diflisrent possessors,
tbe 8 most be repeated after eanb noun. •
Ex. : I like to read Milton's, Byron's and Shjike-
speare's good passages. v , . :, :,
J'aime d lire les hons passages de MUion, de
Byron et de Shakespeare.
ine eister of Beter'e friend.
As said before, the relation of properly may be
expressed either by of or by the '«. Of these forms,
we shonld adopt that whi«h will render th.. sentence
the cle-xrest and the most agreeable ; by the ase of
both, we may avoid an unpleasant repetition of
either.
Bx. : The sister of Peter's frien«l.
La saw de Vami de Pierre.
Peter's friend's sister, though correct, would not be
80 elegant.-
, m, FauPt in LonOOn,
In some instances, the gOverftfrig noun is under-
stood.
136
Ex.
That is :
HMNClPMg OP KNOLISIi QBAMMAB.
St. Paurs ill L011.J011.
£t'Paulde Londres.
St. Paal's church in London.
Ho stadioit jU Thorn V.
It (tudie a Vicole de Thnm.
The words so undeiMocKl an, ^onerally chweK
coUege^ home, palace, school, etc.
Ex. : I iini .,t my siHierV.
Je aui9 Chez ma aoeur.
I am ping to my biotlioiV.
Je vai8 Chez mon frire.
iV:^.— ThiH consuuciion !« used, us m«y bo seen
by the preceding examples, to tmnslato ihe French
ehez followed by a noun.
Celui de, cdl /A, etc., followed by a noun are trans-
latcd in the same wuy.
Ex. : This book is my uuni's.
Ce livre est celui de ma tante.
A houMe of my father^a.
The Englith sometimes use a double possessive case
when the possessor has several of the objects men-
tioned.
Ex. : A house of my falherV.
Une des mawms de mon pire.
That is : A house among my father's houjes.
A friend of mine.
Un c'e mes amis. *
That is ; A friend among my friends.
Ex.
Ex.
compliance with.
condescendance it.
confidence in ;
confiance en.
rOMPLKMKNT OX TM V .ry 18*
He U phytieian to th • king.
To 18 sometimes UHcd instoAd of-:/ or'«; ji, soch
oases, the arlicio is n.>t used bofoio iho first noun.
Ex, : H« is physician to the king.
He w the pby-jician of the king.
H est le midecin du roi.
J\^ A -Noons derived from verbs or cones-
pon^ng to them, tuke the same propositions as those
To comply with ;
Condescendre & j
To confide in ;
Sefier d ;
He had great confidence in that man.
// avait me grande confiance en eet Aomme
It ia time to rettd,
tht ""T-!' '^^^''^^^ ''^"'o^^d by de and a verb in
the nfin,t.ve mood.. I„ .„ch instances de may bS
translated by to with the inhnitive or by of Zd Z
with the imperfect participle. ^ ^ ^"^
Ex. : It is the time of speaking.
Ceat le temps de parler.
It is time to speak.
H est temps de parler.
It is not time lo speak.
// n'est pas temp's de parler.
It is not the time for speaking.
. Oe n'est pas le temps de parler.
188
PaiWCIPLKK OP INOLISH GRAMMAR.
CHAPTER III.
ooMplsuekt or thi adjective.
Ill Englibb, 88 well a« ib French, jiWposUions are
tttedtooonaeotadjeothree with theif ebmpletetmts ;
•M thb ]N«poeiUM need with the English tajeeti^e
docs not always correspond to the preposition afted
wit^ ihe*Fr»nob odjectiTc.
Eir.; 0<K>d'fi)r, bond.
8«hMble of, nensibU d.
JVitflicfiis for, cilibnpar.
Em is tt 'Itst of thfc most employed Bnfflish adjec-
u
^totisi^^ iauOUfium tU.
Aware of ; inatt-uit de.
Bare of ; cUpourvii de
Ctpablfi ot ; eajnbk W«.
Oucfnl or ; auifftteux d».
Cucleu ot ; intoueiant de,
Certuo of ; certain de.
dear of ; estempt de.
Compoaed of ; eompoaide.
Confident of ; aeeinride,
Conseiooa of ; emte^lMUd*.
OoTetona of ; mim^'Uk.
Coriou of I eurieuat de,
Iktt tl t aaeourdi de.
OF"
i>»alrona of ; dieireux de.
D«ttitiiteof;<&j^»i^TttA.
tHtkd^iityddtantde.
Batptyof y«6fcrf».
Eiunlons of ; rival de.
liiirfoM of ; enHieux de.
Ziianiottred of; ^rie de.
Ftntnl of i ^fi-a^4 de.
Vftarleaa of ; $ani erainte de.
t<^tid of i/tfude.
fotgtttxil ot ; ovblieux de.
^an^tij^nde.
OM'Of-eftjifeWifa.
HeedftU of ; attenti/d.
^••dkaa of; inattenti/d.
m
f
♦-*.
COMPLlMlIfT OF TBI AD^IOTIV*.
* ""^J" «• Secan of ; Mir <& .
Incapable of ;.„<»pa/.fe A. Sick of ; mafad, A
Independentof ;,«Ap*ndB^d,. 8„„ ^,
innonitt of • ^m.<u.«.« a. a .'. ^'
139
InnoMttt of ; ^nnoMwf de.
Iweiulblt of ; ifii«w,we 4.
J«ao(u of ;jf«tfiiMx <fc.
LiUndofji^t^orftVuerf*.
N«glig»nt of ; qui Mgliffe.
Obwrf wt of ; qui obtervt.
fiwceptlble of ; suteeptible <U.
8ittpectedof;««^c<rfe.
^indoti/iupuidc.
Vainof ;J»»r*.
Voiaof;W<feife.
Worthy of ; digne dt,
ZuXwt ot , t4k pour.
It
Able to ; captOU dt (verb).
^4^i«tedto;a4(oiiiwd.
i to ; foMfi tfe.
TO
••
£qntlto;^/(k.
Equiralent to ; ^ivHent A.
A4f«itH[.od, to ;««in«Wi.»4. Fatia to ; wl
AU««.<toor(h«n,;tf„,„^^. Fitt^^mbT^,**
AttentiT»f*;attrtrf(^A
ATexseto,'«iMi«m{redi.
Bound to ; tMigi d.
Clo«eto;j»r*,«fo.
ComiBoa to ; eommun A.
Condudirfl to ; jiiieonfrijMe d.
'tmMhU to ;V»ttsii«»/«d.
Jo**ti;ytt*«enwr».
Kind to ; ban pour.
Llkble to ; a^iet d.
New to ; nouveaupour.
^^i*nttoiobii„ant,^„uA.
ObHoua to I ivident A.
^^^t0lconirair,A. Owing to ; wrf«r A
140
ranromis or broliib omamiub.
RMdy Xoiprttd (Ttrb).
Slow to ; Unt d.
.Subject to ; tuj4t A.
Tn*toijiM4,i.
II
Abwnt ttom ; nbtent de.
Allen fh>m ; Urangtr i\.
Clear from ; tatmpt de.
Diitant turn \ ilmgni de.
Diatinot from ; diffirtnt de.
Uufaithfta to ; iisUUk A.
Unlit to ; peupropre A (ferb).
Ueed to ; <ueo%Uum4 A.
FROM"
DiTfree from ; diff^nt de,
Exempt from ; eaimpt de.
Free from ; librede.
Kemote from ; iloigni de.
Safe from ; A Fabri de.
' FOB •
Affectionate for J Y«<««,«a.pour. Eminent for ; remarquabU par,
Famoua for ', favMvx powr ,
Fit for ; propre A.
Good for ; ban A, pour.
Grateful for ; rteonnautarU de.
Noted for ; remarquablepar.
Ready for ; prtt A.
Ripe for ; m^r pour.
Sorry for ,fdclude.
Auiona for ; anx%eux de.
Apt for ;propre A.
Bad for ; mauvaie pour.
Bound for ; de^ini A.
Celebrated for ; eiUbre par.
Competent for ; comp4UHt.
Conspicuous for ; remargwtble
par.
Cut out for ; propre A.
" ON "
Attendont ou ; qui aecompagne. Full on ; qui t'tUnd tur.
Bent on ; ri»,lu d. Imperative on ; impiritw.
Consequent on ;quieat la euiU de. Incumbent on ; qui ineombe A.
Copious on ; {abondant en Intent on ; appliqui A.
I^^o^ea). Resolved ou ; r^lu A.
" IN "
Rich in ; ric/ie en or de.
Concerned in ; intiresai A.
Deficient in ; qui manque de.
Eqnal in ; tgal en.
Expert in ; habile A,
Learned in ; verai dana.
Poor in \pauvre de.
Read in ; ;m» eonnait.
Ripe in ; mAr, (judgment).
Skilled in ; verai dana.
Slow in ; leni A.
Steady in ;/ertne dana.
Zealous in ; piU dana.
COMPLIMiVT OP xni ADJECTIVI. Ul
" ABOUT "
Akmed .Uut ; alarm, de. £.«.,» .bout ; ^„ de
'^ V i.fMj abont ; inquict de.
"WITH •
Atteaded with . - . C«n»oa«nt with ; d accord avtc.
Indolent with ;j.,r/.«, de. U.«ol with ; orrf.na.r, d.
AT "
Qaiokat ; w/a.
Ready at ; w/d.
Sick at ; malade i.
Apt at ; a<rrvt*< d.
CleTtr at ; AaM^e d.
^•ppj at ; A«Kfr«x d.
Impatient at ; irritabk A.
fn^jTl^""^ ^''^^''^ l'Hrtic.iple^ are sometimes
« not always appaici; i„ tho following list we
g3ve thoso which Boem to bo tho mo.t praftio!;!:
Affifcted at a story , touchy (Tune hutoire.
A^t^ whh a eick,.e.e , ajiig^d'yne maladie.
Afflicted at «,ni. „ew. ; affligid'unt noute.lc.
Afflicted with a .ickueM . qffHg,d'une maladie.
Alarmed at ; qui a'alarme de.
Aniaaed at , €bahi dc.
Aatoniahed at ; ^tonn^ de.
*:j|
142 PRINCIPLES OF BNGLI8H OIUmiAB.
Concerned at » affligi de.
Delighted at j charms de.
Disgusted at or with ; 4^goat€ de.
1^i>pU»a«i ht i nufeontent de.
Bni^aged at ; irriti de.
Enraged with j exaapire centre.
Frightened at ; effrayidx,
with ; e^rajfipar.
Qrievcd at > ehagrini dfi-
Irritaiedat;trr|W/^.
Pfwdoi wi ih (i» per^o.) 5 fdek^ centre.
" at(«thiug);/<JcArfd«.
Pleased withj; content de.
Pleased *t ; content de (an idea).
Shocked *t i affligi de.
Touched by or with ; 4mu de.
Touched with remorse , toucU par h remords.
We are deHroue to go there.
The infinitive coming after an adjective uipy be
tranBlntcd into EngUKh by the imperfect paiticinte
preceded by tho preposition proper to the adjoetl«6 •
or, in moKt eu>eH, by tho infinitive procoded by to. '
Ex.: Obi Id rch uro fond of playing.
J^es enfants ainient ii jouer.
We were desirous to go there.
Nous itions disireux dialler lik.
OOMPLfiBCKlfT OF THE OOMPABA!npi^.
Properly spi-tifcing, the ufunparative <%re« h^s no
complement in fingH.^b. bnt, a* ih Fremh, it i. irfwaya
followed by a • oujunction.
/■ .
OOMPLBMBNT OF THE OOIIPABATIVB. 143
-*%#«• is braver than FatU,
the fftetit h conjunction que.
Ex. : Peter ih bravoi- than Paul.
Pierre est plus hrave que Paul.
James is Jet* tall than Homy.
AT » ^i''''*"*' e^tnoins grand que Henri,
En^h-fhT^r' ''''' ''^''' ''^'''''' "'"^ ^"'^^^ the
JSnghsh u«e than. '
Ex. : Thi« uni.uu. is nothing <•!«« than a horse
Get animal nest rien autre chose qum cheval.
Peter is as brave as Paul,
The French co.npariHon of equality is translated
"7 ^ fl*. >» affirmative senionces.
Ex. : Peter is as brave as Paul.
Pierre est aussi brave que Paul.
With a negation, wc nse so instead of the first as.
Ex. : Peter is not so tall a« John.
Pierre n' est pas aussi grand que Jean.
When the sentence is inten.>gative and negative
?or^t '"""' T"' '^' <^«'»P«'"tive of equality is
lormed as in affirmative sentences.
Ex. : Is not Peter as brave as Paul ?
Pierre n'est-il pas aussi brave que Paul t
^With participles, we nse as much ov so much instead
Ex. : He is as much admired as his father.
// est awsi admiri que son pere.
r
144 PBINOIPLKS OF XN0LI8H ORAlfllAB. .
Ho )8 not SO much ebtpcmed as his brother.
// n'est pa» aussi estimi.qtie son frire,
I am more Hred than you thittk.
When the comparative is foil, wtd by a verb and
its subject, the wo ds ne and le. w, d in French, are
not translated.
Ex. : I am more tired thnn yoii thii:k.
Je 8ui8 plus fatigui que vous ne le pensez.
He epeakt better than X,
The pronoiifi comij.g after i}iin must be id the
nominiilive caM-, when it in subjV. t to .-. verb expressed
or understood.
Ex. : He ^pt•uks belter ibui< 1.
II parle mieux que moi.
Th«y sum o«d Iwlter iIi.k.w.*.
Its rimsisaen t mieux que nous.
Thebanie thing ought to be buid «boai tho.prononn
coming Jitter as.
Ex. : He is us tnll u» I
It est aussi grand que moi.
Tht-y j;ro not so tall a> we.
lis ne sont pas aussi grands que nous.
■' He had more than twenty companions,
De, Uhed ii.8te«d of ^rue, after u French comparative
IB translated by than.
Ex. ; Ho had moro than t,wenty companions.
II avait plus de vingt compagno^.
There were more than thirty personi.
11 y avait plus de (rente personnes.
ilftlJ.^I
r*i
C(»MPI.K1IE»T OF THE COMPARATITC 145',
ThebHter a mam i», the happter he it.
The French adverbs plus &t rMiiis repeated, are
toihWatW into Sfc^iai Kjrihe comimrirtivti nrecided
by the. '
Ex. : l?he better a man is, the happier he is.
Pliti w hommeeH bm, pm it ast heureux.
The richer ^e are, the more genoroas we
oaght to be.
Plus on est riche, plus on doit iOt gitUreust,
With nouns and verbs, we ase the more and the less,
Bx.: The more a man works, th.- moi-e he
savceedp.
Phis on travaille, plw on rhtssit.
The lewu man woiks, the leks li. Muoeeds.
Atom on travailfe, moins on riu»<4t.
The leftt wit a man ban, the le>h h« knows
that hu wants it.
MoiM un hommd a cCesprit, moins il s'aper-
foit qu'il en manque.
As will bo seen by the foregoing example«i, the
adjective, and the noan object to the verb to have,
are placed before the bubjcct and not after the verb.
He is 90 much the ntQre iffuorant, as he does
not work,
as much Ike more, or simply, the more ; so mueh the
««, or, the less, me mk-U lo tnrnstaie the French
d^imlmtplks, 'favtant moim. In thews sentonoes, que,
mnsi be irai4«||ited by at, thdt or lecM se.
146 PttlNCIPLES OF lyOLISH GBAHMAR.
Rx. : Ho U w> mu<h (ho moi-e ignorunt, as he
does not woi k.
// est d'autant plus ignorant, qu'il ne tra-
vaille pas.
. I wan hO much tho Icfiei touched by this
Bloiy, that I knew it before.
'f'aiM<Fautantmoin8touchidecettehistoire,
gueje la savais dijh.
N. B.—More and more, less and less, or a comparative
repeated, ai-e used to translate de plus en plus, de
tnoins en mains, i
Ex. : He became happier and happier with
years.
// devint de plus en plus heurevx en vieil-
■ ■ - lissant.
The things became less and less difficult.
I^es chases devinrent de mains en mains diffi.
ciles.
God ia so good that He gave u$ His son.
The Prciuh advoibs si and tant, expressing u coo-
sequcnco lud not u comparison, are translaied by so
so much, such. '
So, with adjectives and adverbs.
Ex. : God is ^o good that He gave us Hid son.
Ifteu est si ban qu'Il nous a donni son Fils.
He acts so prudeniJy, that ho is admired
overywhci-. .
Ilagitsipntdemmentqu'onradmirepartout.
Sa much, with participles and nouns.
imiki
SUP1RLATIVE8.
147
Ex.
You are so mncb csteomod, that. . . .
Votu ites si estimi que....
You have «o much courage, that. . . .
Vout aves tant de courage que....
Such 1*8 U8ed with nouns.'
Ex. : You are of such wort h, that ... .
Vous avez tant dimportance que.,.,
N.B.—lti such scntenctH, que is ti-anslated bv
that was. , ^
That, with 8 finite vf ib.
Ex. : H« IS so weak th ,t ho lannot ^alk.
•" «»' SI faible qu'il ne peut pas marcher.
As, with au indefinite verb.
Ex. : He is so weak as not to be able to walk.
// est faible au point de ne pas pomoir
marcher.
De coming after a superlative must be trauslated
hy,%n and of
/», with the name of a place.
' ■ 1- ■ • ■ .
Ex. : The finest tree in my garden.
Le 'plus hel arbre de mon jardin.
Off in all other case^.
Ex. : He is the tallest of his companions.
n est U plus grand de sea cornpagnons,
JV. A— The foregoing distinction is not quite
general ; veiy often, especially in conversation, the
English will use cf instead of in.
Ex. : This is the finest tree of my garden.
148 PBlNCIPLEa OF ENGLISH OKAMUAR.
The prettier of the two Hietere,
When it is question of iwo peivoiw -or two things,
that is, when Iwo «.bjectH are trompurod, the English
use the eompjirmivo witip the, instond of the super-
lative wo hnv.' I'. Fiomh.
Ex. : Th'* pii'iiier ofthft Iwo slHtcrs.
La plus jolie des deux soeura.
The better of my two horses.
Le iruHleur de mea deux chevaux.
The lower town, the upper town.
La ba^se-viUe, la haute-viUe.
N. A— Exceptions to this rule are to be scan in
the best English writonji.
CHAPTER ly.
00MPLE1IENT8 OF VERBS. '
English verba m«y have three kinds of comple-
ments or objects : direct, indirect af»d circumtantial.
The direct object is that whith is directly govern-
ed by the aclivi-transitive verb.
Ex. : I cull Peter.
J*appelle Pien^e.
The indirect object is that whith is indirectly
governed by the verb, but directly depods on the
supposition which connects it to the verb.
Ex. : I speak to John.
Je parle d Jean.
DIBBCT OBJECT.
149
*The circnmstantial object, whi«h reuWy exhu in
Bngli>h us well m in French, thongii not Hpoken of
by Biiglihh jfiammurians, expresses iho eircnmstunoes
accompanying an action.
Circumsianiiul complements may bo of foiu kinds.
1° Place. Ex. : I am going to PuvU.
Je vaia d Paris.
He arnved in the morning.
II arriva U matin.
He is dressed after the Froncli'
fai<hion.
II eat vitu d la mode frangaite.
The city was destroyed by fire.
La ville fut detruite par le feu.
2o Time.
3«> Manner
Ex.
Ex.
4«> Cause. Ex.
DIRECT OBJECT.
The direct object is generally placed after the verb.
Ex. : I esteem my friends, I love them.
tPeatime mea amia,je lea aime.
lu the following instances, th« direct object is
placed before the verb :
1" For the sake of emphasi*., that in, to draw
attention.
Ex. : Bqoal toil the good commander ondares
with the soldier.
Le bon eapitaine avbit la mime fatigue
qvs le aoldat.
2" When the direct object i.s u rdajivo or an inter-
i-o^ativc pronoun.
160 PBI.\CIPI.E8 or ENOLISn ORAMMAR.
JBx. : The bock which yon wiMit. •
jte fcv»^ dont vous avez besain.
Whom do ji»u rail ?
Qui apptlez-voiM ?
Avoid Qatning,
With few VQifbe having tj|0 Hcnso of the French
verb. <vi<^, ctmr, m^Aer, etc., the infinitive da
traneJMted by iikf jnjipenfect participle.
Xz.': Avoid gaming.
Evittz dejouer.
To avoid, ^kr d#. To k«ep, com ,uer.
To wtefir, A^j>y«r ^. To |«it«, ee«er rf*.
Jo f f-^^MK «WW«W A- Xovf^nt, '«e repentir d«.
To help, *Vmp«eA«r de. To ttop, cMter rfe.
1 P^^VfHf^ fo fiowffoin^ there.
With the followmg verbji, we miy use tA« infinitive
^ilaewqfe^eet>p0ri(eJpte'.
To attempt, et«(qr<r </e. Tu i»t«Bd« av^.inientlen de.
To bear, *i{Rp*iier rfe. To«ortp«H,, <|yA-er de.
Jo.ceMe, ce«««r d«. To propo8e^a»<tfrf«toifto»d«.
TO delay, retdrdsr rfi-. To pMrpow, tipfoptfter di.
To rffrt^fe, feftoa^-'de.
To r«>gret, regtetler^.
To rrmeniber, «e fOMMm'r de.
I {Misrpoae to f(o or «foAMg 4hef».
«/'at rtnt«n<i<m d'aUer U.
MS.— in these cnwM, tliti Impoififct participle
expresses simullanohy or co-riinuance of a:j action.
Bx. : I like reading whilrtwalklnsr.
J*aime d lire en marchant.
To disdain, didaigner de
1!o<fbrbriar, 9'mfieher dt.
To hate, nepaa aimer de,
IB*
I dl8.loin goi^g there often.
Je n'diine ptudaHerld iouvmt.
The inflDitive mfrelyU»xpre»teg ah action.
?*•• ^yo"»ikclogo tliero?
tote, to m«to,^ ««rf. fo «», to »at»,preced.dby
mU^^yith the ».e.nW /the F»n<A
verb «,W«tr. «e follow,;.] by the ibfinitive without
^* * : JjW y«tt.<iep«rf, and jon dft^ Bi»y.
He will h^y^ j|wi ^ i^,^.
On V0U8 entenditpi^rkr.
l^y ^«r© geftn to play.
On Ufi vitjou«r.
I hear the ehUd speaking.
Wi«i .4*^ V-*».<o JM^to A^Ar, fo «ee and its
2^^«i -the i06Mt,Ve,b«y be ^nmslnted byihe
W^^S!^'**^' ^*'^'*'*'^ " ""^ ^«» the inHni.
^ve •^n^e. an nctiori which t.kes place in't^
■ame time as another action. T
152
PimoiPLKf or ElfQLISH GRAMJIAB.
Ex.
I hear the ohiki H|>uikinj;.
J'entenda parler Venfant.
We saw him inughjng.
Nona le vtmea rire.
2o The perfect participle translntos the French
infiniiive, when this infinitive expresses an action
•nirored by the folioiring noun.
Bx : I saw the child flogged.
J'ai w, fouetUr Vmfant.
I heard the letter read.
Tai enttndu lire la lettre.
Thky elected him preeideiU,
B, "^ ^®^ vwbs, such as to make, to name, to elect,
to teach, may have two direct objects.
Bx. : They elected him president.
H fiU du prfyident.
They made him secretary.
lie lefirent aeerOaire.
Wo teach the boys their grammar.
i^oiM enaeignone aux en/ants leur
grammaire.
N, A— As njjiy be mcuh by the prucodiiig examples,
one of the objects represents the person ; the other
represents the profession, iho office, the thing taught.
We heUeved we heard eomebody epeaMng,
After the verbs which oxpreas a feeling or an
operation of the mind, sach as, to think, to believe^
to tciehj to tell, we use the coujanciion that with a
finite verb, instead of the infiuiiivo we have in
French.
Ex.
WRECT OBJECT. 158
We bclier«Hl we hoanl Homebody apeakiog
Ifoue Chimes entendre purler quelqu'un,
1 think ihn« I neo uoinothing.
Je ci'oifi voir qnelque chose.
That is almost nlwayi* undenjtood.
We know how to akate.
The infinitive coming after the verbs to know,
to Uarn, to show, to teach, must be preceded by
the adverb how when the sulyect is the same for
tne two verbs.
Bx. : We know how lo ^kutif.
^0U8 savone jKdiner.
J^' f:,"^" T'^ ' """"■'''' '^" ^^vhlknow, may be
changed inio/crtn. » "/ w
Ex. : Wc can ckaiu.
Xous mvovs, nouH pouvona patiner.
We enfoy a (food health.
Some verbs, whl-h ,m- ..ctivc-i.a.u.rsiiive or re-
neciMl It. FieiM-h. arc ... livt-trunhitive in English.
Ex. : W« iM.joy a g.Hxl hoalih.
Ifousjtmiesona d'une bonne «onW
Such arc th« rollowi..g amoni; several.
To answer, rjpondrt d. To r.M,t. r4Hster d.
ro command, commander d. To -ult, conrenir d.
To obey, o6Ar d. To w»„., atoir 6«o,„ cfe.
Ex. : I want tweniy-five cents for my holiday.
nPai heaoin de vingt-cinq cents pour
fnon cong4.
UM PUlfCIPLM OP KHOLIH OtAMMAE.
I a«e tbiH ptipor forny ex«rciMii.
Je me htb de oe papier pour mee devoire.
1ft brenihed hit laai bt'0mih.
Aotivo-lntittHHitlvo ycMb. inuy >om«»tlinc« have a
diwot object, but thix obit-ci inu«t biiTo tbe Mnieroot
M tbo verb.
Bx. : Ho breathed hb Iu4t broalh.
11 ezhala aon dernier toupir.
Otir gallant boyn fought good flgfats In
Africa.
A(w,6mt;M eoldats ont livr4 de hiiie
combate en Afrique.
.They Hiept a good sleep.
11* dormirent un bon eamme.
Tea makes a pereon nervoUe.
The dirwt ubjwt of an actHre-tranilllve verb ii
not always expr«»Md in Frouch ; in English, we ought
to use a pronoun or a noon to repre<»ent the object
understood in Fi-ench.
Ex. : Tt'u makes a pei-son noivou^.
Le thi rend nerveiix.
Opiara makes one sleep.
Vopium fait dormir.
Take offponr hat.
Activc-tranaidvo verbs are often accompanied fay «
preposiUon which changes their meaning. This we-
posiUon ought to be placed after iho verb, when the
ol^t IS a noun ; after the object, when it is a pro-
IlfOIKBOT OBJBOT.
Ex.: Take off your bat.
Otez voire ehapeau.
Take it off.
Otet-U.
155
IMDIRIOT OBJIOT.
The indirect object i» goiiorally oxpre8.<)ed bv to o^
from.
To indicuttH a tendency toward an aim.
Ex. : I give a book to my Mister.
Je donne un livre d ma aceur.
F)rom iodicatcK the point at which an action is
regarded as setting out ; or, the source out of which
a thing proceeds.
Ex. : We received a letter from our mother.
Houfi refUmea une lettre de notre mire.
^^ - ■ . We ifive it to ^tm.
When the two objects of a. verb are pr9nouns, the
direct object must be placed next to the verb and the
indirect oi^, which comes aUer, is accompanied
by <«..■• .•-■••>.••
Ex. : We give it to him.
^^^"^Noua U lui donnone.
iv. B.—To is often omitted in conversation.
Ex. : Give it me.
DoHTiez-le moi^
Thew aepU him fruif.
If the direct object is a nonn and the indirect object
166; PRINCIPLES Of UIOJViSH (MUlfUAH.
a pronoun, the laUer i« i,j|u,od fim, awA^^^mto-
siUon <o 18 generally omituri.
Ex. : Wo sent him froitH.
Nous lui envoy dmes desfniM;^
Theae boolu betong to Mm,
tat^ZT^ 7-^ **«*'«»^ft' «iir^<*Ajfoni^ to talk,
to 9peak,iQ reply, to repeat, ihc preposition to ooffht to
be exprflssed bufuic ibo imlircct objeoi.
Ex. : Tho»b books belo.j,' lo hi in.
Cea livrea lui appiiHiennent.
He Bjjuke to the puojile.
11 hairatigua le peiiple.
The kindnete of Quee^ VietoHa is slih
^|Jo«king lo our hearts'.
La hont4 de la revue Victoria Wbitibh
pr^ente d noa cceure.
This dog atwavs barks at the passers-by.
The indirect object raiy be prbcedod by other
pr«p08ition8, Hn» h u^ at, of, with', ett.
"AT"
Thi8piopo.>iii..n ijeiiemHy expresses a rdation of
direction to an nbjcci or uiid.
Ex. : Thi> iJo^ always barks at the pai!Mn.by.
Ce chien aboie toujours aprisUswu-
Hunta.
To aim *X, vim-. To «.ll at, paiier ehen.
To arrive at, arriver d. To come at. arriv^r d.
To bark at, aboyer aprii. To «Ja»tlt, Imnetr d.
To bay at. aboyer apri, 1\, „^^ ,t; |^^^ ^^
r^
IMBIRtOX OBJCCf. 15^1
To fitt .t. u^gr^n^ *. To peep at, r^r*r d la
Tofiown.t.«j^rd«.«»/ro«. d^oj^
f««/ fe. ,W. To, pine at, «,«/„> d,.
To g.i« at, «.^*o««*.*«.«^. To «g. at. ra^r „nire.
Tog.t.t.am«erA. To .hodt at. «rer «,..
Toglanc. at. ,W«. .„ «,„^. To shudder at. /H«„.«. ^.
rf'.W-e.r. To .mil, at, «,u„Ve *.
To gnu at. /«.nr fa grimace 4. To ,tfip at. vtordre.
To hint at, ,rjffeim;n
To joke at. plaitanter sur.
Tokn ckat, frasper A.
To laugh at, rire de.
To look ai, ngfanler.
To marvel at, aeintroeiik* de.
To 8uarl at. momnrle»4^ntaA.
To siicer at. ae moquer de.
To 8W.ar at./nire dea impriea.
tiona eoHtre.
Towon<lrat,»«(Wt„«r.
0/ lOiry lX|«ft>s n I
moiiv.', l•a^l^.• . i, .
To abate of, perdre de.
To accuse of, aeeut^r de.
To admOHisb of, nvertir de.
To ask of, dtm nder «l.
To assure of, amtrer de.
To bereave of, priver de.
To boost of, ae vapter de.
To convict of, «,»ratnirr«A..
To convince of, i)tmt>aincrede.
To cure of, gtUHr de
To cut out of, vmkrgtnu.
TodtpriT»«r,^riii,A.
Todi.bar*Ni*r;«rtit^V,.
Of •
efatioi. <.f privation, riource,
To (iiscifarge of, deeharger de,
To ease of, d<Jftorraj«,r de.
To get out of, aorlir de.
To heal of, guirir de.
To help out of. aider d aorlir *.
To inform of. informer de.
To hew out of, te,7fer dans.
To lay hold of. ae aaiair de.
To make out of, /aire de.
To periuade ^ti persuader de.
To remind of, rappehr.
To request of, dtnuindir 4.
To require 6T, txiger de.
To tmspect of, aoupfonner de.
To warn of, avertir d*.
168 PRINCIPLB8 OF ENaLl.«H ORAMMAK.
To rid of, diharrasaer de.
To rob of, dipouilUr de.
To strip of, depouilkr de.
♦• IN '
Thl8 jMuiicle cxpiei*e.s a ivlaijo,, of ]>o«8e88ion,
parlicipniion ; it may also j.di.uie a nm.iner of
Ex. : Wo dolijrht in woikiii|f.'
Nous nous plaisona d travailler.
To believe in, eroire k.
To confide in, tejier A.
To delight in, aimer A.
Todresein, « vttirde.
To end in, finir par.
To excel in, exeeller A.
To fail in, manquer de. ..,
To glory in, ae glorifier de
u
To iui prove in, le per/eetionner
dans.
To indulge in, te livrer A.
To join in, x riunirpour.
To mingle in, w mtler A.
To partake in, avoir part A.
To persevere in, peraMrer A.
To rejoice in, ae r^ouir de.
To share in, prendre part A.
OH "
Oft is used before the object or. which, or on account
01 which an action is made.
Ex. : Wc feed on bread and butler.
Nou8 nou8 nourt-iaaom de pain et de
beurre.
To erect on, iriger ^ur. ■•"
To feed on, ae nourrir.de,'^
To felicitate npon, /ilieiter de.
_ , Tof^W back on, wrep/ierror.
To congratulate on,/Wiciferrf«. To. fmll on, tomber aur ,■
Tooonfer on, acan-der A. T<^w;ctn^n, forcer de.prendre.
To depend on, di^ndrede, au %%»i^_npo^J!f^^,ur.
compter aur. To ground upon, fonder aur.
To be bent on, a'obstiner A.
To bestow on, donner A.
To bottom on, baser aur.
To breakfast on, dijfuner de.
IlfOIHBUT OBJSOT.
ISO
Ta hwg on, acerocher A. To pi»y on, fait* tafroitde.
To mcoicat« on. ineulqmr 4. To quarter on, loger the,.
To inaeribe upon, inttrirt sur. To tiespMs on, abunr de.
" FOB "
For expresses ureluHoii of cause oi- motive.
Ex. : He was punished for losing his time.
^l' /fit puni pour awir perdu 9on tempt.
To answer for, r^pondre de. To intend for, dMHur d.
To ask for. demandtr. To praise for, Icuer dt.
Tobecuto«for,Kr«&to.7fcd. To punirii for. p«»«. A.
To qaalify fer^ nndrtpnpred.
To reward for, rieitmpeHitr de.
To nprioHuid for, riprimander
pour.
To take up for, ripHmander
pour.
To thank for, remereier de.
To thirit for, avoir totfde.
To blame for, b14mer de.
To book for, inaerire pour.
To eeneore for, bldmer de.
To chaatue for, chMier de.
To duck for, reprendre pour.
To design for, duMfwr 4.
To educate for, former pour.
To it tor, prtpa*isrd.
To fit out for, ^quiperpour.
" FROM •»
This pieposhton expresses a relation of remoteneM,
sepumtion, privailon.
To alienate from, etilever d. To deduct from, diduire de.
To ab^mii. fron.,*'a6*tener de To deliver from, dilivrer de.
To banish from, banwr de. To derive fro«, re<tr«- de.
To be-r away from, rempor- To deter ftoin. d^tourmer de.
^^''""^ To discharge from, dAAar.
To borrow from,«iiipr««<erde. ger de.
To conceal from, eacher d. To dieoern f^m, dieeetner de.
To out from, couper eur. To dismiss from, rmmyer d*.
To dste from, daitr de. Todi.«u«defrom,(««««ferifei
160
PRINCtPLBS Of ENGLrSH GRAUMAB.
TodiMirtg,,i.hfr..,„.rf/,</n- Toprcv,t>tfron.,empgcherde.
guerde. To preclude ftuin./erm«. Ten-
ro disturb from. dfMf>:,ire de. ir€t de.
To divert rrom,d^tourn,r.fe. To r,ap tro,u,fnoissonnerde.
To drive from, chooser de. To release fro.... digager de.
To eject from, rejetir de To ren.ovc fro,„. Hoigner de.
To extract fro.n, extraire de. To rcqniro fro.n. exiger dc.
To extort from, extorquer A. To save from, 'ouvr- de.
To force fron..«,/,r«r deforce.To secnre f. -o.„. «„„,.«• con<r«.
To free fro.n. libirer de. To .hield trony.praUger centre.
To h.de fro.n. cack^r a. To stral f.o,„, rofcr d.
To j..dge rromjuger d'aprin. To .e, fr,.e fron.. digager de.
To obtain fro..., ..htenir de. To take fro.,. dUr d. "
To preserve fro..,, prAerwrrfe To tear fr..,i,, armcAerd.
"WITH"
Thi« preiMihi.lo., .IccoH the i..Miui..ei,t u^ed to
maico ui. aHio... or the ,««:„.^ «t reathii.g an end.
To acq.iai..t wiil,,/«Ve eon- To l..,rde„ with, charger de.
. **""'''• To benumb w;th,en^Mrrffrrf«.
To arm wi.h, am«- ,/e. To compare wi.h, comparer
To adorr. wiih, oriier de. avee.
To animate wiih. onimer de. To confront with, con/ronter
To annoy with, viqiiieter de. avec.
To an-i.i wi.h. ossmer de. To connect wi.h, railacher d
To aa.ocia.e with. av.t«ci>r d. To coo.aminate with, eouil-
To bedaub wiih,6(ir6o«j7/«rrf<.. ;«.</«.
To bedew wi.h, ar,oeer de. To cover with, eouvtir de.
To bespangle wi.h. orni^r de. To cram with, farcir de.
To blend with . miler avec. To crowd with, «com6r«r de.
To bore wuhjmportmur de To cn.wn with, couronner de.
To brace with. /br<(/!«. par. To charge wi.h, «cc«#€r de.
To brand w..h, woryMeraMc. To cheer with, ^agerpar.
" V ■■ '
INDIRECT OBJRCT.
161
To dA.ib wiji.. barbouilltr dt. To honour with, homrer de.
To dazzfe with, ihlouir de. To impregnate with, intpr^
To deafen wiih, a»goin d>r d«. gner de.
To delnge wiih. inonder de. To incriist >yith, incrmter de.
To dignify with, d^corer de. To infect with, infecter de.
Todispen8ewith.rfMpcn«crrfe. To infest with, in/ester de.
Todi8tractwi.h,rfM/r«,re;,ar. To intoxicate with, enivrerde.
To disturb ^yh\^,troHblerpar. To loa.J with, charger de.
To .livide with, diviser avee. To oppros. with, aecabler de.
ToenibelUsh ^^\th, embel irde To pave wi.h, parer de.
Toenchant wi,h,rArtr,«erp«r. To j,elrify ^viih, pctrifier de:
To enclose m;lt,e„/en«er uvcc. To provi.le wit h , ponrvoir de.
To encuMilKr wi.h. encom- To Rpatl^ r i^ih,^clabou»serde.
brer de. ^ To Miiiie wi\h,/rapper de.
To endue wi.h. douer de. To sprinkle wi.h, arroser de.
To fatigue wi.h. fatiguer de. To 8tain with, iacher de.
To feed wi.h, nourrir de. To strengthen mih, fortifier
To fill with, remplir de. par.
To fl-eight wi.h, charger de. To stud wi.h, garnir de.
Tofrighteo with, effrayerpar. To ntun with, <fto«rrftr de.
To garnish wi.h, garnir de. To supply with,/o«rnir de.
To gorge wi.h, gorger de. To-tempt with, tenter par.
To hang wi.h, orner de. To xro.m.J with, 6/«Mr par.
To hurt wi.h, bleaaerpar.
Ex. : Wc supplit.,1 thorn with bread and milk.
A^oua leurfournimes du pain et du laii.
"INTO"
Into der.otoK a Chang.., a pa8«i..g from one place to
another, fioin one form to another.
To bring into (notice), faire To ca«t iuto, Jeter dans,
remarquer. To cut i..lo, eouper en.
To carry i»,to, porter dana. To diviJe into, divuer en.
l\
1(62
PBUrOIPLBS OF BNOI^mK OaAlOfAR.
To torq. i»lo, /b,>« «.frer de To t^wform into, iranM/ar-
To^li"*^*-^''r t~- To ulhtr l„to..„f.orf«f«d«u.
B«. : CW chAbgM water into ioe.
^ froid changie l^mu en glnce.
tl
^ denouj* amhority,' Bgperiorjiy, dignity or
«».: Y'>" Hhull reign over roy p.K)plo.
J'oTw Tignerez but mon peuple.
To crow ov.r, narfp,^. To pore over. p4«r «.,..
To donuheer over. ^o«/n<T To preside over, >rA,V^er.
««r.
To h*Ag over, turplombtr.
To hover over. |»fa«er mr.
To intttUover. intkltera.
To ifkourn over, pleurermtr.
To intthhnr over» murmvrer
To ruleover. gouverner.
To «ail over, vepufr «trr.
To think ovw^r.^Air «»•.
To triiitaph over, irimphtr
To tyrannise over, r^gnef »^r.
To wkich over, veiller n^. '
To wave over^Jhttar tur.
To iaocie over, miditer »ur.
To poDder over. m^fc. ^,. To weep o»er.>7e«r«r .«r
To .ba»do» .0, «6a«.fo«„er^ % a-.i™iia,e to. a,HmUer d.
Toacouelom .o,«wii/«««r<|. To attach to, attacker d
<f o-adnpi 10, a*ip/er d.
To addreiia to, adrttier d
'^9»PfiftOij,fpiigntrd.
To an^otnt 4^ tio#Mer d:
To«Ai©,&ef#erd.
To bafiifih to, riliguerdant.
To beW to, faire pUer d.
To IM^ 4o,/onrt«. d.
To bri»«g up to AtrijfKw d.
To bring owr lo, ramener d.
m
INOIBIOT OBJICT. JM
To con8«5r«te to, con,acr^ A. f^''^'^'^^^'
^O^OB^gn to, coHStgner 4. ^^p^^^
?eo.^rrr^t;:;:r— :r
ou ailenee.
To put to Rhftme, tfourr^r d«
TopnttothetMt,i»«<<r«a
To pirt to^tK»I^pi««frea rwM*.
Topi*tofl,eiiMsk,m«<fr«a
Xo#ei|diPke«9iy«.(i.
To «a)>i«9t <o, mmmttre d.
To dtsvote to» d^eotMr <l.
To diapfttch to, espAfttr d.
Todoointo,«,Mdaii,n<r<i.
^*««to, /nrtrterd.
Wtnthleto.domwrrfroftd.
To excite to, etdter A.
Toexileto,«rtferd.
Toe«po«eto,«xpM«.d.
To extol to, «ip«r A
ToArt^to^4^4,
TofliDgto,fa„<^4.
Togi»eupto,/irr«.<j.
ToheIpio^a<^^4
Toimn»rt*«r A^ *«W«>t tO, «>tl«M«r« d.
«pei lo, porter d. To tie to, /^ 4.
^.ncteto.i^^a. l^wrfteWJk...
To oooMlt about, co«,«/<«;
To OODteod •bout, «e <il£iptfto>
9W.
164 PRIROIPLIS OF KNOLI^H ORAMMAB.
To diapnte aboat,«« diaputer To inquire ftbout,«'t'ii/onNcr
.««»'• de.
15x. : They dispute about tiif Icm.
Ila 86 ditputent pour des riens.
" AFTER "
To hunt after, recherehtr. To seek after, ehereher.
To long after, toupirer aprit. To thirst after, avoir aoifde.
To pant after, diairm:
Ex. : They long after our return.
Ila^ mupirent apria notre retour.
OnunniSTANTIAL OOMPLEUNTB.
Place.
1® The name of the place whore we are, whore we
make ao action, takes in English the preposition at.
Bx. : We are at school.
Nous sommea d Vicole.
They work at home.
Ila travailUnt d la maiaon.
2o With names of countries and capitaia, we gone-
rally use in which is preferable to at.
Bx. : We live in Canada.
Noua demeurona en Canada.
They live in Ottawa.
Ila demeurent d Ottawa.
3<» At is asod with names of villages, cities.
Bx. : He lives at Boston.
H demaire d Boaton.
OIROWttTAMIIAL OOMPLMling. 165
We ar« at St Ann.
^ous aommea d SainU-Anne.
40 In may express motion in the saipe place.
Ex.: We walk in the room.
JfouB marchons dana la ehambr«
wlef ''"""^ '''' °*^*"«* '' o"« ^orm into
Ex. : ^ater is conrertible into ice and «now*
^^^^ckangeabUenglaceetenneige,
ZZ^ol^r"" "-P-^»^epa.ingrromone
Bx.: I wa«in^he garden; I went into the boow.
^^« dan. Ujardin ; fallai dans la
fnaiion.
T" To denotes m&tion towai-da a place.
Ex.: We are going to Quebec
I^oua allons d. Quebec.
Jo^n .omo inBlances,/.r is used to express desti-
Ex. • Oar soldier* sailed for Soath-Africa.
J!^08 aoldaia parHrent pour VAMaue
duaud. .
Ex.: We ci)m© from Montreal.
'^ov>a venona de Montrial.
1(J» The place throogh which we pass is preceded
by the preposition through. Pwoeded
U6
niNoiPLM or moLiiH okamiub.
Ex. : We entered through this gate.
Nou^ enfrdmeB par cetU porie.
We pawed throagh the oily.
JITont irawndfMt la wUe.
ll* By is lued when we oaly pass near the place.
Ex. : I piuised hy the wharves.
/e jNMMM JH* des 91MM.
Tr w MkUmi oTi tho Trmirh prtpoimoji " OHIZ "
|Iik«?t«»«lMton «rtli{*prepobittan mi^ be made in
twodtl^erootwagrg; .
1« When Chez is followed by a noan, it w iifMlslated
by a«, to or /rom, aocording to, the verb, and the
iMMn miMtt b^ in thb p(M8<|satVB ciMe.
jII, wHhii Vtt^b d«iW)ftliig rest.
Ex. : I am at my father's.
Ji Mil thm #Km pire.
To, with a verb ofinolloit.
Ex.: I am going to my iidtdrV
*/• v«is tktt met iamr.
Jh»m, with a verb expressing ^eparation or remote-
nets.
Sk.: looniefnMBmybroiherV.
Je viens de chez mon frire.
?• When ^eket is followed by a pronoun, the person
represented by this pronoun is to bo considered.
When the subject of ^he verb and the pnMoun
coming aflo- cier xeprosent the saike .person, we
t^mslate eh€Z and the pronoun by the wofA ^«me
wfth a verb of motion, and ai hme, without motion.
/^
CIRC. MWAHTUL COMPLEMtlfT. 1^7
Ex.: I am ^roJMg Lome.
J« vaia chez moi.
My brother is go\ug home.
^'onfrirevachzlui.
I o»n at borne.
Je suit chez mot.
Yon are at home.
Voua ites chez voua.
When the pronoun tominif after ehss «nW ♦!. v
m of the verb d« „ot r^pvLTthlJ ' "^•
t»»n8lato Chez by the wo.Jl a!! "'"^ P*"°"' '^^
l-eaningofiho nCnl ' ^^ "' '^''"P*' "^ *^*
Kx.: I urn going to your house.
•/e vai* M«s t«)M«.
My brother often come, to my house.
^^^/''^revuntsouventchezrnoi.
Theyw.IIgotohiahouHe.
Jlsirontchez lui.
Peter acoompaaied Paul to his house
i'lerre accompagna Paul chez lui.
Time.
1 lo expre88 the vot-v hnn- -* i • .
l-. w« „.ao 0. j,r ::.r w^'r :° "-"■"" '^
^•' ^ ^"^ staiM, at ten o'clock
J^partiraiddixheures.
2o On ia used with the name nfm- .
P^ the date nfan action ' ' ^"^' ""' "^ '"
m
■ U'
niMoirLM or ikolwb oftAniuA
Em.
Thvy will uirir* on SuiMiay.
lU arriveront diman^
Tbfj Mart*}.! on the ftftv><»irth^ June.
11$ pattirtnt U^uinte dtjviin,
8* With tho iiuiiif of thtf ytitti', we u«e in.-
Sz. : Ih the year 19UL.
EnVannii 1901.
In i« ahto lueii in \hn, i^Mwrninv;- oaeee : In the
momwg,,.in the evenins,. in ths forenoon^ in the after-
wm^ in epnngf in eunimer, etv.
B)B.: Ill , the AMiuiiiii, of 1900, onthe 26th of
Noveii^b«i',«tHi.x o'clock in ibeinoniiDg.
Dane I'automM de 19U0, le 25 c{f tiot^em-
bre, ^etmhmree du mdtin^
I remained there for fwo years.
The ]>re|jOMiion /or mut be ueeU before a noan
which matkii the daration or lasting of an action.
For lit the eqoi valient of the French pendant or
diirant.
Ex'. : I remained there for two yeaiM.
Jls demeurai Id pendant deux ana.
a. B, — For u often omitted in cony^rsation.
Bx. : They worked two yean.
lU travaillirent pendant deux ane.
We go to our father** twice a week.
ii is ■omotimeit ukcU for eacA and <(;«^ to express
the periodical ve^Mvu of an action ; in such caaee, the
BogHafc laif^iiige «Mi no preposition.
Bx.
Wo go to our IiiUuji'b twioa ft week.
you* allona chex notrt ptr4 dnut/oU
par semaine.
€fod er0at0d the MwrM ipt Hx dape.
The niime of the time in the limite of which •»
jcUoii i. mode, wu* mude or will bo mode, is preoedad
by m or Within. ' i'"'«iu»»
Ex. : God ereaUfd the world in eix d«y<.
Dieu er^ U monde en aixjouri
N. ^'-En, daw, in French, have «omoUa»ee ihm
mea,.i..jr f,faprii, ,hey may be trandated oocordiog^
Ex. : He will arrive after three days.
J I arrivera dana troiajoura.
Within seems to have the moaning of the Freneb
Ex. : Thoy will come within a hionth.
lla viendroftt d^ici d un moia.
ObtervatioM on the translation of tiie Frenefa
verb " n. Y A ' expressing time.
The impei>.oiial verb itya may express a time fallT
Jttst or not fill. y past. '
She died two yeara ago.
When the fact spoken of i« M\y pa.t, ^q do do!
translate U y a, and wo uso the preterit or imperfect
tense and the advei b ago, which i» placed after ih^
narao of tho time.
*■- .Vir. l_ .-,. . . ^., ..' ... ,
170 PBINCIPLB8 0¥ BM0LI8H ORAUMAR.
Jfiv > ; Jblu. ii4;r i vip^ two inQulhH 4go.
// y a deux moU.qu'il eat ai'^'ivd.
She died iwo years ago.
N. ir.^lA ■Nhsh efasM, ii'y a itiny als6 be traoAlated
by k i8,,,i$i»iee.'
Ex. : Ik is two months since he went off.
It y a^dtfuad mdit qu'il eat pdinii.
.'■■■'. '■■ ?u '.'■ ■ '^■.. ,
He ha* been travelling for two years,
*Vr ■■'■.■ ... .■ .
When ihjB.timeis not f«lly paat, without iranilatiog
iiy a, we use the perfect tense with the adjective this
or theae instead of th9 p^resent of the indicative mood
wed in French. Far may be used or not
Ex. : He has been travelling these two years.
Ily a deux ana qu*U voyage.
Tery often, thia and th^ are not used.
iSx. : He has been for three ytiars a prisoner.
Ily a troia ana qu'il eat priaonnier.
i\r. JB. — !<* The pluperfect tense, in such cases,
translates the French imperfect.
Ex. : We had been tliere for three days.
It y avait troia jours que noua itiona Id,,
2o The Bccond-futuio tranHlaies the first-future used
in French.
Ex. : I will have spoken for two Koura when
you come.
II y aura deux heurea que je parUrai
quand voua viendrez.
rm
OIBCnMSTANTIAL COXPLKMBNTS. 171
Uanner.
Throe piepoeitioiiH may accompuny tho ciroum-
slantiul object of manner ; ihey are : in, with, and
after.
Ex.: Sbo spoke in a distinct voice.
Elleparla d'une voix dintiiicte.
The chiltl with the whi^e dro»«i.
L'en/ant en hahlt bluuv.
We are drcB^ed after tho French f:whion.
JVVu« aovMetf habill^ a la mode fra-n-.
N. B. — Very often th.i pi-oposiiiou in not expressed
in French; in English, the object most be preceded
by its preposition.
Ex. : He stood with arms folded.
fl se (enait lea bras croia^a.
By pracUting a man becomea eU^er.
The French preposition en, followed by the im-
perfect participle, sometimes expresses tnanner ; it
may be translated in sevei-al way;*.
1® By, to express the aim.
Ex. : By practicing a man becomes clever.
^npratiquantunhommedevUnt habile.
2o In, when tWQ actions i|re simuii^eoas.
Ex.: ^ pronouncing tl»«8e words, ho went away.
En^ononfifmt ieam^i^il s'gn alia.
3o In is often nndentood.
I*
4; .
*W PBINCrPLES OP ENOLISH ORAMMAH.
Bx. : CoiiBidoriiig these men, he was struck by
their majestj.
Enconeid^antce8hom.nea,ilfutfrapp^
de leur majeati,
4fi Instead of in, as may ho used with a finite verb.
Ex. : A& he pronounced these words, he went
uway.
En pronongant ces mots, il a*en alia,
6° On is use^ to express the precise moment of an
«OtiOD.
Ex. : On leaving my brother's house, I went to
my aunt's.
En quittant la maiaon de mon frire,
j'allai chez ma tante.
We eame hy the stage-coach.
The name of the instrument used to make an action
takes in English the prepositions with or hy.
With is used with active-transitive verbs.
Ex. : I struck him with a shovel.
Je le fira'p^i avec une peUe.
They killed my brother with a sword.
Us tuirent mon frere avec une ^^.
By is more generally used with active-intransitivo
verbs.
Ex. : We came by the stage-coach.
ISous vinmes avec la diligence.
They started by the express-train.
lU paHirent avec le train rapide.
jr. B, — According to Webster, it is diffleult to give
CiacUMSTANTIAL COMPLEMENTS.
17?
perfect rule« for the u.c of thc6<. prepoKitions which
sometimes Kt-em to bo ii^cd aitbitrarily. Practice will
then do moro than rules of grain mar.
He was wounded in t/te leg.
To name iho part of the body which receives or
sufTei'S an action, wo employ in, on or about.
Bx. : Ho had u rin^ on his 6n/^er.
II avait un anneau au doigt.
He Was wounded in the leg.
Jlfut blessed la jambe.
I gave him my book for ten e<:nte.
The name of the price paid for a thing i, pre-
ceded in English by /or, or a^
^ For is employed when the price was not previously
Ex. : I gave him my bouk for te|» cents.
Je lui donnai mon livre pour dix cen^
\ tins.
At is tisod when the price was previously fixed,
Ex. : Wo sell our best sugar at five cents »
pound.
Noua vendons notre meilkiir auere dn^
centina la livre.
nrf* f ~J.'\'*"^*» instances we use a or an instead.
01 re, la, which we have in French.
Ex. : Ten cents a pound.
Dix eentins In livre.
Iirir
174 PStirciPLBs or bn<im»h orammar.
IhewaU i8 fifteen feet high by forty feet long.
If we consider tbiHezuinpli', wo will M^e that instead
of the verb to hove, used m Fienob, the English
UBetobc, flk, belci^e t)if jicljoiiiw, i<s mkeii awjiy, and
aur IS translat«d by by or and.
Bx. : The wall is fifteen foot high by forty feet
L» m«r ,a quime pieda de luiut sur
qiiarante delong.
The same constraction is employed in the following
cases :
Ex.: M^ln^tiM^isteiPyeftrddld^'
Mdii frire' a dix a7i6.
The mass was two hotrfs '\6ng.
Z^meaee dwra deute heuree;
The garriKon was only forty men strong.
La gamiaon n'avait que qttarante
Montreal is 160 miles distant from Quebec.
Montr* al, e8t a 160 niilUia de Quebec.
Cause.
Sev«ial |»ie|)08itioij8 arc iwi'd to expru^n iho re-
latiorj of cntiHe.
!« By ih used with a pat5^ive voib, when the in-
diiject o)9«ia o^' ihiK verb w a noun or a pronoan
which may become subject to the Mime verb con.
jagated in the active voice.
Ex. : He if cttteemed i^y his jfriends
II eai estimii ck nes ami*.
CIRCUMOTANTIAL COMPLEMENTS. 175
He W....S alarmed by his KJsier's crios.
thing '^" '"^•'^"^ "''J"' '"* '^' "«'»« of*
Ex. : They w.,ie ^m^k irnh honor.
llsfurent misU d'horreur.
30 i?br ox,)ro8^c.^ ihe n^.i.vc of a„ ..clion.
Ex; : I wer.l there for ih:,t teuton.
J'allai Id pour cette raiaon.
40 Fr<m, out of , throvgK .o give the mover of an
action, that whi.h .ieeicied th*- agent to act.
Ex. : He no led out offflir.
II a agi par crainte.
HeJcilled him fi-om hatred.
I came here out of lov'o for you.
Je mi8 I, nu id par amour pour voua.
of r ^g^*"°'^ ^*'"' ''""'* "'■" ''''•''"«''«. of the death
Ex. : He died of grief.
11 rtumrtU de douleti/r.
She is sick of palsy.
Elle est malade de paralysie.
orttiSg? ■' "'"'^ '"^ """^"""^ '^' ^•''^'•" ^^" »>«««•>
Ex.: The English aix- descended from the
Stxongt.
l€8 A vgtflvi deicMint de» Saxona.
It6 PRINCIPLES OF ENQLISH GRAMMAR.
Matter, substance.
The name of the suUsUtncu Ciom which a thing is
made is proRiwIeJ in Engli-.h by from, of, or with.
Ex. : PaptT is jna>l'' from rags.
Le papier eat /ait de chij^ons.
HouseH are built with Mt les.
Les maisona aont hdti* h pierre.
N. B. — In such cnscsi, whfti iht orb in not ex-
pressed, the Englifb have a 8|H»«i: ( uitstruction : they
take the name of '.be sub lunc^ an :\< idjoctive and
place it before the noun.
Ex. : A hat of straw.
A straw hut.
l/n chapeau de paille.
A FEW HOTES Oil SOME FRENCH PBS-
POSITKmg.
Me i8 wrMttg.
" il" placed between to be and a verb in the infini-
tive mood to express an occupation is not translated
into English ; the impeifect participle is used alone.
Ex. : He is writing.
II eat d derive.
By the trace, we know the beast.
" A " ust'd to express a distinctive sign, a particu-
larity, is translated by by.
Ex. : By the trace, we know the beast.
A la piste, on connait VaniTnal.
A FIW NOng ON MOMC rSENCH I'BIPOSITIOIIS. 177
By his eoiihtf, arue, wo huw that he was
•ick.
A 8a fgvre, vous times qu'il Aait ma-
lade.
If we coHHder tlie thing, he did weU.
"il" followed by ».. H.fi„iHvp has somefimes the
meaning of « j when so, ii is translated by if ov in.
Banning the senion,-.., i^ is tra„slale I by if.
Ex. : If we e. r sidi-r the thir,^, he .lid well.
A conaid^rer U chose, il a lien agi.
In tho body of the s.-ntonce, we u,e in with the
imperfect participle.
Ex. : There is dan^r,.,. i„ 4,f,i„g ihe,.y,
Ilyadu danger d alter Id.
Be arrivefl tremU^g.
" Fn "followed by the impeif.ct partieiple is not
translated into Enjjli.h, or :m translated by whilst
wnen, as. -f *
Ex.: Hearriv.d 'leniblinif.
II arriva en tremblant.
" En "followed by a noan to express manner is
translated by like or as.
Ex. ; She lives as a queen.
Elle vit en nime.
He behaves like a gentleman.
H 86 conduit en gentilhomme.
Mining transition from one place to another,
178
PBIN0IPLI8 OP INQLISB QRAMIIAB.
fromrone timo to nnorher, en ought to be trMsUted
by to.
Kx. : From place lo pinco.
De place en place.
From day to day.
De jour en jour.
He did it in apite of me.
The fiiiglish language has two words to translate
. the French pri'position malgri] they sire : in spite of
and nottpithatandinff.
In spite of ir» used for portions.
Ix. : He went there in spile of his brother.
11 est alU Id malgri aonfrire.^
He did it in spite of me.
II Va fait malgri moi.
Notwithstanding, with iho name of a thing.
Ex. : He siiecoeded notwithstanding the diffi-
<Mil(y of the cause.
II a riaasi malgN la diffi,cul{4 de la
cause.
He l» HtttHed to represent hie brother.
Pour with uii infinitive is generally translated
by to.
Ex. : Ho i« named to represent his brother.
II est nommipour repi'^enier ton frire.
When pour has the moaning ofparceaue^ it is trans-
lated hyfor with thie im^ifect participle.
A flW If OTIS ON SOMI rtXNOH PlIIPOtlTIOirs. 179
Ex. : He wu» haiged for killing hin rieigbbour.
n fut pendu pour avoir tu4 ton voirin.
althotufh
Ex. : ThdagK lie in not well, ho doto^
plain.
Pour n'itre paabun, il ne aeplaint
Pourpeu que, if. . . .eil^'io little.
Ex. : If yoa work ever so little.
not com-
pa8.
Pou
r peu que ifeti» it>availliez.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
PARTICULAR SYNTAX.
m^
OF THE NOUN.
A fortune-ieller.
In Enijlish, nouns, m well us adjectives, may qualify
other nouns, and so, form a gi-eat numboi of compound
words.
In comiwnnd noune, tho second w .i.J U almost
always the pi inci|.al term ; the first o:.o is a simole
qnaiifieaiive. *
Thus, from the words fortune and tell^, we may
form fortune teller, un dimtr de bcnne oventure. Here
teller, which is the ])rinci|>ul woid, iis qualified by
fortune. "^
N. 5. —Instead of bein^' u noun, tho rirt term may
also be an adjectice, a verb, an adverb or a prepotition.
Ex.: loan adjfc ive : A red-brea»t, un roug f gorge.
2= a verb: A pick-pocket, un filou.
H" an adverb; Aforethought, nnt prucioiet.
4° a preposition : An afternoon, wne aprit-midi.
Like noun8, adjectives may be compound.
Ex. ! Pitch-Jark, n,ir comtm la poix.
Heari-rei.diug, dn-hiraut, trisU.
, ,0f TBI KOON. ^ IfJ
Accordinif lo the i ole i;iven at the begiofiing of thi.
grammar, the adjective is placed before the noun
which It qualiflee ; in ihe following cases it is placed
«i.V:^^t" ***^'"" '^'''■*''* ''^P*'"^ »" »*»• adjeoUye,
that is, when the adjective Ikim u coraplement.
Ex. : A man cont«ciuiiK of right.
Un homme qui a conadence du hien.
20 When the udjective oxp.es.se. a quality which
completes the significjitioii ol the verb.
Ex. : Viitue renders life happy.
* La vertu rend la vie heureuae.
30 Wlien thim the adjoct.vo would give more
etrength to the Miueiice or would be more distinotiw.
Ex. : Goodiic>8 infinite.
La bonti imfinie.
Ho had H voice deep, sonorous and iupres-
sive.
II avait une voix grave, aoTwre et
impressionnanU.
K 5.— In such in^tance8 the adjective may be oon-
sidered as being attribute to a proposition, theidbject
and the verb of which are nnderstood.
E^. : He had a voice which wa« deep, son«row
etc.
40 When an adverb precedes the adjective.
Ex. : A man extremely wIm.
Unh(»mne mtrinumtnt mue.
'V'
lit
■ M
i (-.
1
^
<s
k
^^
s^
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-S)
/>
1.0
I.I
lit |2£
!* 140
12.2
n
'/
^^H^HL
150mm
APPLIED jS IM^GE . Inc
^^B 1853 East Main StTMt
.«= '- RochMtar, NY 14009 USA
.^^^S Ptwna: 716/4824)300
•^=r.a=B Fax: 716/208-5069
e 1903. ApplM Imm*. mc. AD ngMt RMwvad
^
^•^
<>
4<{^
''V
4(!^ >^
o^
II'
182 PUMOIPLn 0» UfOLItH OKAmUB.
60 In some French ezpreMiont, soch u : The Prin-
ceu Bm/aX, the qiuen regnant, a notary public, etc., etc.
THE ATTRIBUTE
The attribute is connected to the noun by the verb
to be.
Ex. :' This man is good.
Cet homme est hon.
In English, the'rerb to be m willed the copula. In
most cases, this verb affirms or indicates the con-
neotion between the subject and the uttribute.
When the attribute is a noun, it may exprc^ three
things.
!• Class: This man is a murderer.
Cet homme est un msurtrier.
20 Identity: This man is the murderer of my
brother.
Cet homme est le m^uHriei de mon
frire.
30 Name: The cAild was named Peter. •
L'^nfant/utappeUPUrre.
Sometimes the verb to ft« is used to express mere
existence without any other attribute ; then the verb
to be comprehend* both the verb and the Attribute.'
Ex. : God is. That is : God is being.
Dieuestt eatiste.
JKi?^Theconjunction«#maybeempIoyed,inHtead
of the verb tp be, to exprens the e<>D«cUon between
the attribate tad the word to whieh itreftrs
PAinOULAB RDLU Off TBI OBnmn ARnOLS "thi",188
Ex. : We engaged her as a, governen.
Ifoua Vengagedmea commt gimvernanU,
The direct attribute is that which relates to the
Bubject
Ex. : My fuihor is a blacksmith.
Mon pire estforgeron.
The indirect attribute is iho one which rotates
to the direct object
Ex. : They elected him president
Il» Vilirent pririderU.
The indefinite attribute does not relate to any
particular sabject, it is used in inrf^rt« «oitenc«».
Ex.: To be good is to be happy.
Eire bon, (feat Stre hvureux.
PARTICULAR RULRg ON THE DEFIRITI
ARnOUE << THE ".
The definite article the is a word used before
nouns to limit their signification.
Therefore, this article should not be employed
before nouns taken in a general sense, but only before
those nouns whose meaning Is limited by a restriotioA
of time, place, person, cause or origin.
The definite article is not used before :
1» Abstract nouns taken in their widest sense.
Ex. : Virtue is lovely.
La veiiu eat aimdbU.
20 Names of arts, sciences used in ageneral manner,
18* nmoiFLU of uroLira aiAioui.
l^ philo»phU tat diffieiu:
So KanoM of raJMUooM.
B». : Gold is precious.
• Water is necessary.
L'Mkmt n^emaire,
*• Man and temim osisd in j^eneral.
B«. : Mail it a fUleri'^. • ' '
WoAiHstirt consort ifiiUil*
> Plural noun, hairing „o determinaUve comple-
^" ™?**^.«^P^fmiR«l?n they are good.
/^ ain« son* |)rAi«H« ^uandifeson*
Good booln are oss^K'' '
^^nouns denoUngaspecies and having no
'»r-,f-«,, I.:-;.,
Bx.: DogI f re yigilayt.
Horses are usiftfai.
I'M cftwtttw iinii <if)UM
PAETICOLAa A0LI8 ON TBI DBPflf ITR AATICLI «'THl" 185
Bx. : Kiiiif RUir»rd, Queen Vi«ioH«.
U roi £douar<i, fa reine Vietoi-ia.
Cape Toiii mcMte, Ijj.ke St. John.
le cap TourmenU, le lac St. Jean.
, 80 Imperfect partifiipU* UH«d a, .,on««.
Bx. : Fiwting fortifiei* ihe ho«|.
l^Mne/ortiJU Vdme.
9» Adjectives desiguiai; volourH.
Bx. : Black absorbe beat, white iopei8 it.
It noir ab$orbe la chal§ttr, U Uanc la
repou$ae.
W Befoi-e collcrUTc noans taken abnti-actiToIy.
Ex. : AriHtoirracy in a loim of goveinmeut.
L'arutocratie est une forme de gouver.
nemetU. ;
!!• Namo8ofMoa80M«.
Bx. : Spring m pieutMDt.
■^ printempaest agr^ble.
inl^J^A ''**r*'* ''^*' ***'"^' '^«*'^' ^'^ P»^nt-
ing the Idea of a dwelling.
Bx. s Chrirt went to bell.
l>e C^rid alia aux en/ere.
Bx. : America was diaoover»>d by CoJarobaa in
^'4f»Mri^ fui dSoouverU par CoUnhb
en 102,
IW FtmofPLu or' inolisb grammar.
. Comica bolorign to Franco.
la Corn appariient d la France,
il^A — We ooght lo eicept the Crimea, la CrihUe ;
the Mor«a, la Morie; the Hague, la Haye, etc.
140 The adjectivei/Hwr, brave, old, little and young,
when they are followed by a proper noan.
Ex. : Old John, poor Poter, brave TJ>oma8.
Le ijieux Jean, le pauvre Pierre, U
9mti0 Thomae.
»o Some words which are much employed, such
M, ehtrch, school, land, market, sea, table, toum, peace
WW, are not generally accompanied by the article,'
when they are objecto to a preposition.
Bx. : . We are going to church, lo school, to
market
JVbw aUona d Viglise, d VicoU, au mar-
chS,
They are at peace, at war.
lU aont en paix, en guerre.
My parents are at sea.
Mee parents eont en mer.
160 The adjectives next and last, followed by a
noun ezpreesiog time, do not take the article.
Bx. : Last week, next year, next month.
la aemaine demUre, Vann4e prockaine,
l« moia proehain.
a5ie definite article « the » obght to bo a«ed before :
1* Abetraot noons, when thffy are limited. '
»AlII0UtAl«uiU0!ITiniDlfIKinAmtICLl«THl" 187
Bx.: The Tiptoe of Peter.
La verhi de JHerr$,
The glory of Napoleon.
la glovn de NapoUon.
Bx.: ThegoldofOsliforoia.
I'or de CaU/omie.
The bread which we have here.
^ pain. qu4 vioua avons id.
^-.Singular noun, used in general to repre-enf
B».: The cat, the dog, the hare.
It chat, Uchien, Uliivre.
The horse is the companion of man.
l^jf'^ ea U eampagmm de Vhamme.
tlie Jit^^ftrr'^"-"'^" l.n«odto.pre.„t
B».: The dance is dangerous.
V La dance est dangemue.
The fast fortifies the soul.
Xe yeiln« /or«/!e Tdroe.
6» Before singular collective noun*.
Bx.: The mob is unsteady.
^ >bufo ese ineonetante.
The aristdcracy of New-York.
L*ariatocratie de Ifew^Tork
a whofr"'"'^"* • "^ • "^^^^ -^ '*»« P«rt of
188 MWOffLM or INQLIiR OKAMMAB.
Bx. : The Mrth mtoItm aroand Ihe ran.
Xa terre towrw atUour du 9oUil,
The eye ie the liiGs of the co«iit«»«noe.
mud the cardinal poinU tdce the, article.
Kx. : Con«der how the eeaMn. follow each
other.
Conaid4r€z comme U» taUom m sue
eident.
The cardinal winde, the cardinal poinUi.
l^ wnit cardinaux, Us pointt oar-
dinaux,
ihT ^T** ""^ "•*^"* •" **»• •'"«"'««• ^o not lake
the article, except, when they are limited.
Bx.: The winter of 1900 wa» a hard one.
rhiver d€l900d4U rigoureiue.
Winter is the season of colds.
X'Awer eU la taiton det rkuTms.
90 When the cardinal points, used in the singnhu-,
aw considered as coantrie. or parts of a coontiy
they take the article. wunwy,
Ex. : Last year, we spent the sammer in the
north, this yeiir we will lire in the
Boath.
L'ann^ demiire, now avom pcu94 ViU
<*««• Xe nord, cttu anfUe nous de-
^^^m^fPl^ih^.b^,^^ «il teethe
Ex... Mi«U,d^.„«„^-
ai.: Tmi. orth. i,»ti ijii,
Sight or. the iiff^t, /d «wi
Ex.: The (ii,,adinn» ar* Jrji^^, ,
J5 Koon. rep.«e«tl„g .«.« .„, Hve« uke the
Bx.: The Saint Lawrence.
Shec4iU««ti*peewf«
IM
ntmnwLMB aw uroLin y^in gn
li
i
16» TIU« coonacUKl to .proper noon by Ui« bn.
position <^, uk« the artide. / "• P«^
Bx.: TheDnkeofCLrenoe.
Thecpe of Good Hope.
LecaptU Bonnt-Eap&anot.
ITo Tbejmme thing moet4>e ^\d when an odjaotiye
preoedeethennmeortbetiHo. .
Ex. : Gen^eral BobertM.
le g^h&al Roberts.
The prudent General Boherl«.
^pr^MUntg^n&alJlohertt,
180 The. word! mpercr, mprus. j^rinem, camUeu.
DMOre proper noons, may tal^e the arUcle.
Ex.: The Emperor Napoleon
X'«mjMfVttr l^apoUon.
19» Plaral coileotlve nonnt presenting the idea of
» ooirection of persons, arts, sciences, virtue, and
▼Joe. m.y take the article.
Ex : The patriarchs fed goAts. '
LetpoMofrehn devaierU dea Oivrea.
The art. and science, were then in their
cwlle.
Lea arte St lea acieneea Oaient alora au
bereeau.
Th€ pMioeopher andpoei.
men two or more nouns oonned^l by «uf Mrve
«^to de«a,be one pe«on, the arUcIe i. not
MDMimAL ADAOtingi. |9j
^ pKilomphe ei poett.
If the noiiriK loru.w.f,.,! by /mrf ,.«n..«w««. j-* .
Z. pfnlo^pf,, ,t U jH^e furent bannu.
artilT •" •**'''*''^*"' ' ^" H^muimcM, with one
article, jOH. ...eon-l.tunt ,u„ni«. ,, a p,..;,, „,„„""
Ex. : The old u..d „ew meih<HlH.
X Winii. n»*/«,d, e< ^ nouveUe.
Tho Old «nd Now Testament..
'"'""^AL AWIOTIVIS.
The hundred., &» tf#ii<ai,i«g.
JS'L'I^™*?* '*»>^/«««A,;fM etc., may b.
Bx.: Thelwohalreeofawhole.
The two thirds, the four fifths.
^'^**^». ^ 9t*atre cinquihnsi.
'^ 1^ live ehapters.
When a cardin.1 naaber i. uBed with one pf the
Ill
I I
pmta Mbr« th* eardiiuU nombar.
>>•: Tbe flnt six booki.
^ »im prmnUn livTM,
Tht iMt five obApUn.
* Z«f einf d«mi§r§ diapUret,
Tbe n«xt Ave wmJch.
^ einq jtroehaine* 9etnainM,
.•.•^"i?""^® count time, (he English laogaaM hM
tb« ibUowing term* : o •» «—
O^«<0cA, which meanR ths hour of iho oloek.
Mimrt which deiioiea duratio{i.
Bz. : It in MX o'clock.
Iletiaix heuret.
Tbat ii : the tiook maikH six.
It takes six hoars to do that
II fatU n^; heurca jpour fain oda.
That h : It lakes u time six hours long io do th«l.
ENGLISH EXPRESSIONS WITH THEIR
EQUIVALENTS.
It is half past six t
" a quarter past Ave ;
twsatj miantrs pant four \
tWMlj-flvs minutes to
ftrar;
a qmartar to siglit %
M
M
" fwtre Aturm moiiu
'• huithettrtM mtbu un
MMMnnuviTB Aoraonnt.
niMomiTiATnn AiMionvif.
198
/I0MI eMM to vMl yMi IM. WM*.
At MM in the defloition of demopttntire «dj«e*
tiTM, thii and theu rtfer lo the neareet peraoD or
thing ; that, tho$e, to the movt dittoot.
The distinction it the ume when theee adjeetiTet
MO applied to time. 80, tM* and the$e will repreaent
a time ^egw and ..till lunting ; that and thote, a tima
paet 6r to oome.
Ex. : I will come to Tinit you thia week.
Je viendrai vou» voir eette amaine.
My father lived fifty yean ago ; at that
lime, there were great diatarbancea In
the country.
Mon pin vivait il y a 50 aiu; en ce
temp».ld il y avait de granda irou-
bU* daru le pays.
You will come with me ; next week ai
that time you will be well.
Voua viendm avee nwi ; la amaine
proehaine en ee tempe-ld voua aerez
6ten.
iV: A— The personal pronoun them inuRt neyer ba
••d aa an adjective inaUad oJ those, ihJH error it
eommon and vulgnr.
Bx. : Where did yon tuke them booka ?
Where diU you tuke those books ?
Oik avez-voua prie cea livrea t
i|i
ill
1»* PWNCIPLM OP MHQU6B ORAMJIA*.
ne thai t^u^ie» i» t,„re to succeed.
celles, used .n general and followed by he rela«^
which are ,.ot used l« represenl pei^^ouH/TheyoZTt'
to bo translalod by A* <V /A*./ T* i ^"Y ^
subject*.. ' ^' '^'''^' '^''*'" '^'^y are
Ex. : He that Ktudie8 is ..uo tq Hucoeed
Celui qui Hudie «.< «i,. ^e r^sir.
She who loves her son puHi„he« him, when
netret*: my.
CeUequi aime son fih U imnit, qumd
c-^t niceamire.
When, instead of bvioir subieiis /.*;«.• . n
ee«« ^0^ object, they are trunalated by A.;,,.,;
Ex. : Death is the comforter of him whom time
cannot oonsole.
^ ^ ^ la c<m9oUUrice de cdui que
^ten^panep^ateonaoler:
We will reward those who work well,
^otw T^conpenserona ceux qui tra~
itcdUent bien.
iO.-.lo If iho sense is limited to a particular
iS^w; *" """! ^'"^"•' '^~« Pi-onouns are trans'
l«ted by tl^ one, that one, the ones, those ones, tkoT
Ex. : I wJUgi^e the book to the one who work.
Je donnerai U Um d cdui qui travailU
w miewe.
DfMOMSTKATIYX ADJICTIVI8. 195
I will panish tliose who do not work.
Je punirai ceux qui ne travaiUent pas.
2o Pollowod by qui or que, and representing thinga,
celui^ celle, ceux, celtea are translated by the one, the
mee.
Ex. : This book is the one you lent me yesterday.
Ce livre est celui que vous m'avez prit6
hier.
3o When these pronouns represent por.son8, we may
replace them by (he noun ^hich they ^present.
Ex. : I know the man whom you blame.
Je connate celui que vaue hldmez.
I know the person whom ypa met.
Je connate ceUe gu« voue avez rencontrie,
4» The ai.teceUont of tho pronoan isoAen under-
stood.
Ex. : Who works is sure to succeed.
Celui qui travaille eat sdr de r^umr.
Here are Ftterand JPtoitf ; thelaUeriamy brother,
the former my couein.
The latter, the former, may represent persons or
things.
The latter translatoij celui-ei, celle-ci, etc ... ,
The former translates celui-lik, eelle-U^ etc.
Ex. : Here are Peter and Pnul ; the latter is my
brother, the former, my coanin.
Voki Pierre et Paul ; celui-ei eet mon
frire, celui-ld, mon couHn,
' 1il
IW WWC.K.M OF tKOLWH QEAJUIAB.
I>ff?:r^NUchel,»nd a b«:^j the Utter
?pn.to.n« my violin, .ho former. „J
cornet. ' ^
ought to b. ,r*„,.|.iea 6; rtl.W « ' ^ "^ "»""•
*»»t to bo i.o.iJ«| in oni.r i« i. • ""^^V
OBMOMSTrAtlTl ADJICTIVM. 19-7
Ex. : Here i. the churck, tkere is the oity-hall.
Void Valise et wnld VkdUUdt-viOe,
I F(w/d is somelimos translated by muh.
Bx.: To suffer and die, such is the condition of
man.
Souffrir et mouHr, voiM la condUian
. de I'homme. "
Bx.,: He is coming.
Void qu'il vient.
They speak to mc.
Vrnld qu'on me parle.
^ted by heremd there,.y^hich a.., always placed at the
beginning of the sentence. «awiiie
Bx. : Here I am, there he is.
Me void, le voild.
Hero he comes, there he goes.
le void qui vient, le vmld qui pasie.
a* When the French verb is titinslated by a com-
pound verb, the sentence will begin with the pre-
pojition of the compound verb, and kv6id,levdlh
will not bo translated. -
Ex.: Up he goes, down he goes.
I^^ci qui mmte,U void qui ducMid,
i98 PBINOIPLM OF KN0LI8H OBAMMAB.
POSSEflSIVB ADJlonVlS.
inl.7 1*" **"* ^'"'"''^ '""*-'"«^" "'•^ the article
instead of « poB..c«.ivo adjective. Thi. con.traoUon
« not common i. English ; the relation existing
between the ,K>««e.^or and the .hing po«ee«ed most
1::/" ^ ""^r y ^^P'-^*"*"**- Hence different rules
fo*- ^-e translation of »hi8 Fren, h ariide.
A cannon-baU took off his leg.
»^ .r t' ^°'^ "•"''*'*' ^'^^^'-^ "«""« represenUng
parts of the body or fitcnIUes of the mind if each
nouns refer to the .ubjoct or to the indirect oi^T
Ex.: He lo«t his life in ihiH buttle.
II perdU la vie dans cetti hataiUe.
The carriage » over my body.
LavoUure ty«„ , .^aa ^r le wrpa.
A cannon-ball took off his leg.
Un boulet lui emporta la jambe.
^^rJ^^ objft poe«e«sed belongs to the direct
object of the verb, we iise the.
Ex.; She took her brother by the arm.
EUe prit son frire par U bras.
Ifi£. — ln this last caso, we may take awnv tK«
preposition by, and use anoier con«Ction! ^
Ex. : She took her bituher's arm.
EUe prU son frirepar U bras.
He took my arm.
H me prU par le bras
P088188IV1 ADJlOTIVfg. 199
Several permfns loH their livet.
In French, the name of the thing possessed m
•poken of, considered separately.
Bx. : Several persons lost their lives.
PluMeur8 pertonnea perdirent la vie,
hLr"* ''"' ^'^^ ^*'*"'' ^^ ^° **»•»'•
lie aortirent le chapeau mr la Ute.
TMe home is ours.
The French personal pronouns d mot A toi A lui a
Bx. : This house is oars.
Cette maison est d nous.
This watch is mine.
Oette montre est d moi,
bjL'^t^ Ik"''"'** ""^ ""^ '"P^oy ^J»e verb to
««aV with the personal pronouns.
Ex.: This house belongs to us.
C^^^maitoneetdnoue.
iiV .
P!|
tS,l
2W PWK0IPL18 or IKGLISff OBAIUUE.
Bx. : Yon wy this man w generous, however
he never give, ahythiiigof hie own.
Voua ditet que cet hmmt e»t ffMrewt, ce.
pendant il ne donne jamais rien d* aien,
Jm7^l!^ f- **"r' '^""" '" ^-^Prownt persons.'
^m«w. lesuem, Ub siens, are translated by the
po—ive adjective, followed by a noun pro^r to
the meaning of the senteooe. pniper lo
&. :' IJobody is a prophet among his own people.
I'trsmne n'ett prophite parmi lee mens.
^iL^"^ '**"'** *** '^•" ^^»^« the pronoun the
proper poseessivo adjective.
Bx.: One is not always master of one's own
temper.
• On n*eat pa^ toujours mattre de eon caractire.
n Jnf^^^'^'f • ^'■*^' *"''"''^" ™«»*^ ^ P»W to the
M«ofthe reflected pronoun.
Bx. : One dreesee one's self with one's clothes.
On e'habiUe avec see habits.
brU-l/f n""/* l"^'''"^ Pronoon ««• is translated
'"J ''1^ 9 self or Itself .
«n« representing persons.
Ex.: One most be thrifty to one's self.
r#^* u **' *^* A»iwm« pour mi.
irtrf/, when theiriyictroproaents things.
'.r.- '£'mmtiMIHrik'f^ ii'^oL''^'-^ ■■'■
'1',
201
u-:
w-' ^''^^^•■•^•/^"ttke.-
Whon the thing poi8«M«i i.«i""; .:" • ■'•''-
oft*** ^ie of with a wiM^i^ l*Si *^' "**""' ^«
-traction is alw.^ T«r ?. ^"i;^"- ^'»» ««»■
-ytog: ^ P'-eferable. Tha.. inste«l of
.One of Dijr books,
we say:
tTkdemealivres.
mis oonstmotion is also oMd —•♦k '
' _i> >i, .i > ./?,?" '*■*** With noansi
> la i/..r^ " "^^^^ {«.?;«« A. ^
»■ in an enaniM^tion, tlif i)OMMirf.i'.j* ;: .
'^^ ' "u.l'S '"■• ^'^' ■»»*.' «4 rt.^r ta
pwce me relatiTe pronoan Immedla^
S02
PAIMOIPLM OF BMOLISH OBAmUB.
•fter iU Mteeedent ; the relation of theie two words
to eftoh other most alwayii be clearly ezpreMed.
Ex. : He boai^ht for bis son a carriage that was
black.
Ilachetapcwaonfilf une voiture qui itait
noire.
Consequently it would jiot bo good to say :
He bought a carriage, for his son, that
Y^as black.
// aeheta une voiture, pour son file, qui UcUt
noire.
Be tpQke of the mem and the ^ing* thai he
hatleeen.
In some cases it Is impossible to use icJb or which :
inch IS the case when the relative pronoun has two
uteoedents, one masculine or feminine, and the
other neuter. That Is the relative used in such
instances.
Ex. .' He spoke of the men and the things that
he had seen.
n parla des-hommes et dee chosea quUi avait
In the foregoing example, men being masculine
would «H,uire trAom, thinge being neuter would ro-
htTo that, which may represent the two antecedents
at the same timoi '
ThatiM%\to pr«fentble innhe following cases :
10 Whtoafteranadjeollvein the superlative degree,
> «
the relative pronoun is aM*d lo i„»,^
propoiiiion. ^"^ inlrodaoe a modifying
^'",?*,7;^''««-t that went oat.
^< /«/ le premier qui aortit,
2» In Nomo vuhch, after th« «^: *■
•xplain it« meaning. "^^J*""^* *"««, to
Ex. : He \h tho 8«mo man that ,r«„
day. " ^**° "^^ ywter.
^ After «,^ „,ed «« an antecedent
Ex.:Wj,othat,ov.hi«,o«nt^,,,„^^^^
Qttel est celui qui. aimnnf .^
^^^ ^ y«i, amant son pays, nUra pas
I , *"/ft«'- an antecedent introduced Jn»n »k
kj the impc^nal forms it CZlX '"''"'"
I Kx.: It is you that speaJc.
C^«« votM quiparlez.
It waa I that did it. *
(^ntmoi qui tai fait.
I '^^"^•no^^'nalltheeaaeafnwKs u l
Y^hc or .rA;cA is doubtfur^ »heproprietj
Kx.: The child that eriea.
I i
9iu
•W» PUlfOirLIf 0» KMOLISB QBAIUUB.
Ex.: Yon will read tho boolu (which) yott
bobght.
Vans lirez let Uvres que wnu avez aehetis.
Bow •haU 1 puni0h whom you eouM not punith t
W« Mw precodontly that the aDtvcodeot of the
relative snbject in sometimes andersiood, it is the
aame with the relative object.
Ex. : How shall I punish whom you could not
prniinh ?
Comment punirai-je celui que vous n'avez pat
pu punir t
J^. B. — His, her, etc., etc., being equivalent to of
Mm, of her, arosomeiimos used ti8 the antecedent of
a relative pronoun.
Ex. : Receive with gratitude hi8 advices who
loves you.
Becevez avec reconnaissance les avis 4e celui
qui vous aime.
The man whom wtUch you have,
1« Whose, dont, de qui denotes possessioD • it
represents personi^. '
Ex. : The man whose watch you have.
L'homme dont vous avez la montre,
20 In French, dont, de qui, may also be used as in-
direct objects to a verb ; they are translated by of
wham for persons, of which for things.
Ex. : The man of whom I speak.
Jj'homme dont je parte.
The ctime of which 1 aceoae you.
ie crime dont je vous accuse.
EBLATITI paoNnuifs. 20J
J?. J. -.Instead of of , the verb wantn MmeUmw
another preposition.
Bx. : The mun ut whom I laugh.
L'homme dontje rit.
The house the waUa of which faU,
Doni, denoting powKJwion and repicwnting thinw
most be translated by of which, • »
Ex. : The bouse the wall» of which fall.
La maistm <tont lea mws tombent. '
N, A - lo Of which .MUM b« preceded by the name
of the thing pfH.8c.88<Hj with Ihe detii.ite article the.
2o Whose in somotiinoH UHed innioud of of which,
Ex.: A rehj^ion whowe oii^rj,, is jiyip^
Une religion dont I'origine est divine.
The man that you apeak of,
^^Mt, being masculine, feminine tiud neater mav
represent persons or things, bat it cannot b^ the
W)j«ot of a prepositiori, except if this preposition is
placed at the end of the sentence.
Ex. : The man that you speak of.
L'honime dont vous peu^lez.
The woman that you laugh at.
La femme dont vous riez.
The tneetiuff who were divided.
With a collective antecedent, we use who wh«i the
collective denote plurality.
Ex' : The meeting who were diyidfd.
L'disemblie qui itait diviaie. '
*«« niifoinn or molini oiiinut.
Which & u.^ when ,be .oILclvo do,.of« ooUj.
«*.: Tb«»ne,tlntf which w«M oimnimou..
Xi^omme (font fe courage protige la vertu.
A« majr be M«n by the foiwoinir exAmnU 4k
Bvlidi by » po»«aive adjective. Saoh i. alw««
tfci CM* when the direct object reprewnU . tW^
bdongwi. to the antecedent ^hcu ^*"^
Bx. : We alwayi admire those men whoee Yirtno
overcome, their tempUtiont.
JV&w adiniroM taujoHri U» hmmes dmt la
, tfertu sttrmonte let testations.
Wben the direct object does not renr^nt . ♦!.•
beloBging to the antebed#nt^ Jl ^preeent a thing
inite Stifle M in FJ!;:ct "^^ ""' "** *"* ^•^-
Bx. : We «Jmire thoee per^n. who«, virtae
was the sdmiration of all men.
.J^(ma<inirons ceapersomiee dont la vertu a
Jmt fadmiration de tout lee hmnm.
ir.£.^W. studied, in the first part of thi»
««minar, the rule, concerning the tniJTlation of!!.
MLATIVB PROMOL'N*. 207
M ee 91M by u,hich ....i ^hnt ; Ut o. ^y that wKat
Bx. • Who »t«al. my pa««, ,te.|« th.t which
iM asufal to me.
Celui qui me vote ma Ooune, '. vole te gui
« e»f utile. *"•
ITha* fruits we had were taken away.
tllln r """• ^^ ""'•*' '•"^^^ '^ *• considerwl
Bx. : What fra.to we had were taken away.
Tou9 let fruits que turn avions nous furent
enlev4s>
for^e^rj?Jl^K* "*"""'*'• ""^^ •« sometimes used
for persons with the meaning of any.,, .who.
Bx.; What man bat onte« dies.
Tout homme qui entre meurt.
Thati«: Any man who enters dies.
ofUll^^l^^ ""^''^ '' «*"*™"^ - conjunction
or « adverb, is sometimes used as a relative pttx
Bx. : The Lord added to the Church daily such
OB should be saved.
.«? .*^? **^^^*' '^^ *>" *^« "•'"•J°g of '*«• or
eeux, and «« means qui.
U Seigneur aj&utait tous les jours d VBglis^
«*w jK« devaient itre sauv4s.
M
i' !
I' 1
Hi
208 PRINCIPLES OF KNGLISB QRAMMAB.
3o Qui.. :. qui ropemcd in Prcnch is translattd bv
Ex. : iTioy all hail 'something, some Iheir books,
some their pons and pencils.
th avaient toui quelque chose, quiteura livresf
qui leurs plvmcs et ieuti crayons.
40 Tanipar....que i« tr-anslated' by what with re-
pea ted •
Ex.: What with hiK drunkenness, what with his
idlenet*, biH family was in poverty.
Tant par son ivrognene que parsa paresse,
sa famine itait dans In pauvreti.
OOVJUNOTIVZ ADVi^Ulg:
!rhe conjunctive adverb is mticK mbr<S iiriiployed in
English than in French. The English Itfftguage likes
to connect sentences with those adverbs' which are
equivalent to a conjunetion and an adverb:
Ex. : I will wait for you till ten, when I will
start.
Je vousatiendraijusqu'iidix hewres, et alors
Je pariiif^di:
»i>K uhiii is v^Htiii^ii otakH tJi^:
tn like manner where is equivalent to (W tf^re.
Ex. : I win go to Quebec wherp I wilj visit you.
>nrai 6 QiUlfee et tH je wnuvisiterai.
.^V^-.~''^' it is question of words used to connect
•Bijlences. let us say that tlie relieve p^noun
W^^ fejf i^ i" f *:*"5!^' «^»^»y translated
inio :fingl,8li by the impei-ll'wt^ partfc'ipte.
Ex.
COUPOUSD R1L.TIV. PWNOONS. 209
I give yon the j>rp«fH showing the truth of
What I say.
vtriUdecequeJedis.
Whoever works wiU tmeeeed
Bij^aincaiion , and, us some iruiifml >«••». „., u
Ex. : Whoever works, wiU. Huec.«ed.
§iuicongue travaUle rtmirt *
Thatis: Any person who work, will succeed. '
a ve&SS '^^'l^ P'--- fBthesuhjectof
^' ' i^'i?''' ^''""•^^-^••yoa will puniBb.
I will complain to whomsoever I will meet.
E». : I reward whoever worJcs.
Je recompense celui qui travaiiu
^ wlr/'^* ^*''' "^^"^ **" whoever, will
Je mmpewerai quieonqve travailkra.
r"i!^
!n
210
PRINOIPLkS OP SNQLISH ORAMUAH.
God lovM a man who prayg, worka and U
virtuous.
It is not neoMwaiy to repent the lelntive pronoun
before several verbs comini?. after une another.
Ex. : God loves a man who prays, works and is
▼irtnouH.
X>ieu aime un homme qui prie, travaille et
est pertveux.
We havfl^a king whom we love, respect
and esteem.
Ifinu avoHs un roi que nom ainuma, reapectons
€t eatimons.
JV.i?. — io The French pronouns ce qui, ce que
«omiDg after fdl, must be translated by that. '
Bx. : We ou;:ht to love all that is reully good
and excellent.
Mus devona aimer tout ce qui est rietlement
ben et excellent.
Nevertheless, examples of the contrary are some-
times to be seen.
Ex. : Tell them all- what I suffer at dying with-
out receiving their last embrace.
(Archibald Alison ; Louis XVI).
Ditetrleur tout ce que souffre en mourant
aana recevoir lew dernier embrassement.
2o What, interrogative, has the meaning of aiwi f
quet quel? quelle t * *
When it is equivalent to quel t quelle t it is an ad-
jeotive expressing nature or quality.
INT«WMH1ATIV« PRONOUlfg, 211
Ex. : What man is this ?
"What book do you want ?
Ex. : What do you want ?
What do you moan ?
30 TOeAf ,«ke„ a« «„ intenogaiive adjective or
Kx.: Which of these men .-.your brother?
Which of ihe.ebook« will you have?
J^'quel de ces livrea voulez-vous avoir r
which ma^t exl^^^^^ f^'^^'' -P^"---
is undemooJ. ^ <>y •»"PP'y. ngr a word which
Ex.: What if I did .peak to him?
^e 8i^(/fe tout cela t
E»-: The 6tal« in which 1,0 is.
212 ^BINOIPLIS or BlIOLiaH GRAMHAB.
Tl|o end at which ^we aim.
Le hut oU'tMui tendons. '
The aflkir 6ri which my fume depends.
, L'affaire (toil (Upend ma ri^utati(M,
The words many, few, littU iire wmetimoe preoeded
Dy a; m sueli ««.s«,m ih.'y ai-e uiken us lioatis.
B}jc. : A gtent many di^cuitfOi*.
f Utile gloi-y, itt.ftw ho^ae-.
Jl t"" '^'T*"* ^^••npJe.', or is always understood
^ the wQt4f> man!,, few, urn, i^[c& may be con-
^^^monmagreatntmber.
^ewMdliuiemeanaUttlenMmber,
JV: A — lo Few i8 used with iioans that may take
the plural form. '
Bk. : Few IViondf*, few booko.
Zittle wiih nounx ihni have no plural.
Ex. : Little ifloiy, ,iti|e virtue.'
20 Many i« much .wed in cH^w^jnop/tion, that is, to
lorm compou.Ki f.oims, adjectivoi und adverbs.
Many-feet (Aub*.), poly^te.
Many-iimes (adv.), souoent.
Many-coloured (adj.), muliicolore.
ManyHwrneicI, polygone.
Muny-flowered, muttijlore,
Many-hottded, qui a plutburs tUet.
•Manifold, en grand nUbre,
JW^ymiW AW«OTIV«g.
318
f^k
■saltan hour.
Slfuttertm/ ?«elto ftotoo- /
««■ = A good m.,,. « TirinoM MMw.
I!
214 PKiNciPLis or maLint otAmuft
Howerer, with too, as, how, to, the indeanito artiole
•hoold bo plaeed immediately before the noun.
Ex. : Too great a love in sometimes dangeroaf.
Uh trop grand amour eat guelquefois dange-
revx. ,
Consider how sad a year I bad to paw.
Voyez quetU triste aiuUe j'ai pau6e.
So good a fruit woald not grow here.
Un «' bon fruit ne viendrait pas ici.
As good a man as we rarely meet with.
Un homme bon eomme nous en voyons rare-
mfnt.
Heiaa devU of a man.
The attribute and the subslaiitivo used by excla-
mation are sometimes followed by another noon
connected to them by of; in such casoo, of is followed
by a or an in the singular.
Ex. : What a rascal of a boy I
(iuel coquin denfant I
He is a devil (rf a man.
(Test un diabie d'honime.
N. B, 1» Sometimes the second noun is an abstract
one expressing a quality of ihe finit noun ; in such
instances of is used alone.
Ex. : What a man of courage I
Quel homme de courage !
20 The same construction Is used with a little^
««cA, nothing, something, somewhat, anything.
Ex. : He is a little of a miser.
11 est un pen ttvare.
216
iwwiifiTi AiTicL. a oa an.
HeiimuchofftUbbJw.
Jl eat bien havard
^ '^ ^ une espice de chetHd.
•rtlde A or AH.
!• Ab Mid before, a is obcH k-/v.
•onnd,anbefo.^arc;wollot * ~"~"*'»»
4lrs;:ire:*.i*::sr^^^
coUeotiTe meaWg •^'" " "*^"'»« •«d have »
^'' Yoahareafewfriepd-.
Tbere were a thoMand mea on theBDot
»».^ Hegowtberetwiceaw^'^'"^^ - -' -
II
pSHff?
if
tl6 raiMoiVLBs or nratim oftAUAB.
He speftkA twice aii hoar.
II parU deua /ojs par Amtw.
4o A is 80inetini«M uihhI before j^Ueiplee in ing^
and before Bohie nduiii*, with t£e lia^a^iUg of la ol or
61. ■''^
Ex. : We bui«t oui a inaghin^.
JVou« iclatdmes de rire.
Wo went ti hunting, a Uehing.
i^oiM cM4me8 d la'ohatm, d la pSehe,
He lies a bed all day.
It teste ail littotU lejour,
60 In some instf nccs adjectiTes are connepted and
express qualities belonging to diiTerent things,
thongh of the same name ; in aoch cases, a rnnat be
repeated belore each adjective.
Ex.: A red and a yellow bird.
Un oiaeau rouge etunjaune.
If the qualities belong to the same noun, a mitsi not
be repeated befdre th^ isdootid udj^y^
Ex. : A red and a yellow bird.
Un oiaeau rou'de eljaune.
60 A must not be used before names of titles, when
they are used me^iy iw sieh.
Sx. : He wae made marquis.
He was named genenii.
ifhen ^e name of the iillo ia«sedjKS4m attrHmtiL
< <K^t to be employed. .'t^> -
'lit.: ^jiamarqais.
' .Wmi'tiia^t^.''
«»ir«,r. «Tie« a o, «^ „,
ftc»l>y of, ho „)„/"'"« " P"" -""■« body „ ,
*•■ ^''••'«» small hVttI ^ ■
^ * Ut Utt pttUe.'
H.ha.»good„„d,„^„„i
OBltt«i. , '"'•JW^ o or OT riunU not t*
218
pftimnpLiB or moLiiH oBAiiMAm.
In this Montonco we oomparo differont qualitios of
the same man.
Bx. : Your |.i-ofcMijor ih a belter teacher thaa
u poot.
Voire pro/esaeur est meilleur mattre
qu'un poUte.
Here we mention Uiiferent men.
A diHatt in her other hand ahe had.
The French adjective autre may bo translated In
different ways :
1» Other, 4hen it means different from that which
haa been speciHed ; not the same ; not identical ; the
•ecood of two.
Ex.: Do you like this book? — I prefer the
other.
'^'i^net'Votueelivret-^Jepfnff^tauh-e.
A diatuff in h(^^ other hand she had.
ElU avait uni qtienouiUe dana ton
atUremaUi.
29 SUe, when signifying something besides (en
plm).
Bx. : W^at else shi^K J give ?.,,,:
Qk«^ aiUrt 0^ donneiixi,Uje f
l>Q.y(^ expeot anythifig eltt r
Stp^reg-^vouB avoir autre dkoH t
p pifferent, when the Fr«iich''adJ^tive expresses
A «hang«> in « person or in a thing. In such oases,
sue is. translated by frmt
. i *•' M
«
«V fUircB AOJioTivi ". Auni ••. 219
^"" ^Wer? "*•''' '^''''•"' '^^» '''»•* you
ObjecU' appear different from what thty
be translated. ^ !^ ^^*' mnat not
^' I'«hmen, cat u great deal of pot..
Jfou, autres, rmnpau, nou^ fnangeana
hearu^yp de pain, vau, autres. /r.
landau, vous, mangez beaucovp d$
pommeede tene,
JL 5r' ''""'*• "**"•""» «"y o<Aer, is tnwalated bv
^^ other or any other. "nuwaioa l)y
Bx.: ^oU,«rmaMw«uW.haredoneit.
Any oiher place than a throne....
iottfc att<r« p/ace i^tt'ttn <rdn«
by ^'««YrJX: """'"«^^^y ^^--^ is translated
Bx.: ^;«q«l^ano*herm.nsinceyoaspoke
Pierre eu Un^j autre depuis que vima
.*>::,'
of tte IHMi '* M, ki ti;W
/Hb 49 (frM i^WBiif «»iMi| (||^ jHTtt ^nuMlAtod Into
mim^hjmmwmifi <• fpeb fM« ibt/ U»it the
MBM ti Ikf word eomiog afUr Ui«m.
» ^0iif Md «i^ atM a «trtoiii qaMtitT of a thine,
but iodatormiial^.
Ex.: I ^f« loni* food brtad.
/"oi in 6ofi jMiin. *.
mM '6tM»io B«mber of ptnont or thingi, tek in.
dottnainaiU^ I ,. j, ,■. ,.
Bz. : I Ikftvo tomo IKonda htr*.
Bm jroa Mjr b^olBi wUh joo ?
< ilMOHNnw di» MvfM a«i0 vou« ;
itOMd:
!• U afflroMti^oMatoDoct.
Bs.: I bavo lomo pou.
•ToiilMliliimM.
2» lo MBtMOM whieh M» both iotorroMtiTo Md
B^gative.
Bx. : Bafe yoa aok jome paoa t
^itBtcd :
1* la iMgatira Maletieet.
Ex. : I did aoifee an^ man.
/« H'ai pot v« <f AomDM.
2o la dabitatiTo peotaaeM.
Bz.: r/lbadanjlhiita.
•* I» 'nl"TogiitlT»i«iii«ieM.
*».! H«T«yo«»ii3rbook«r
^0W en foteK /m/>« et vqm aeret U
Mentwnu.
Hlrpirriw ft open to .nj one.
«»««>•• •limited aignjflctlon.
Bx. : Will yoo have iomo wino f
'^WH^JS^^ **" "<»' *•••? this m.o, h#
. mowrra.
-^ »•■» »MlM Mito »«o*«.
-^ A ^, del, are not
^••""'f^.'-rtc^BnglWiwIien
222
PR1N0IPLI8 or «Kt»LI8H OBAMMAB.
they are used in a general sense to express a custom
a babit or an ennmeration.
Ex. : A book-geller sells hooks.
l^n libraire vend d€8 livrea.
We sell fiuitH, wine, cider and ale.
you8 vendona dea fruita, du vin, du
cidre et de la hitre.
N.B. — ycthing, something aio never followed by
o/in the following sentences and the like.
Nothing good, riendebon.
Sompihing useful, guelque chose d^utile.
Att men, whoever they tnay be, are equal before
*he law,
I' Quel que, in two words, followed by a verb, is
translated by wAoetter or icAafwer.
B». : All men, whoever ihey may be, are equal
before, the law.
Tous lea hommea quehqu'ila aoient aont
tyaux devant la loi.
I do not ftar them, whatever they may be.
Je ne lea eraina p<u, queU qu'Ua aoient
,„i!^.f *T^° 1?* ^"' example, wh^er denotes the
John or Andrew, they are e^ual before the law.
In the second example we consider their qoali-
^•s and so, WB^ffitchatever. I do not fear them,
whatever they may U (athfng, teivked or powerful).
Whatever is aim used ft?r things.
^.V'«,
]l I
3® Qvelque used ns an adverb lw.fi.«^
hcZer. "'*' "^^*'''»- " trantlated by
Ex.: However rich, ihey may be
C«««^ ncA« gu'ite «>i«»J.
However esteemed yoa may be.
However learnedly he may «peak.
•wiHaiy/m^y^ *'/^ **»' P^»*»««^ ^i«» the
•d^;'^""' ""^ «*« -y b. « «lje.H,. „ „ '
224 PBIN0IPLS8 OF BNaLISB ORAMMAB^
■■ ■ ' . ■• • 1 . i • .
1* PIttcod before a nonn to express a comparison,
mime in translated by same and fjuehym.
• Bx. : I have th« same book as you.
J'ai le mime livrfi que voua.
The relative pronoun qui or que coming after mime
is translated by that.
Bx. : He in the 8amo man that came last week.
Ce8t le mime homme qui est venu la
semaine derniire.
Yon are the »ame man that we sawyester^
day.
Voua ^itea le mime homme que nom
avona vu hier.
2o Mhne pla«?ed after a noun or a pronoun may be
equivalent to a i>el!eoted pronoun, it is then translated
bjr the compound personal pronouns. ,
Ex. : Hi« enemies themselves esteem him.
Sea ennemia mSmea VeeHrfunt.
I spcHke to the bby' himself.
J*aipaYU ^Pek/ani hake.
3o Very with the sense of eawc^'tranflatesm&n*
insome'instahVicisi ' ■"•"•^'^'^ ?• 4' •■•■ r;, ,..t,:,.,,
Bx.: ^isirthp very, watch I wanted.
Ceat lai niotUre mime que je v6ulaie.
On th* vei^ ii^oment* pf h1^ |itwi^i|. < -
Au nUhne^t mj^ide ioiicn ' '
That very Oiing which I told'^tf. 'f
4» Mime pfeee<^ b^rt »n i^Ut^ or' b^ «
Jir...
nouD afier an eoamerotion, is taken as an nrf.« k ^
onght to be IhiDBlated by Jren ""** *"*
nobles.
It obmt dee rife*i««, des honneurs, et
i!x • ' ¥fci-; i JL^T^» ^rl™*.**' "nderatood.
^ f«W fe, /emm(» et mSme lea
^"^^^^en iiiiDire the giture of thit
f Qfnor..
cet h^ymme.
A nUme, Qot of.
E».: Pn>k oat of the decanter.
^^^ A ihitneU carafe. i
^?»e7ateotttofthe|K)t.
^ ''^''^^i*^ d mSme U cKaudron.
2?« mHoiPLu 01^ XNaLiaH QtuuauR.
; ^ '^'^ Ifou au th^ bookt I had,
ai^ which IB followed by ibe article or by » detorm^
».t,ye adjecUve. When all i« caken in agTnera^™*"
the article is.not used. • «»>«wn8e,
Ex.: I lent yoa all the books I had
To suffer and d.o, such is the condiUon of
ttll men.
^^fj^ et mouHr, idle eat la So7Mi<m
totelilf of «r^.'"* '?^"""^ ""' repreeenUng the
toUUUy of an <*ject, U translated into English by
Bx. : The whole town waa destroyed.
Tout6 la vUle fut ditruite,
Whofe cities v/ere detitroyed.
3« Tw/, meaning cAa^«e, is translaiod by er^fy.
Ex. : Every morning, every day.
Tou9 lea maiina, tous leajoura, '
Every man is ^pt to fail.
Tout homme eat aujet d faUlir
Ex.: Any water may serve for that
Touteeaupeutaennrdoela.
AnyUiing yoa shall think fit. '
Tauie choae que wms U-ouverez oonve.
nahU, '
TEAMLATION OF THt »Et»OH WORD « TOOt". 227
Anybody but you would „«ke me Uogh.
Ex. : AUer his crime, ho feared eyevyihing.
o -«o«^, tukea us an adverb wiih tK« -.
Ex.: lamwhollyyoare.
•/e «ii« fott< d vous.
-'^ e^ tout d^voui a voire w^^vioe
Jfix. : Saj whatever 70a pliMe:
.•♦■.» ■ . *
Wue M he is.
Though he ia your Mcod.
However |ood he 1M7 be
*rt^ntM.«i,eBUreIy.
Wherever.
■Mf •iV. ippn t^e whele.
••P««Wly, eboVe'wi. -.
^/deK9«Y/e»<.
*•<•¥< *<l»artoii<.
Perietil (eoiweettwy tee •r«M,
^prlmieiil.'
228 nivcinn of bnolish qkamAab.
^^^^ «»^ no Hieh eustoma in tkU cot$mirw.
jLS,r*""? '" ^'^'-^P^^^f or semblable, iB
tranklnted by tueh or like. *
Bx.: TheMareoofcuohciwtonui'inthiscoantry
/« n'jfapaade UUn coutumes dam oe
I never saw the like.
J« rCai jamais rim vu de teL
2« T€l^ followed by fve and expreening a mem-
Wance between two thing, which we impl^t
translated by xtifA «. *^ ' "
Ex. : This stuff is sach as you want.
That .s : Th.. stuff is «uch as the one which you
Want. ''
3- When tei followed by gue expresses a conae-
^hth^ "**' " comparison, «ir A « is replaced by
Bx. : His memory i« such that he never foists
'8a mHnaWt est teUe qu'U n'ouUie
jamais.
iJl i^!i !*P*^»»* -^t* or*" manner c ^ being, ia
translated ty such as, or, more simply, by as.
Ex.: Such as they are, I love them.
Aa th«.y aire,'! lovo them.
Je lee aime UU qu'ils sont,
^w f:1^** "^ ^''^ '*^ wpresiing manner, has
tchat in its eqaivftltaK ia Bugliah.
Bifc: Ton an not what you ihoald ba.
noHovna.
229
when eingulm-, and tL^L,Z u ''^' "^ ""^^
Bx • H«»K J^* "'*^' *'^' ''hw plural.
*^e»-nijg yi^^^^^^ '° — ««on with
jij^ giiBii by 50 w, or, wmetimoe, by
Ex.: Thttthoageissoso.
^<« maiaon est uUe quelle,
Ho is a mean orator
70 r./ ^''^ '''' "^^^r ui quel.
7 r«/, repeated before iwo noii,.« #«
TdUmin, tdUJUU.
280 PtlROIFLU OF BNOLISH OKAMIUI.
Bz. : Who Hpealu 80 r — He.
Qui parle ainai 1 ~ Lui.
That is : he speako so.
Bx. : Whom do you see ? — Her.
Qui voyeZ'Voua ? -. ElU.
That is : I see her.
They live only for themeelvee.
The reflected pronoun wi, applied to persons, is
replaced in French by lui, elie, eux, elles, when used
in a definite manner. In English We reprem>nt it by
the compound pereonal pronouns hitnulf, herself
themselves, •^'
Ex.: They iive only for themselres.
Us ne vivent que pour euae. '
He lirea only for himself.
II nd vit que pour lui.
When the direct obj<Bct e<an aotlTCrtrnf^i^t^ T«rb
la placed at the b^innijig of a eentcnpei the IWneh
'"'fWjWnwWiy naee ip^non^ ]^tptma after the
verb Itf^wj^i-eetot the objAct placed iefore. Saoh a
pleonasm is rarely to be seen in English.
Bx.: Your compaafems I know.
Voa compagnone, je Ue eonnaie.
Your friends I saw Qomiiig back.
Voaamie^jBUsffivusrwenir,
i\C J>a--1« Persona) pronouns used as i8Bl|}eets are
not r^p?rted In Bi^lish, except if tbe yerbs differ in
.mood, tense an^' form.
"UHM^TIOl, or «. tMMcH «»oNOCir " tM.» 281
Bx.: !;•>««» and. I wi„.,^^^^^
Jel €atifM a Veatimerai tovjoura
I we »nd hear him. '
^« i<J vow et Ventenda.
flcL?r„.Ta7of rV""r "^ '^-^' «>^ « -'^ Of
•peaker ia not «i T'"' *^ •""■°^'* ^hat the
Ex.: We Ed^uiM, King of England. « .
Nima Bdowird, roi d'AngUietre
J^Uh thi. pronoun thoy t«e th«'.i„gular compound
»«»«Ution of the rrtndi prowin " LB ".
^mer*? ""•"*""•' *^^^ •**'^ «*•**» *e one.
When fe represent* a noan taken in . .
••«»•, that is, not Jimited by a po^i J" T*'*'
•traUve adjective, we tmn,fa;i ut^^ " "'"■
^.:I.m^n<>tacaptain,butUbou,dKketo
Je ne my pas capUaine, maia fau
inera%a d l'^lr.<i. ^ jau
2* ie is translated bv«o wh«n i, .
Tqii;^ tom^jn, I ibiMiia like to be m.
Vofui iU$ aoldaU, ftiimerdia d Vttf.
They arc brave, you q^bi to be eo.
, lU wnt braves, voua dwei Vitn,
l»flr*^«mAi^, i. trfcnfclated by wfollowed by iiHd^
, Bx.: tfyppwebiefHend.weareeotoo.
S%v^ iita aon ami, novM U tommu
Too were rSdi, yoa ere so Wo longer.
4« A ie ebo oMd to tr»„,Uto le repreeentfir a
whole prcmpeiUoiu . *
»x.: %iwi!i'^e.fc«<,^^i^
We have been langhed at, we perceive it
^^» /»fOM /<^^ rire d» n^U9, nau$ le
& i. rather used with each verbs tm to gum. to
l^i t^mfOH, to think, to wy, to ua, etc.
«x. : Shah he go there ?— I hope so.
Ira^UUldt^JtiVespHi^
Bo they onderstand what I say ? ~ I think
to.
^<»>^prmn9ni>iUc$qH$Jeai8f^Jele
pmai.
Am or it "'"Wltve verb. It in traiuilai«d by
B».: Wo h«v. lost oar book, we will find it.
^love our brother, we admire hi«.
^*^' .«*''»^ ««'»•« Aire, nous I'ad.
tntroTu.
t«»i»pJ»ted with theveV^T/J" T^ Tf *' " "^^
/«ay, Icon, I must ' '' *^''' ^«*«'A /«.i//,
fi»-: 'AroyouBati.ilcdr-I.m
«»n you ^company ua ?- We can.
J'i^uvez.vouB nauBoccompagner l^Nous
*^pouvon8.
7o Lastly, thia pronoun is not translated wh«„
H h used in the eecond n«.^ "'"■'atoa whenever
French. '^'^ ^^'^ » comparison In
Fe «re more tired than yon think.
**■ pensez.
Ho is a. perfect as you may imagine.
The thing fook place as I told yo«
ji . ^ '"^■•? *W^W* «ri(Otta z«
r
JBx.
il;!
i
M
■»■•>/!•>' /
«W PuiremM or iRoLrn qmaumam.
nAXMLATUm or THl HtlirOH
ntoMouir " ur •.
i»xtpi:;::ut "^^ '"""' ^""^"" ^^^^
^' ' Do yon «po,,k of my father ?- Yofc we
fw parUma.
Whilst fool. «bo.o plonKwrw, wise mon tm
«ftem in modi'iation.
Pe»ic/an< que leafouB ubusent de» plai-
«r8, tea aagea en vaent aveo modi-
rtUion.
• wiin bim r
iron Me eat vatre Oive, en «e».witt
content.
at- : I .m fond of Ib.t drink, bot I far it.
Ratine 6eatf«mp ceite /ij««,^, ^^
^ en croMM ^ ^ete.
^Bn (partitive), accompanied by an adiMU«« «r
;^ur. or „ .d,„b Of d^™.. /.r„:fi:';;:^
«^I.ATIO» or TH. rtMOH PtOMOm " „...
JSx, • "
285
""•' " »•:'• With «■:„„::;;; ;.•:;' '•- """- «'■•
ax.: »»yo»w.„tmon.yf_Y»,w«do
otwn. port* ^'"
H_ . «, " '. " '■ "ot trannloted.
' *'*Jw \: f*'<irg0nt que mnu
t-^-Sdl"!^.*^^^^^ verb «ya, i.
^ ' Are there aoj^ book, lo thie box f « Ye.
tbere are lose: *' i«i
^^^^ ff '^ ^n. c^e 6o«e?_
0»i,i«
ywo.
i
iii;
28^ PBiifpiPLiB or wfaun otAmuB^
Yon wish to find books in thia box, are
there any ?
Voua vouUz trouwr dea Uvnt dans
««^ botU, y in a-t-ill ,
There are not any.
iln*y€nap(u.
JuvfVf''''.^JV ""^'^ •"** » qnalifioative ad-
my^ " <«;»''>•»«» by «•« for the singular and cnti
lor the ploral.
Bx. : Have you a fine watch ? - Yes, I have a
fin^one.
Avez-voM une hdU mtmire ? — Qui
I like good books, and read but very «ood
ones. .
^oimele8hon8livre»,etjefi;mlUque
,.d€triahon§,
«iAmLATK»r or Tn ntnroH word^t *
jub ; It is CKjoivalent to a p^t^i^i prbiiorpreeeded
, M- : "^■'i'*"^ Pii^ liSiuinecl^itfit^'* -''^«^v
^ wie Jeae mi^ 1/ > ^i,^^
3**SjS;? *!{!*•!!*'' Church thinks rfhim.
% 1(1 iH>l fit for IL '
««.: ^»r«OiMH»B., while we liV, here.
^^'^^^ ^•^ ^ peiklant qu* nous
V -* ' .4
.„ ^voitpoa, -^^ If
IMd jrpn work at oirS<;ief-Yee we did.
*-n
»A«noouE Boua ok^ mount ^Ht^
™r! "»«n which ». prfji^j ^j ^^
,'! -S
P!
€
i;'
Ex.
.Toadfife.
To guide.
To iofbmi.
^ PflllOIPLM Qf BMOLIIB OlUJiX^B.
To, micadvite.
Mitl etm$eiUer.
To mitgnide.
MaldMger. '
To mnrafora),
In some other inatanoee, the prefix will be a nwin.
o.it,a„ whfch ie ineepaiible fr^m the verb '^^
Pfoni the verb to take, we have : To overtake.
.i : .. , Toonderlake.
^nireprmdre.
To overcome'. '
Surmonier, - s
To UBdergo.
Toaaderbajr.
Aeketer au rabtdt.
. . To forgive.
Se^^K V; "^* ^'^^^ «>« preposition come.X
tte verb.nd h«i the fon« of .„ adverb which XX
'<«
u
f« •
**to€ome,'"**'
J'
'* fcy»i.-.-«^ f»,
.1 '.'
<(
<(
to give.
«V
To oome about,
Tooom«id<Mig,'
To oome baek.
To eome sear,
ToomaeoB,
Toooneoot,
^^Mger, tourner.
*'€» venir. -
*'«Wfoektt.
-jfA
«^ncCLAB BCL.8 ON KNOLMH r.aB>. 239
B*. : U » time for you to come back.
^JJ^i^P^pourwuBderewenir.
Come .long, do doI stay there.
K«n«a; votM-en, ne rertw «a« W
In Bomo other chiioa .k« .
BngUah verb the ^'JH^I^^^ZT "^^
owtion o«, taken a« an adverb ,ft«. ^' *^* ^'^
to this verb the «enae oT.fl' t" " ""*^' "'" «»<^
Ex.
To »peak on.
To work on,
To reftd on,
To wriit on.
To go on.
To come oa.
contiHuer de parler.
^»*i»uer de travttiUa'.
coHtinuer de lire,
continutr tPierire.
eontinwT d'alier.
In mil jdd to the Pri»uuy^^^^^
To nub in . -«#_. • • •!!?•""'•
O-^ will .dd the «««e ^g^:jr
....»«.» To Wa, \,ri^ ^
i
Ef,
UO K»oun.n OF moLm amAM^* ^ ^
ToMlnpoD, rmuoHtrer.
Tohlllwck, rtcnUr, f^t ^omL
TpfklloTer* dinrter. •
To (kll 00, commtiufT.
All my people fall oflffrom me.
TwtM mtB gene n*abandonnent.
He gave hw word, bat soon after he fell
back.
II donna ea parole, mate peu aprie U y
ma/nqua.
T^ke 1^ your hat.
When a verb in construed with a preposition taken
Man adverb, carefnl attention mtst be Mid to the
direct object '^ ^ ^uv
When this object is a noun, it may be placed either
Dttore or aAer the prepoiition.
Ex.: Take off your hat
Take your hat off.
Oiez votre chdpeau.
When the object is a pixwoui., it is always placed
before the preposiUon. ^ ^^^
Ex.: Take it off.
Otez-le, ,
In French, «otive.transilive verbs alone aro naei
in the passive form ; in English, •ctiye.ti.nsiiive and
MtivcinlrawUve verbi may hp used jmaaiTtly.
1 am e p km i&. *
*pi«pdtiti09 aittf it»ol>)tet, lometliietadMit oth^
■=.:■>':■
nominative Of th-I'tlveC^^^^^^^ '" «-att«icd for the
fix.: They^pt.aktome.
/ am spoken to.
They speak of ini-.
J am apoken, of.
Thoywieopiri the bod.
'^fie bed is nUpt in.
They Jaugh at him.
He is lauglied cU.
Wejuo lohl iluu
Onnouaditque
20 Some «oiivo.ini,«„H,ive vcrbn aiouwd witb*
Ex.: Thaw books do not 8611.
Thei^ books aio not sold. ,
P«« livrea ne ae vendentpoB.
This copy does not read Voll.
Cette cQpie ne ae litpojabi^,'
Bri^l^Dd hean %^JI it^Bp^; '\
I'Anglfiterreeat r^notim^tAj^tfangtr.
JJ^JjIhm^live verb to «.k. H the .al^oflhe
^2 PBI1I0IW.M or noLtm ouammam
Ex : They gave u« a fln« book.
A fine book WM giireo to M.
Un beau livre nouafut donni.
The same thing generally happen* in B,igli.h •
however in some casea. tho actlv^transltive verb
,J»ep. .t« direct object, and the indirect oWect
becomes the subject of the pawlve verb. "^
Ex.; They sent me a find wutch.
I was sent a fine watch.
On m'envoya une belle montre.
They offered him a fine jewel.
He wm offered a fine jewel.
On lui oJfrU un beau bijou,
Be wu forced oui cf the homee.
The passive verb will sometimes retain the nnmo.
«l"/^r*"l"*'*^' --aidbdbrcthep^
B*.: They forced him oat of the house.
He was forced ont of the honse.
On Ufit sorHr de/oree de la maieon.
They nng ns into the house.
We are rang into the hoose.
On rnma fait enfrer m tonnant.
dam h men UfZZT^
^2*"'
OH
mvnow sow mnom vmm. 243
OH Tn USi OF aow frwoh twlbb.
Dev&ir,
translated by to owe. ''*°*' ** "
Ex. : I owe twenty dollars to my nnole.
7 <^^ tn«5r< ptW^e* d man oncle.
1 owe yon many thanks.
Polio Jt ""^ ''^^ *^ '^ remerciemeiUe,
:j-^^c.i^or^tr^..r^
E». : Every man most die.
Tout homme doit mouHr,
You must .siudj.
you8 ilewz audier.
»«.: Yon ought to love your parent*.
^^o^devez aimer vosparenta.
You ahoBld protect the feeble,
y^ Kotw cTem |,ro%«r 2w /^iifeg.
ibito:;5^Sy?^'u^t^^ '^^--
by to, "««>JWt and the infinitive preeedad
il
Tr* W^lpiPJ-M or BNOLiwi o^iM^^,
• fl** • Wf t'O I U upoli^i«(».
^^jepr^Mnterdefiexeuaea.
Wore I to ilio.
^»9i j« mourir.
l>evoir nny oxproHM a„ action which •• to take
J^Uce on acooant of an a^reo^ront or an intention ; in
^^ in^cen, it may U, reproMcnted in Bngli.h hy
^oe or to have. » »« .^
Bx.: I h^ve i« write thl« excrrino before
u ^^^^^ ^ '^w^w- avant de Jauer.
» Jw^ brother to to arrive this week.
^^/riredoUarHvereetti^semain^
railoir,
^ffMr followed hygue and a vc. b. Im tmnd«t#tf
hj Inmtt, etc. / ought, etc.
Bx, : Yon must work.
Ilfaut que votm travailliez.
We must go tborc.
Wo ought 16 go there.
Ilfaut que nous allions Id.
■ . '^•"/-*'^»>>«8 0"!J^ « <iirect objeet. H ia t»M.
. I*ted by the impersonaJ it requires, it i^jiij.^ ete^
Bx. : It requitea tirao and jrno^^Jfi do th«t
il/afil 4u temps et 4fi /Vifrgent pour
pays.
»y i vant, w want, y<m »mt.
^.: I want « wntch.
II me/atU une VMtUrt,
We want to go there.
II noua/atU aller Id^
l>y the infinltivo or .ho p«Ht participle.
Bx. : O that 1 should die here I
^yntt-il queje m&urt id !
O that he Bboald hove fdr*iken ae '
-«Mrf.t7 gu'i7 now aie aftondbwn* /
.or «*^; the I„llait|^, i. put i.totho plTve W '
Bx.: Whit is to be ddtie.
What maat bo said.
What shottld begiv«n.
(^ril^Midraitdonner,
What ehoold have been done.
<^^'^wurnitfiKaufatwt,
lUUm Sa^^ *, A»Ilow«i by a. a^jeiUve of wmber
«danopn,.eih«Hhued^,^,,^;;S*,-^<|f. ^'
■ '*^t*^^^>*-*»»*^%<«'thewh«*
eon*'
An
■i
i
So mueb is wanting.
11 ^tn faui de taiU.
To he near, to be oh the point of trauUte lh« Fr«oeh
peu t'en faut, peu ich faltui, etc.
B«. : He wn« noar dying.
Peu e'en fcMut qu'il ne mauHU.
He was on the point of dying.
S'enfaltoir de beavcoup \» transhitcd by to be far
from in the following man net* :
The »am ik far from being complete.
n e'in faut de beaueoup que la wmnu
ioit compute.
•Ho is far from having as ranch science as
• his brother.
Jl 9*en faut de heauwup qu*U aii autani
de edence que son frire.
It is far from being so here.
II eTenfaut de beaueoup qu*U eneoitde
mime id.
Arriver,
The English language has two words to translate
this French verb, they are : to happen and to arrive,
To happen means to lake place.
To arrive means to come, to be no longer dbtent.
Arriver relating to persons or things is nsed as
impersonal in French ; this construction is rare in
English. Ill such insUnce^ the indirect object of
. the verb arriver, or the subject of the verb coming
Jjter, beeoniM the snl^t of the verb to hmmen ia
JHJglleh.
/^r.
■ '"'•.""' "■»• yo" happen to do «.).
. . ""W 70. will b. p,„T,l,«,.^ "' ""*
We kapponod to meot Hon,.
Jl amva qut nou, U, renconMvu,
ff'^^re plait dVen/ant
^ ^ piaU d'aller Id.
*. *et^*" " " •^^--•"t^^n.aive verb, me.oa
• ■ H!
Do «• yoa ftloiMe.'
FaiUg eomiM U vout plaira.
Avoir,
Avcift followed by tho pr«po»ition & and an in-
flDitlTe, is tmniiittt«d by to have with the inflnitlTC.
Bx. : %■«» huTo tt loiiff trip to make.
y<ntH avont d /aire un long troQd,
W« tjttd to do a dffflealt exerelM.
Now aviona A Jdire un «eeme« diJMle,
Avoif biem de la peine^ to hai^B tnach add.
Bx. : Ho bibd maeh ado to HatscMd.
I hiil mti^Il ado to ftfUal* lab^hfng^
J*imii¥li)ikdila^p^ktuA mrSnpScher de
rii^
After m^m add.
Apri8 beaucoupde peivu.
Avoir heau muy be translated in different waya, tho
beat is to st^y i^ niMiiIng aodtdidJili^'a'^i^
dingly. xTT
Bx. : IS^lover you ntay say, you -will nik^
beffevbd.
Fbtta a«b hhtm diN, tMhu lU Btm pas
me.
In vaih I now exypMl* (bb laorifloe I
made rd1i^;^SrlSi^%ir^
J€luiQiji^:,Ummdd
t ,
■V*
W nil »■ or Mil* WMMMOU VHM. U0
Yoq may ewily do is.
^QVavetbtauU/aire.
•■iw Mawnrfam, avoir froid, .ic. woir i« tranal.tJ
Bji-« Tohehnngry. avoir faim.
To be cold, aeoir froid.
To be warm, «,ofr cAoiidL
Toberighi, aroiVraffon.
Tobeafhiid, atoirpeur.
To be Mhamed, ovo^r Aoti(e.
To be tkepj, 9^0^;. *oi,m,fl[/_
F^'ons wh,eh are oi^«,4i^|eult to tran.l.te.
^^90 m fl*f <^,te •qnlTElent to tho French otfir «*
wKes Ale pleMore.
^: Thia jag standi the «re.
Cb wiM va a« /in.
^•toff^pajtbuwifwhing.
I -1
2M raiMomu OF mmusB obammab.
■ II en va, it en in de..., comme de ought to be
translated by it is with .... ai with... ^"^ ^'^ *^
Bx. : It ia with thw affair as with the othem.
Jlmvade cetU affaire comme dea autrea
When the imperatives of the verbs alter and vmir
are followed by an infinitive, we use two imperutC
in^Bnghsh, wuh the conjunction and to'^conolct
t
Ex. : Go and give him hi6 book.
Allez lui donner son livre.
CoAie and take them.
, Venez lea prendre.
laiea in the following manner.
Je ^ien, de parler, I have jugt pp„ken.
7 ««««'* rfe /»ar/<T, I I,«,J j„Ht spoken.
Jeviendraide parler, I. will have just .poken.
, 3)arder,
to 2lf »K'"^r''^""'' '^ "''"'•'"'^'^ ^y '^' mtransltive
ro ;o«ir, which IS not impersonal in English: the
indirect object of the French verb b^^o^ the
subject of the verb to long.
Bx.: We long, you long.
^i nous taroUi, U V0U8 tarde.
To Umg is equivalent to the French verb dhirer
T'Zf^^^pirer aprW it may be followed by
three different propositions. ^
To is used with a verb.
B*. : Wo long to go there.
Ilnoueta^^d'oUerlA, "
•T-
OMT«ca,OF«>«,HW0HV««, 251
He lofigK to Boe yoo.
-^luitardedevouamir
I^or and after, with a noun.
K»: Th*ylon« after , ho vmation.
^^^'^^t<^rded'arriverauxvacance.
Wo long for our Ui.r ,. '*^'»«^-
^». • Ho 18 long in coming.
H tarde d venir.
He wa8 not long in coming.
/« n« torrfa /xm d venir.
_, IMre.
-Two words translate ihm p,.o. ^u
To teU and to «iy. ^'^"''^ ^«''*>' »hey are :
To tell means ;
!• To mention one by one. to nMA.>n» ♦
Bx • TaIi #k • . «»«>ttnt, to number.
J«.. Tell the joints of the body.
^JJ;TorecUeindetail,togiveaoaec<::r;o^^
BOft,
«» To make known, to publish. ^
B». :. my didst thou ^pt telfme tbat rfie w«s
thy wife?. - ' " -^^'^^-i.--
' -I
To My meaiii to expvM. our thought moh at it
comes to oar mind, witlraut much i^ifloetioo.
Ex. : Bo not let children say foolfeb things.
iVe permettez piu aux enfdnU de dire
H. A-lo Telt ihoagh equivalent, in some respects
to wy has not always the same application. We
a.y : To tell truth or fal^Uod, to m a J^J^l
tellasorj,. to tell the reasons; but, we do not^y
To tell a speech, to tell a .fucourse, an oration^ to Ml
an argvment, a lesson. *
Tell is much used in commvnds.
Ex. : Toll mo the whole siory.
Hoxsontez-moi toute I'histoire.
r«« refers to the ^ubslanco of .ho comraanlcatibii
My rather refci-H to the word,*. nioawon,
Br. : Say jrour lesson.
IHtea voire legon.
Tell ri* wWt is in your lesson.
^ ^>^^mmceqv^ityadan8wtreUifon,
> To say generally has only one object, to tdl
•Iways has two, one direct, the other indirecit.
Bx. : Tell m;^ the story.
MacotUez-nwi Vhistoire,
When to say has an indirect object, the la(t» is
always preceded by ro. «»«er m
•iik >** ttaj ha feli»ir«l by a |iod», «i> adJeotiTC
Oir in. TO, Of son FSMOB VMS,. 268
to I*'"""'''* ^^ • "^°»' '' '^ *~"«'«ted by to make.
To make meaiu to ehiipe, to work uv - it «««. *^
express a numiml operation. ^^ ' '* •eema to
Ex.: To make a table.
to IT "'''' ''P'^ * °»^"»> -«on ; it means
Ex.: To do good, to do eviF.
-R»iw 20 6i«,, faire U mat.
To m^e an apology, ' demander pardon.
I o make ao obaervation, faire tm^ r^«.«.
To make »«>««. ' Jfrermtremargue.
n
To make progress.
To make a maofaiBe,
To make Are, soap.
To make a bed.
To make money,
To make a journej,
To make a friend.
To make an account.
To make a law.
To make a demand.
To make a distinction,
To make one's fortune.
To make war,
To make peace,
To do good.
To do work.
faire de» progris.
fi^rt une machine.
faireJu feu, de la soupt.
faire un lit.
/aire de I'argent.
Jaire un voyage.
faire un ami.
faire un dompte.
faire une loi.
faire une demande.
faire une distinction,
faire »d fortune,
faire la guerre,
faire lapaix.
faire le bien.
faire de Pouwrage.
tS4
WKHtmiM Of roOLMH ORAMMAB.
To do an ezeroisc,
to do Well,
To do a favour,
T« do buaiDesa,
To d<> a {Murt,
To do damage to.
To do good to.
To do harm |o».
To do. hooonr to,
To do wrong to,
1*0 do a wise thing.
/tdre un devoir.
Jhtrtbim.
/tttnuneftteemr.
/aire dommage d.
/aire du bim d.
/ftire dm malA
/aire honneur d.
/jpOretdrti.
/Hire une ehoeetagt.
Followed by a noan ezpreming the state of the
atmosphere, /aire is translated 'hy it is.
Ex.: iiyMjMRt, It is d^rKght.
ilj^icMr <f»4Kn«, Itic jnoM-liglit.
M/M du irotMlard, It it foggf .
2»Foltow<od by an ttdjeotive, to mixke sometimes
traoslates the ^tvnoh verbs /aire, rmire.
Bz. : He nm^ all aboat him happy,
tl rend hmrtfua Uma ceux qui vivent
Thi» (MttlnMit made them rich .
69':^9nti<at tie enHehiU.'
In tUo in^ii^iial ibrms iifait, il ftUidit, fitire is
translated Wi^ ilk
Ex.: ItiiiiiMMin ^Ifattekaud.
It is cold, ii/aa/i-9id.
ItUmiUfHl/aUiwir.
' IM i m aw H tSfciSiifcwe.
It/uUbim^Ptireiei.
OK TBM USX OV BOIIX VJUNOH VlBBi. 265
30 With an infiniiive,/ai>e is translated by (o make
with the meaning of to oblige.
Ex. : I made him do it.
Jelelui/iafaire.
I tried to make him speak.
J'eeaayai de le faire parler.
Ho made me laugh, I made him cry.
JlmeJUrire, je U Jia pleurer.
to L*^/! r™" T' •' ""^ ^° '••'*"«'«'«<» ^y to order, "
to hid, to have and sometimes to get.
Ex.,: We ordered onr men to go forward.
Nouaftmes avancer noe honimea.
I bade them stay there.
Je lea Jia reater Id.
I had my watch mended.
JeJUr^rermamoTUre.
I got my book bound.
Jefia rdier mon livre.
40 In the French expressions /a,>e cutre, faire
houtUtrJaire r6tir, faire is not translated.
To cook, jairt euire.
To boil, faire bouiUir.
ToroMt, faire rdtir.
Totenre. ^ /<Kr« tm^ir (A table).
To clear away, faire dettervir. '
JL? "^; ^"^'''*^ ^y • "«««*«i pronoun and a
Hx.: Ho made himself understood.
^MjUeomprendra.
SIC t^tatoaua or sifduwi g ^f U ff An, .
3e /aire may also be tranalatod by to gd Wi% a
perfect partioiple.
Ex. : He got expelled on aoooi^nt of his bad
^ eondnot.
Jl 96 fit ekamr d canue de ta mauvm84
eondwUe,
We got pnalihed.
I^ovsnowflmeapiunir. '
N. B. — Faire tavdr, to let kooir.
Vx. : Let me know wben yoaoome.
Fa4t»'moi tttvoir qutmd notes vien(f^z.
Faire voir, to shOir.
I hope yon will show me year fine clock.
J*espin que wma me firez voir voire
htiU hof^ldge.
Tolw6 means an affection of the heart excited by
that which delights, a sincere affection for peraoas or
things.
We love our flUPfAr, our friends, our country , our
home, our race, owr Ufet
To like mmmt to be pleased with in a moderate
degree; it ezpreoNi list than ft> Iom.
To be fmd of means to looe faoUiMy, to be. Over-
affectionateio. • .
Bz.: Heisfondofhtathi'g.
U aime ^Mrdument la olasse.
E'ff
ow m en OF somi wmmob yjusa.
m
Ex.
Children arc fond ot sweetm«iit8.
•U* mfm^tUmmt beamefmp, Ua frian.
This boy is fond of pli^,
Por/«r, iBeAQJDg to convey, to transport rn any
manner from one place to another, is transited Tjy
10 carry. ...■-. '
When he die», he shall carry nothinir
•way. . "^ T
Qwvnd U mourra, U n*m.portera new.
-fflneas carried his father on his shonliters.
^^'1^ porta wnpitemrmipauleB.
This verb is also used in a figurative sense.
^' * ?* ^^^ *** account to the ledger.
f<y'i«^ un (xmjpU au graiid-lwre.
Be carried war from Greece into Asia.
II porta la guerre de la Qriee &n Asie,
Such a bad habit will carry them very «» .
Um 8% mauifaise hamtck tee portera
loin.
i«f!^T*Tu'"*^ '"^ ""PP*""^ ^*» «"*»»'*' to tolerate
IS tnuislated by to bear.
Si.: Sejomon had te» ihoteand men that bat»
bupdtos.
^falotmn mmU dicf fmUe imme^ ^
.
ntHoiPLis or moLisB oBAmuft.
He conld not btw hto brother aeur him.
E 9M powvait pa9 BwppofUr ton frh'e
pris de 2u{.
Man is born to bear.
VhomfM naU powr endwnr.
Signifying to bear %qHin the peroon, as an artioie
of clothing, |wrf€r maet bo translated by to wear.
Bz. : To wear a eoat.
Porter un habit,
JK B.^To tfMT Bometimes has the meaning of to
diminUh, to wagte.
Bz. : . Time wears oat all thingD.
Le tempo d^ruU tout.
Water wears the stone.
X'eott use la pierre.
I Lastly, to wear may be employed r*» an aotive-
intraniritiye verb corresponding to the French T«rbs
dmrer or m patter, te contitmer.
. ISix. : This coat wears well.
Cet habk dure bien.
Her beauty wears away in melancholy.
8a hea/uU se oontume dant U ehagrm,
Chereher,
Three verbs translate the French verb cJtereher ;
fh^ are : To teek, to tearch, tolookfor*
To teek means to look for a thing easy to be found.
Bz. : I seek a word in the dictionary.
Je e&ere&e tin nwt Jane h diotumnaire.
o> nn vu or •oim riMoH Tnat.
269
A boy M«kt QMtf.
7n Mi/an4 0&«r0ft0 dea nUU,
To HoreK mMu to uuunine with oare, to take
»wh trouble to find oat a thing which is weU hidden.
Hwoe (0 teareh denotes more work or trouble than
" 9B €K t
B». : I am searching for my needle I lost in the
hay.
J4 eherehe mon aiguille ptefai perdue
danalefoin.
A botanist searohes for plants.
Un botaniete eherdie dea plcmtee.
To look for, which seems to have the meaning of
the two preceding verbs, expresses to direct the eyee
to order to discover a thing which is to bo sought
Bx.: What do yon look for ?
Q^e Amikez-vwAe i
I look for my parse.
Je d^erehe ma bouree.
Alter chereher, to go to fetch, to go and bring.
Bx. : Go and bring your book.
AUet cherdier votre Uvre.
Go to fetch my pen which is on my desk.
AUez i^er^er ma phtme eur mon ou-
pUre,
Venir chereho'f to come for.
Bx.: I come for my book.
J« viene chereher mon Uvre,
AMwyw" «*«r<f*sr, to send for.
' seo
milOlfltll OV BHCHim naAitMAa
' i r."», "■.
IV «r/w< ■npp«P«« •<»»• •ofloittDt gnmod or reaaoo
h«W^. » mppam ri «oiiTtatloo; >a qfrMment
»«.: Wedk]Mit'oiir'brotii«r t(Hli^.'
Ifou8 atUndotu notrefrire avjour(thvi,
1 expMt a letter.
J'aUenda une UUre.
In other csms, attmdre is generally translated by
to wait or to wait for.
Ex.: Wait for iw.
AtUftidtbz Wiw,
Wait nntil he comes.
Attendez jua^'d ee qu*U arrive.
To hire means to prooare a ihiog Sor temporary
use at a dortain price.
Ex. : To hire a fiism far a yew.
Loner un^fernm pom une a»«^
To hire a hpj^ for a d^.
LofMir (adjpr^m^Ji^ d^eutdpowr wne
To. rent, the umam tp JMr«,
^. : To rent a hoase.
Prmdrt wm m^^^aan, d (pUfUff..
To hire out means to ^^t t^^ tmj^t^fm m tft^
thing for a 00.^^5^01,
861
To kt, mpv^ flpmmonlj mtd ih%n to hire out, has
the same meaning.
Ex.: To let a room to lodgers^
louer WM ckqkmlm 4 c2sfi locatairea.
To let an estate fyt a 7«ir.
iioMer une i>roprMK/ jMmr une <mn4e.
N, B,-.To kt \% often followed by the praposltion
VmOUr,
mw, being no longer emjOojed aaapi independent
▼erh, is translated into English by e^nivaleats.
!• Vouloit ezpresn'ng an inteaUon is. tiMislated
bjtopwpote, to intend, to mean, to please, to ehooee,
to be determined.
Ex. : I porppse, I intend to go there.
Je vevoB aUer Id,
Do as ycm please.
Faite^ eomme vom wmdrez.
2« Vouhir^ dea<Aing a wisb» ft desire, bss Ibr eqni.
▼alents to with, to WMt, to liJU^
Ex. : I wish to bo. ha|f y.
Je veuufi4hre. kuwei^u:^
I should like to be your brother.
J% va^tOra^ mre ikmfl^rt.
IwMtyontoddH.
3« Denoting an order, a command, voidoir is teans-
Itted hy to require, to need, tototmt, to demand.
i
262 niNoiPLif OF uroLUB oiammai.
Ex. : I ieniAod tb«t the proof »hoald be repeated.
Jt veuee fue Voii ripHt la pre m.
Beligion reqairee nt to hel], ior fellow-
oreataree.
La reUgion veut que novs aidiom notrt
proehain.
Whot do you wont f
Que vouUs-voua t
To emsent, to grant, to be willing aro soroetimee
lued to translate vouloir.
Bz. : I am willing.
Jevfuxbiin,
We shall go there if you consent to it.
N<nu irone Id ri voue le voulez.
So To try, to attempt may also be considered as the
equivalents of voiUoir.
Bx. : I tried to reach the summit.
Je voulue atteindre le aommet.
He attempted to strike mo.
U voulut me /tapper,
60 In some instances, mil, followed by an infinitive
has the meaning of oovloir. *
Ex.: I will have that. I will speak.
Je veua cela, Je wux parler.
He will have me go there.
H vmi mefaire aUer lA.
OAeervaMotw on Me sim oftheverb " To€M ",
The verb to get is to much employed in oonverm.
tion that it seems necessary to mention it in this
book.
oirnui wi Of TBI tob " to at- ' . 33a
with aU th« advarbt Implying mottotK
^ «rt in mMM to mtkt <wt tmhf
TO get oat " « * «*, . ^ .
To get oft « t^enirti.,.
TogellDto « to put Into.
CTert en vain que vtnta etmierez de U
I got iiim oti of th« hMM,
•^« i«> tortir de la mimm.
Likewise, to get it •otfcre.tmniiUve when „.-w
alone. iti.foliowedby.«oonor«t;noTn' ""^
^''•' mi?^^^''*^^ tagetabook.
O^ltiiit^pris:, obtenirwiUvre.
•^i^tmnej, togeie»dl4.
^merder»ffem, obtemir dM crim,
^g«t*Nii«lliiBg(ba#.
Fawefam q^d^ue du>ee.
To get son* o«9^ ilo « 4hi|ig.
-^«<w/»<W «MgfV# <Aoii d 2«^'«n.
To get ahewi bMmm to«ilVw»8e.
■' f
To get
Tojttbaek'
Togetoaar
To get rid of
Togetoa
«t
M
W
M
tolMbeed.
torttorn.
tAaiifWafiMDe.
to diMngage oae^ sdf.
tojwooeed.
2W PUMoiKia o» nroutH obamiiab.
EoUow«d by ao adjeotire, to get ia actiye-intraMi.
tive and has the meaning of to be<»me.
To get bad, means to twoome Ud.
To get fat, «« II u jj^j^
To get ready, " « « ^
Togetloet, «« « « j^,!,
Ex. Being tired, he got aaleep.
Etant fatigue, U a'endomit.
JV. A— With the verb to have the perfect parti-
ciple got IB an expletive.
Ex. : What have yon got in your pocket.
Qu'avezvoue dans wire pocJie ?
I ha^re got two apples.
«/*at detia pommea.
PABTIOIPLES.
The imperfect and the perfect participle may be
used as adjectives; in such cases, they are subject to
the same rules as adjectivep.
1® They may precede the substantive.
Ex. : A loving mother.
Une mire aimante.
20 They are com;)ared when necessary.
Ex. : More pressing wantc.
Dea beadna plua presaanta.
A most loving child.
Un enfant trie aimant
Our king i» Mghtff eHeamed,
Instead of very, we see with partioiplei much, very
much, greatly, highly.
Ex.:
PABnoIPLIt.
Our king is highly esteemed.
2fotre roi eat tria eatimi.
SM
■J'i
Bb WiM tying on the graaa.
faTt^^ *»y »»I>«rfeot parUciple. when the action
!: r^;^^""* ^"^ ^' *«^^-« P'- - ^H— time
Bx. : He was lying on the grass.
Jl ^ait cotich^ »ur I'herbe.
They were sitting on the moss.
Ha itaierU aaaia aur la mouaae.
The booka are now aetUng,
The compound form is sometimes used with a
passive meaning. "** *
Ex.: The books are now gelling.
Lea livrea ae vendent m^intenant.
Oar work is now reading.
Notre ouvrage se lit dans le moment.
Thoir house was then building.
Lew maison se bdtissait alorj.
Th^ loomng on, 1 shaU not faU.
The nominative u«ed alone with a participle is
X^lu ^;P-<icnt proposition o'emmTcio^
with when, whiU, tf, since, or because,
Ex. : Thott looking on, I shall not fail.
Si vous veillez sur moi, je ne tomberaipaa.
My brother having studied his lesson, his
master allowed him to play
Lorsgue man frire cut itudU 'sa legon, am
maUre lui permit dejouer.
266 i»iiroBi,i» or mkQLiBB qmamhjuu
M^^Z!^"'""''^^^^^^ i-ometime. called by
l^"QUBt FllPOBITtOlhl.
Some obaenrations about their use and mining,
the a^ii^'i^f.^r ^"^ -^^-'^ -p-
1" Place ; Ex. : The villages about the town
-^'"ne , Ex. : About brenft <tf day.
fio Tu ™ ^ersle point dujow.
«« T * . "^P^^^P^tm nor le milieu.
60 Intention ; Ex. : I came about tL.
^ «»w t^Ma a« ^et de cette
affdire.
liook aboot jion.
., i*«i*«fird V0U8.
-4«w< ttwite Aoi^etimes Avtbur,
lit burent a la ronde.
W0L18H PB»081TI0»8. £07
^^lUo.eti„e. answers the F«nch location faire u.
Ex.: They took a roundaboat way.
lis parent un chmin dUtournl
roa walked ten miles aboar
roMftte^ un m<m de dix miiles.
^••' I am about to write.
Je me mets d 4crire.
He is aboat to speak.
^^tsurle point deparler.
Va«n,y did the gallant general try to
bring war about. ^ ^
Cest en vain que le brave geairal e^m ds
commencer la guerre ^
He tried to bring matte™ about.
II <^»aya de rigler lei choses.
'Abroad,
Ex. : Ho is abroad.
11 est d Vitranger.
We \uy all night abroad.
Nmt coucMmes dehors.
At home and abroad. .
<^^^n(met<krHranger.
To publish a thing abroad.
■i^ivulguer une chose.
!■',]
J
a
nmnnKiaf op iiraiMB « »*—*»
All the sails wrere spread abroad.
Tautea les voiles 4faient defh^
We come home froth nbrcntd.
^cms revenons de Vitranger.
At.
Primarily, ihi« word exprewes the reiatkMM of
preeeooe, nearnees in place or time, or direction
toward : At the sixth hour ; at the house; to aim at a
mark. It is less definite than in or on.; at the house
may signify tnJor near the honse. From this original
import come all the various uses ofat, which denotes :
lo The relation of aa external situation, or of
circumstances accompanying this situation.
Ex. : Your books are at hand.
j^oue avmu voa livres en main.
Our ftiends are at sea.
If 08 amis sent en mer.
2o The relation of pliwje, dr time.
Bx. : BobertB' Tfotory at Pnardeberg.
La vietowe de Roberta d Paardeberg.
At the hour I went there.
A I'heure oA fallai Id.
3o The relation of wme state or condition,
fix.: At war, en guerre.
At peace, en paix.
At ease, 4 faiise.
At play, aujeu.
At your Service, h votte service.
i» The relation of some employment or action.
ENGLISH PREPOSITIONS.
Ex.
Heis nt thisihing.
11 tratfoUU d cdU choae.
They air» al^ftys at me.
fit mmt tou^'oura aipria moi.
We are hard at it.
Ifous y travaiUons de bon cobw.
S» With a superlative it expresses a relation of
Mfree.
I>t. : At most, at best, at least, at last
Au phiB, au mieux, au nwins, enfin.
60 At may express the relations of caaae, occasion,
eonseqnenoe or effect.
Ex. : At the sight, at this news, at this doclar
ration.
A la vue, d cette nouvelle, d cette decla^
Totion.
I did it at the command of my general.
Jele fiaaur Vordre de men general.
At my father's entrMty.
Sur Vinvitation de man pire.
70 The 1 elation of direction to an object or end.
Ex.: They looked at me.
Il8 me reffordirent.
We fired at a mark.
Mua tirdmea d la ffibU.
They langhed at ns.
Jtla i^eiti de notta.
Between and An^mg*
Between is uHed in rcnferenoe tolwo persons, thlnm
or^^asM*. *
Hi
i> M
i-
:^-A
Amony
*^0 PMMWPLII OF UrouSH OKAMJUA.
Bx. : Between yoath and old age.
Sntre lajeuneim et la vieiUme
I stood between Peter and John. '
•/« me tenuis entre Pierre et Jean
He was appointed umpire between ih^ in-
habitants of Quebec mnd thoee of Mon-
treal.
H M nomm^ arbUi^ entre lea habiUmte
de Quebec et ceux de Montr^l.
efew to more than two.
He win be reckoned among the great men
of big time.
Mnra comptiSparmi lee grands hommee
de 8on temps.
Among the French, among my friends.
Farm% les FrangaU,parmi mes amis.
By and WUh,
the^.!L*rr'"'" '"'"'^ « connection between
the inatniment or means of reaching an end, and the
•gent who uses this instrument
mlt\ " ^T";"^ "^^ ''"^ '^^ "'^"'^ of the instm-
ment, by, with that of the agent
Bx. : These men woi-o killed toith a aword by
Ces hmmes fu,rent tuis par nous mec
With is used to form the folJowiag exprtMion, :
wiS';11 "wfthTJ,' ^'r* "'"^ ' ^-'^^ ' To surround
wwu waier, with wal|«, emtourer tPmu d» ««.. xtr-^^
uroLiaB PurofinoNB. 3^1
Jr^ft-* Th.j fc) on with their orim« , m contin^ ^
IS^25JT ° "* *° "•" '•"* -•' «- '^^^
Bx.- He died by the sword.
-R mouna par l'^.
He was seised by force.
^ Jut miai de /one, >
By the fevoar of night.
A la fiweur de la nuit.
He sat by the stream.
^ OaU aaaw prie du torrent
Stars are to be seen by thousands.
^ ^ Voiles ae voumt par miUiera.
^P^icje^may translate the French worda«^
Ex.: We shall talk of it by the way.
Jfoua enparUtons m chemvn.
We passed by that port.
^o^ paaadmee pris de ce port.
Too moat regulate yoorself by* his
example. ^
^dmezvousr^J^^raonexmple.
IfyfiitherisabhMjksmithbytrade.
f^P^^fdrgerondeaonmAUr,
1 know him by that name.
Je U eonnais aoue ee TMm.
fi-
li
r
' *** ttnrOIPLli OF airOLUH amAwi»^g
ftjt ftigUA «^ iy io ,h, ibHowbg MM > to bay. to mH
.JL^*!; ^ ^^'^ivalwt to thp F«,och word ^fttroi,^. ^
•xpress time, daraUon. ^^'
Bx.: Ibr several jre»»,ii>rfiv«y«^
an* ^
2" It also exprekees coioe, nutive, pice,
Bx. : I cannot speak for weeping.
'^nepm8paH0rpa/roeqvsjepleure.
He wae hangwl for killing hie rival.
^Mptindu pom- mwhtw »(mHv<d.
I b<»glit t^ watoh for six ponade.
a» ftwjeded by «,/«. means ^uon^ a, d TA^rf *.
«x. : As for the other matters.
Qiumt omx autrta matt^es.
40 Followed hyaU, it has the meaning i>£malgr4.
Bx.: ypiriMIhwweiaU^^heisnothHipy.
«(ilgr4 tovie fa nofte^, u Wui pas
hmreux.
Ex.: Qirtroppss<a«lforSoiUkA*ica.
>Vn ^tmtpm pmiHmii nonr VAfrique
duSmk
wousB puposinoifg.
273
Xbupartiole is «#ed afUr all thoM.word* which
t^wii trtgin, rmotmm, tqaaration, privatum, eawe
otmotive. It may be used for time as well as for
place.
•«. : He g«e» from Beauport to Qoebec.
From door to do<nr.
De porte en porU.
From morniDg to night.
•Dtt maiin au sow.
5e rose from the ranks of a simple soldier.
n partii du rang de simple eoldat.
Those sapplies were won from the enemy.
Ces proviaione (>n$ O^prieea d Vennemi,
He acted from gratitude.
II a agi par reeoinrunseance.
He went there from fear.
H eat alUtd par peur.
Common expreuion, : From the begio^ing, from the
heart ; from abore ; from ben«.th , from nwl.
^ may express either place or time.
Bx. : I am in my room i I waljf in the garden.
JeauM Oamwa^ iiha'mbri;je rnarche
dana lejardin.
We arrJyed in the morMqg^, it the evening.
Jfoua arnvdmea le nmHn, U aoir.
>74 FRnroiPLifl or uiaLitB hbaww^b
Bit.: We are In great tronble.
iney live m great hopee.
^ ont de grandes esp^rancea.
To be in joy and sorrow.
^re dana lajoie et dans la peine,
A book in the press.
Un livre sous prease.
2" Proportion^
Bx. ; Not one in ten will do it.
Bx. : In tho name of God.
A.U nom de Dieu.
In respect to you.
^n voire coneid&ration.
In obedience to yon.
Pour VOU8 ohiw
40 Mctmer,
Br.: ^0 man in the white waistcoat.
^liommeaugilethlanc.
In this manner.
In a quiet tone.
^^^iontrcmquiUe.
In vain.
/.
1° Qaalitj.
2" Quantity.
B*.: Tho»moant«f twenty poand..
3» Cause.
Ex.; He died of ^ef.
4* Substance.
^: Ahouseofsloae.
5" Wish.
Bx: Amandwirooaoflmppiofl^
** I'nvation, aoM^y,
Ex.: V^ria^Wooi,
Q^iaperduaoneanff.
7* AlMBdMMI
^^<»/aUdeluumime,
1V»
^f ,..ji
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
//
^
4^ <<
4io
1.0
I.I
U
|U
140
12.0
!:25 I 1.4 1 1.6
150mm
/APPLIED ^ irsA^GE . Inc
,^S 1653 East Main StTMt
.^^ Rochastor. NY 14609 USA
_^^^ Ptwna: 716/482-0300
.^^^^B Fax: 716/286-5960
1903. AnUM Im^a. mc . M nghM RMWvad
^
^\
^V
'«
^ ^% ^rvN
4^ <jlV
v^
276
I
nnrcnvLBfl ov uroLin gbaioub.
If, B.-^Of^ having tho primaiy mdm otfivm, h$M
a derivative aense denoting poMession or property ;
it is the re«Mn why it ia need instead of the 's,
Bx.: The glory of God.
Xa gloire d» Dim,
The house of my servant.
La maiaon d$ mon aervUeur.
Lastly, this preposition sometimee has the meaning
of about, eoHceming, retpecting.
Ex.: I inquired of him.
Je mHn/ormai de tui.
He spoke of friendship.
II parla d'amitU.
I will write to yoa of this affair.
Je vous 4crirai au mjd de oette affaire.
On,
This particle expresses :
1° Dependence, confidence in.
Ex. : They may depend on me.
He peuvent compter sur mot
Yott may rely on him.
Vous pouvez vouafier d lui.
2® Proximity.
Ex. : Qoebec is on the Saint Lawrence.
Quihec est bdti sur le Saint'Laurent,
3° Contact.
Bar. : The patient lies on his bed.
Le malade repose sur son lit.
BN0LI8B PltlPOaiTIONa.
My book is on the tabic.
Mon livre at aur la table.
4° Accanoalation.
Bx.: Lo88onlo8H; lottew on letters.
J'erte aur perU ; UUrea aur Uttraa
5° Time.
Ex.: They will oomo on Monday.
Ila vimdront lundi.
On my arrival; on my departure.
A mon arrivie; d mon cU^.
Coti^moH expreaaUma,
OnmanyoccMiona; en pluHeur, occtuUm.,
Onmjway; >ur mon ckemin.
Upon my word, surma parole.
On a sudden , v>hitement.
On the coming of a Varriv€e de
297
On every side ;
On purpose ;
On the contrary ;
To be on duty ;
On fire ;
On a great scale ;
de tout edt4.
d deeaein,
au eontraire.
itre de tertietm
en'feu.
9ur une grande €chelle.
Over,
wh^*I;?w"'°"' T ''' ""^'^"^^ ^^'^^> mean,
or^tlt:: "^ ^'«°^'P-"^-' authority, dignity
Ex. : Thou Shalt reign over my house.
Tu rigneraa aur ma maiaon.
Watch over your children.
VeiUet aur voa enfanta.
^8 9»aoaLn or MffOLiM^ o^^mmam.
Tkft evik which h«ng over oar heada.
Im maw qui noue fnenap«n|.
Tbii pvl|ol« hM the meaning of porKfewia, in aome
^. : He had a cloak over his coat.
Ilavait un manteau aur 8on habit.
I am over head and earn ia buaineafc
^a* dt$ ocGupationa par.deseu8 la tite.
It may signify :
lo Across, fjf6^,|(}p to. Bide.
Ex.: 9e laapfed over the brook.
n muta c2t Vautre c6U du ruiateau.
H» went over the river.
H travena la rivih'e.
^0 On the other [^df
Ex. : Gom« over here.
Vemzici,
Go over there.
AUezl^ ;'
Wftliffiqver the way,
^<>^demeuTon8dePauirecot^delaru€
^•^^ BiixU^ thrpagh the whple ex^^t of!
B»? • 9!1t%»lHWi «lW Pjrer q>e town.
g^iofl^fiyed over tl^fi eai;^l,
4<» D« r«rt« cwjiiHW^.(nnmber)l
Bx,: Isth«»»aiiythiBgoverr
y <^*-il 9^»eljue ehoM de ruU t
nroLifH PKEPoiinoNs. f)^
lA^^'fi'bbeiiihgb^er.
•W »V a Tien de rtate,
Th«w w«ro ovw tWrty men in the hoiue.
^ y at«»« ou.<Wa de trenie hammes
^n» la maison,
Bx. : The recreation is over.
The danger ia over.
Le danger est paaa4.
It is all over with him.
Cc» M</ai< de lui.
Out,
Ex.: Oat of the house;
Oat of danger;
Oat of breath ;
Out of tight ;
The matter i. out , « ««^, „, ^.^j^^,
Bx.: Theflwiaout; Ufeu^tMt.
Tn.,. °" •»«•"• oat, Mwter.«,<;«t.^
me«W rf.^ -^ "/ prep.«ition. a« <^ hM ih»
meaning of ^0 proceed from, toeomefrm.
Ex.: I*I«nt8 grow out of the earth.
^ p2an<e« aorUnt de Urre,
hora di la mdtaon.
kor» de dapper,
^rt d'Aaleine.
*or* de vue.
It moHtre eat dehora.
1.
I ■ a
m
nWOIPLU OF BirOLUH OftAMlUA.
Ho paid me oot of his own money.
^^Pf^Vad«9anpropr$arg§fU.
He got out of that affair.
^ '^ ^^rra$aa de eetU afaire.
Oatoflove; otttoflMin M.
I*ar amour ; par partm.
Tiu,
«« translates (ho French juique expressing time.
Bx. : The concert lasted till eight o'clock.
U conani durajuequ'd huU heurea.
Till then ; till now.
Ju^u'ahra ; jusqu'd present.
I shall wait till Monday.
J*aitmdra%ju8qu'd lundi.,
sen^nf r-^*'r /'■'^ " ""^ '" *^° ««t ?««•' of the
■entence, jus^'i is translated by to.
Ix. : From morning to evening.
Du matin juaqu'au acnr.
In some instances, Jusque is translated by dmon to
Bx. : From the year 1883 down to the year 1901*
^Jwqu^ expressing place, is translated by as far
Bx.; Wo will go 08 far 08 Montreal.
JITotts irons juaqu'd Montr^l.
^'•"•"••w ««?preMloiM.
How fkr do you go ?- A8 far as Quebec.
M0LI8H PBEPOSlTIOlfS.
281
How long shall yon wait ?
Oombim de tempt attendrez-wnu t
Till ten o'clock.
Juiqted dix heuru.
We were oblige! to go a. far back ae Saint Ann
tjtfe AWo/re remon/e an Hiffe de Quibee.
we aaw a* many as sixty.
NoHM en rims* juequ'a toixanie.
They struck even the children.
n* Aappbrent jutqu'aux enfanU.
Up, down, under, above and bHow,
Uji may be considered as an adverb or n prenosition
but It is more used as an adverb. ^^^P^'^on,
Up adyevh, means aloft, on high, in a higher po^dtum-
it„tbeoppos.teof^.„ ,„, ,^ ^^^ J,,^.^^^
Bx. ; Wa got up the tree.
Nona montdmes dans I'arbn.
He went up to the sammit of the hill
II monta au aommet de la coUine,
^«-c«'toin ver^tlpdenotesa8tllteofcomDletion *
It me^B compUtely. To eat up, todrinlur^t^
m to pay up, to make up, to Ji up. ^' '' ^
Bar.: I>rink up yonr water.
Buvez toute voire eau.
It is time to pay up.
^^^ temps de solder voire dette.
Up expreascs an idea of elevation, excitement, in.
' ^2 nuifoiPLia or i ^ i ^fr Tty fiiAiiiui.
tamotion when used with verbs of rest, litoatioD
•ad eondition.
%/ The tiji^ is qp, ihoiuolenp.
Thofe that were up kept others low.
Ceua qui avaieni U demia, tmai<^ U»
autn$ fin-pa^
The people i^i^ qp in aript.
• I* peupk^ midevi pr^ 1^ arni^
ThJB Arnde are up.
Lea/ofMa ont monU,
tftia particle may esprew equality, competency :
It means to an equtU height with, a$faraa.
Vf,i He ia ap to (he chin in water.
II eat dan$ Vtaujuequ^au nunion.
This carriage is up to date.
Cette voiture mt d la mod$ aepusUe.
This man is up to eveiyOiiipg.
(HhoffUMtfta^faUdet^tU,
Vp is sometimes used elliptioally £at get up.
%,: UiH aiHi ^ doing.
XftWis-voiM et agiaaet.
^ovm is sometimes taken as a prepotitim, sometimes
at an adctrb,
Down is a preposition in the foUowipg examples :
H^ fell <)owo f preoipjoe.
II t<m^ l^^an» un pr^oipice.
We went down the hilL
ilTotis due§ndinu8,la montogne.
288
M0LI8B n^^niQm,
Togoortocproodown.to}w.
Tbey ran down tbo bill.
The tan » down,
Upaldt down.
^»ohilutcouek€.
Br.: I>own on your knees I
Down with tho traitors I
Abflnlea traitrea !
|^)wn with him I
Under n^eans : ""'^"'■'■^r
^ Su^^cUon to.
^•- ^«WMi-un^orQlpd.
2»LiabIeto.
Kx.: Under p«f„ of <,^,h.
^ FIWOIFLBI or llfOLIIB OMAIIMAB.
Under an obligation.
8oui une obligation.
3» Undtr may translate the French moina,
*x. : I cannot sell it nndor.
Je ne puis U vmdre d moint.
4» It means also not arrived at
Ex. : Children under ten years.
lea en/ants au-dessout de diae an».
5* Cra<fer may denote a atttto of protection.
Ex. : He is under my care.
Jl est 80U8 mee wine.
Under a guardian.
Sous tutelle,
6<> It sometimes means de, sous.
Ex. : Give me a note under your hand.
Donnez-moi un billet de votre main.
A ship under sail.
Un vaieaeau eotia voiUa.
^6we means superior in state, place, number and
time. It answers the French au-deuu» de.
Above my strength ; awdema de mes/oreee.
Above my parts : aurdessue de mea talents.
An archbishop is above a bishop.
Un archevSque eat au-deaaua d^un 4vSque.
I am above your attacks.
Je auia au-d^aaua de voa aMaque$.
They are above thirty.
Ha aont au-deld de trente.
286
ADTltB*.
^Vwcrtthtre.borothrwhoa«.
ioittdt. nnaiime. It tnn9\at9» athde*.
^••* 5« ^-^ *«^ow tbo 0.001 J,e.
y i«r man com« i/p, come down.
AbviEB8,
OBSEBVATIOKS O^SOME ADVEBB8.
Wmdien is translated hy Ju»„ uru • .
mvoittit or uroLin okammak.
You cannot Imigfho how loTtd ther m«.
^^n^P^imvoui imagine combUn
•Iwny. followed by the word il modifier ^^'^^
»y ^*, it Is likewise translated by how.
^. : How prudent you arc f
Q^voM ite$ prudent !
^^<^ not know haw much he love, pim.
v^r^tT' T"'"« ^ ^"" '^''^ »»«» modifying a
▼orb, IS translated by how much,
Bx. : SToo do not Icnow how much he lores you.
Vous etavezpascombienilvousaime.
Bow manpfUendt have yoti f
^n^n wUb . .,„„ ,. .„„,.^ ,^ .^ ^^^ ^^
lo Bow much with a slnguljir noun.
Ex. : How much money did you spend ?
Combien d^argent avez-voua d^peru^ f
20 Bow taany with u plaral ooan.
Ex. : How many books have you got ?
Combien de Ivvrea avez^vom f
/^f^rUitfromOmbeetoMontteai?
fJ^tT' *'PT''"«*^"'*""*' » '"»«»»ted by h^
for, expressing time, hjhowUmg.
Ex. : How far Is it from Qdobec to Montreal ?
C7otnWen y a-Uil de Qv^beo d Montrial
"••• In kow ranch Ub, f
^ oombim dt imp, t
-a^'Mwith.ploraUoan
B«.: How few books.
.B». • T.:**i
^•: Little money,
He eats littUu
-«»», with a pitt,^ »,^^^
Mttle gloiy.
P^deghire,
> r
288 I^INCIPLIS OP JtNOLttH ORAIOIAB.
Ex.: Few men, few Boldfore.
Peu. d^Junhniett ptvb dt soldate.
Peu&peu, little by little, by degrees, gradually.
Ex. : Little by little the bird boilds its nest.
Peu d pm Voiseau bdtit son nid.
Un peu, a little.
Ex. : Wait a litt'lo.
Attendez un p^.
Jjepeu de ih translate^ by the little, or the few.
Ex. : Tfco little pleasar*? I take in it.
Le peu de pktiair quej'y prenda.
The few visits I have received.
Lepe^i de.via^ea quefai regues.
The English language has three woi-da to translate-
trop ; they are too much, too many, and too.
Too much i:j used with a angular noun, a verb or a
participle expressing an action and noc a quality.
Ex. : He has too much prklo. ; ,
II a trop cCorgueii. ^ \
You work too ma«h.
Vo%i8 travaillez trop.
These men are too ranch tttcemed by you.
Cea hommes aont trop eatimfy de voua.
Too many is used with a plural noun.
Ex. : He has too many friends.
II a tropd'amia. * *
Jf. b: - Ve, coming after frop, is not translated.
• •>
:5»--3'h«y Art, top good.,
^t$9orUtropbotig. '
Hd ia too learn^.
fl ea trop iavant
you go too f|Mt>
Fi>tt« a^^ jroft vUe,
•hd If tmnsJatod •ocottlingly. "^*'
That man iatoo tediou^u
('^ ^^me tat par trop ^u^em
«?.: Ho think* you ono too many
fivo^spetmdetrop. '\
«,^*'' ^ ''^ •" *^»'-«'«»*. «veh M. u^,
B». : Thi^ dwUnction is not UMJeot.
CItffo ditHnction n*ut patcUtrop.
WWI9* wWeb ta plaeeJ after tha nouo. ^
4k.; H« baa fHenda •ooQgii.
»•»<►
!ife ■
. m' nxaemzB o#,if<^tiiw cuumiAR.
-BfWy^ f. aliK> used wilh adjectlre* »nd verba and
ought to bo placed afliorthem. ■
Ex. : He is rich enough,
II est (M8€z riche.
They work enough.
lis tixivaillerU aawt.
JV;fi.-Wben the active-Uansitive verb has an
object, the adverb enough man bo placed after the
object.
Ex: We esteem them eaoogh.
Nous lea estipiona aaaez.
I love nay brotJier enough.
J^ain^e asa^z mpn fi^re.
Aisez may also be translated- by |>rctty, rafter; in
saeh instances, it is the diminutive oi^t;ei^.
K?. : I am pretty well.
Je vaia, (Wfz bien.
This person is rather handsome.
Cdte peraontie eat aaaetjotte. '
Axsez . , . . powy with an adjective or an adverb is
^Dslatod by jd at. .*:
Ex. : Be so gopd wt to lend me some money. •
So}/e» aaaex iwn pour me priter un'pau
Speak 80 loud as to bo heard by ail.
Parlet aaaex fori pour itre tntendu de
ioua.
AfHfamt, iamt.
In oomp«rison& of eqaaUty, autmt is tnnsUtod by
ADTIBBS.
291
« ««A or «o mneh with lAnguhr ^oOiii ; asnumy or
*o Mtfny with plaral uoant. ^ * ^"^
Bx.: He bw as mach courage Mhki brother.
^e baa not so.mocb courage as his brother.
Ilnapae autant de courage que eofT
/nre.
Thejr bad as many books as yon
ns avaient autant de livreit q^ voua
They had not so many books as you.
/to n'avaunt paa autant de livrea que
V0U6, ^
ao much with a verb or a pai-ticiple. ^
Ex.: Hecriedsomucl,thathegotho««e.
^^onci,tantqu'U9'enrhuma,
We have ao toaby friends thai We aro on.
f ^* av^tant d'amii ^nm»m.
^ *n(xzpable$ de Ue nmmer tm^
Tm, with a verb^. M»«»nshit«i by m mcL
»«.: P«"»pnng in whioh it nUned so n>Wk.
m
n»<! nuomn or wn^nf; o«*ioua.
^; ?n^^ day io exjjeoted.
^•"mbthei- 60 greatly loved.
la m^ n gran40mhU aiin^
Auui, m^aiiing hkftpi»}, muy be tra^ijliijted by too,
whicli w plowed At |he oi>d of 1^ Mtite^oe.
E». : We bi|re rood of ycmr coonfwji aod fkyoar
too.
Nous awns beaoin de vo^ eonaeil et
de wtftjaveufauni.
We thail go to M<^traal;aiod yqa tea
Aho nearly has the Rui^e - eaning as Mewjas. How-
ev«, the proper office of u toadd and to augment:
Wmiu u mor^ proptriy iihihI in a oomparisoa.
Ex. : I^ve is not only liberal, bot also prodigaL
L'amour tfed pai aeuimerU Ub^ral,
fnxiia il eat pTddigue auwL
Ho is not only rich but also well bom,
II n'egtpaa nuUmmt riehs,mai» U at
auMi de bonne naisaance.
-j»u*i* preceded by a noan or a pronoan, may also
be translated by to which must be placed at the head
of the proipositioh. In snch inotanees we nae in the
•eoond part of the sentenee the aoxt»ait used- or
and«mtoood in the first, and the propoklUon takes
the interrt>g»|lT8 form.
Bx.
m
lis tAUbres plutdt
IMj go toiijMbeo, so tliaii you.
I went to W y^iik, w ^ my ^»rolhoi-.
Bx. : iie^ed Urkneu tailier or more thm
Les hoiMMs ont dim/
Itdthei fo, rii*, tlie followiBif expi.te«ions :
ldwllei*di,>tliWgoih«re.
■ ^:T^. Cttej-d; rather itay hero.
^^^^^ "^""'^^ ^ »^^. ^«,
**•• ^J««t^«i> wilier tblinyo.i.
mU s^lSvt "litxia Ui quevoiia.
Meaning duparavant, plus t6t ia tmmlai^hy ^er.
Bx- : I will oomo sooiier next week.
A^i
9H
fkiWinU Of iM0%iMU QtAtatAM.
OOlltTBQCTlOll of ADtlRBa.
The tdver^ thoold be placed as near as pociKibletq
iht word it modifles. Genei-ally speaking, it ibUowf
the verb in Jte simple teases, and is placed between
the auxiliary and the verb in oompoand tensee.
Kx.:. We work slowly.
IfoM iravaUUma UrUem^ni,
3'hey have gloriooely succeeded.
JI9 Pnt glorieu»em47vt rimn.
Hi has been seriously hart.
*' a 4t4 »4rimeevMnt hUatd,
When the verb has a direct object, the adverb inay
h9 placed before the verb or after the direct object ;
but never between the verb and its object.
Kx. : She loves her children tenderly.
She tenderly loves her children.
r SUe aime tendrement set enfanU.
Jf» -».--The adverb is preferably .put before the
terb when H fa considered as the important word of
the 8enteiic«.
Bx.: She devoutly prayed to Qod. **
Slkpria JHeu tUvatment.
Jn Boeie instances, the adverb begins the senteiiM.
E«. ^ I>e*rly does he love his son. >
HtiimetmdrmwfUfion]^.
Kever shall we forget that day.
•/aiHaw potut n'owMieront u j&^t.
ADV't|IB4. ^
^ ^»nm tee tktm.
^z!^^ '*^"'"*' '"^'*» '^ «''^<^'» «^«'-. f*^er, often.
Wb^toftheverb in «m;.Ie ten««,'u„d XTJhe
t««nl,w7 in compoand tinwa. '
fe. :. We often see them.
^(»»8 Us voyons $(mverU.
We have Vely Keen him.
J»ott» VavoM vii rarem^ent.
They shalh seldom go there.
ife »»wif 2(1 raremeni.
Ji B.^To be in Its simple lenses precedes the
•dverb of time.
«x.: They nre seldom »t home.
-Ife fion* raremmt dm eux,
^>^» he 9aw tite ^e»terdap.
^Cawful att^nUon should be paid to the place we
TO»gpIaoe,may. completely change the meaning of
J^T"^. Z^' *""P'«>« hafethe adrerb^y
Which must be placed bef«:e th* word it modlfteT
Jfe. : Only he saw me yesterday.
JfV,* mil m'a vu hie^.
He only saw me yesterday.
fl'»*a/aU quaint pair huir.
He saw only me yesterday.
fii^'avuquemaihUr.
He saw me only yesterday.
BH
WinOtttM f^^l^t^m ORAMMAI.
^0 is oMd whh nooDS ii nn ioaefioite adjeotiVe.
Bx. : have no frjeodi ; they ha^ve ho bread.
when the word Qoderstopd ia ^ notn.
Ex. : Whet^r,he,i8a^l,tr©rii0i I cannot tell.
^e4ep^udire9'j^fptb9i^c^ngerounon.
^ WU^Bome adverbs of compj^ison, a«^h av6«^f«r,
Jwthar,Umgtr, leu, tnore, aooner, t^orse, we 98o,»o in-
ite^ofiio^
Bx. : He hild od kkyhbf iltilfchM tluia ...
llV'e^'j^j^lus Utijlni ^e
>,idll.no loogpr atay Here.
A.fie^r0erdlplu9ioi,
/i?ip«l«i|«e^^^wlthiiyerb.
Bx.,: XdoftdfBpflaJc. They are not arrived.
/« ,n« .jpdrle pas.. fU ,n$ \96nt pat
It M ^Ifo uacd; aflor or, cgrmponslve of wktther,
when the word pnd«>r»tdW is a vert.
Bx. : Whether he sleeps or not, I do not know.
Je tie Mt8 9*U (byrt <^ 'non.
Ifone and not ofy are indeftait* proDoqns.
Bx.: Haveyoainy book^f-s-Xhate none, not
apy. , ': . . ^VV; ■. ■
K«.: DoyoanBderrtandf— N^.
Ifcywitp«ik?-ldoBot.
'^••* H^ but one book; he has only ono^
Ex.: H* like. totWng bat pkwnrt.
I do not kMow anyboda,
Tm negation, moet not be used It the etme prop-
odt.0., becan-e they deetwy e«ih other to g,>eT
affirmation. I do iM hnoio nobody munM : thitel
«Meot lo .how the imposeibility ottwo n^iona in
the Bamo propoaition. » •" «"
Kjt. : I do not know any^y.
•/« «« eonnoM peri(rtine.
^^ negative ptrUcle tie i* itoployed in French in
snbord.nate proposition. <^ the yerbS eraindre
^e com^ri««, of «,parlidty or i»^S^;. Xr
«^ ^ea,; in B.^i.1. thi. particlf H^,
II
Bx. r I an mora tired thra yoo think.
J€ tuitplutfatigudque 9<m ne lepeiuu.
Work, for fear you fail,
7>availlez d« crainte guewmane manqmez.
He emnttot work neUher,
^exception, neither is Mmetimeti oaed emphat-
^y after another negntivo with iho meaning ofthe
French tumptus. *
Ejk : He cannot work neither.
// i$i peut pas travailUr nm ptw.
I do not work, neither does he.
Je ne traoaiUepaa, ni lui non plu$»
I cannot sing, no more can he.
Je ne pui» ehantert ni lui non plus,
^e....p{iM.
I *!^*r ^'*" "»''*"« damntage, ne.,,,plu9 is tran».
WM by no mere or not my more.
B». : I have nomore, not any more.
Je fCm ai plut,
ir*,,,.p{ui, meaning pa$ plus Umgtemps, is traD»
tated by NO Umgtr, fn such cases the verb oxpressea
«n action which lasted a certain time.
Kx. : 1 will no longer sutdy in this room.
IwifJ not study any longer io this it»m.
'fpn'iiudierai plus /ions cettecham^ .'
Jf*.»..pkmnwtMHime>^ rendered by tuit,^,,4gaiit,
.!^; : fie wilt not vootne back ^iil; . :
Il-ntTeolendraplus.
MIOAflO*.
20#
««. : Do noi »fmk€^ yx^ut book, yxm will aot
get ft back.
Jama<«.
Bx. : He ii the be«t man I ever «aw.
C'e$t U meilUw homme gwfaiejamaii pu.
A jamau le translated by /or ever.
Ex. : I belong to God and to the Booan Church
for ever.
J[appariim a jamaiM d Dieu et d rMdlise
Nev^ is negaUve and means yoiiwtf or ne:. .jamais.
Bx. ; Do yon drink wine t — Never.
^i«i>«MWM (hi vin t ^ JamdU. ^
I ^1^ iiever happy.
Je ne/wjaipait Kewreuac.
^^""Janai$ que, never htt.
Kx. : Vice never leads bat to (}eath.
^ vice ne eondmt famais qu*& la mort.
IPettmee pasf •
The negative interrogation n^ett-ee pa, cannot he
negative.,nten.>gatfvc form, the luiliiTor thi
defective v«rb need in the flnrt part of the^JgJ!^
fa. : Tdtt will come with og, wIU ybn not T
Ftwtt vien^x dvee nom, rCett-99 pd$ t
m
k
, '»•
^ aoo vVMcmm or.^jrtffat* qumiuji.
* • Yoti do oome with a«, <Jo yod not f
raw t;4»i|f ■d.fNto^iKiiii, n'eif<fpaf f
WhM tb«r«Ma ii«^tion in lh« /int member of thf
-Mlilence, w« do not u«e any nfj5»tl^ piiirticlo in the
CMOopd.
^x. : Vott shnll bol coino wjtli uA, thai! yoo ?
Fowl ne vifniimt pas avei tmi^ n'ett<c pat f
You do not enilor^ud, do you f
Vous ne eomprendt pa^^ n'nt-ce pds t
izouuuTioir.
The influittve without to and theperfeet pertioiple
-ard iwed in eacolamatory antwera.
Kx. : Do you lore hiin f— Love him I not at aU.
^aimeziHm f ~ L'«im<r t pat du tout.
Have you aeen him ?~S^o hitn f no, vpo^
my word.
• Z'avetjvm vuf -^Si je Pat v%! a«Mir
ma piatrole.
■ N, ^.— When vifie exolai^atioa 'expraiwea a niM^
r^ecUoD, the infinitive take* the preposition to,
* ' Ei^.i To love so much, »Rd to be so Aao^
dflepiscd I
» Aimer,tamt,etitr*Hmtm4pri»^t
In Boch ioatcncea (here are always some words
andereiood, aoeh as-: ^ml tad it Hyxehat a tad thing t
fix. : What a sad 'ihisg it is to love so mneb,
4. and to be sa itau«h despised.
301
Properly -ipcaihg, InUrjectioni have no goverp-
»«nt; wh*» they Are fd|)ow«d hv mh objective, it
wwtyi depefKl* ou eometbing auuv toO(}.
Id most CAMii the pi-onottos of the ««t fto.4 the
third peraoiie are hbM in. the objectite c,tfe, tbo«e of
fbe Mcond pereou in the nomfQAtive cMe.
Ah me I th«t i« : Ah I pity pie !
AIm for them 1
Woe him that it ftlobe I
Oh i thoQ raacfti I
Fie on or upon the villain I
tyffTAz Of PBOPosmom
Propofcitiona aro either coorditiAtd or ittbOrdififtlAb
Ooorditote propodtfoiu are thoM which, ia th*
■Mje wntenpe, have the name oitJer, the aame oatort.
PW»Win»te propoiitioiig are those which dep«Dd
oil » prdpo^'tion which {h culled prfncipAi
' oooRtitHATv PRorosmoirft.
In Bogliah as well aa in French, coordinate ppopg."
iitiona ma j be connected ih aeveial waya :
1^ 3y the mere gradation of Idoaa.
^ B». : I caraci I mw, I oonqq«ir«d.
•ut, and^/or, fi$htr„,.&, neither^mr, -
30?
mxetMEt'oiy iirn^sit oimiatAtL.
Bx. : He woifced. w«ll eiiOiigh, bot he coald do
better. • -
// travaitlait oMfe bie», mats il pow0it
fainmiewc.
3« By the lolative or conjunctiva pronouo.
Ex. : Tbo man whom yon saw yesterday is mv
brotbor. ,
L'hmme que vous avez vu hier est man
frire,
Tho preceding senlonceoonlaina two propositions-
tZl" '' '!^ T *' "^ *'^*^ ^''^ ^« '^^ W*^
yesterday; the two propositions arp oonnocted by
wAom which is ihonce caUod conjmistive.
This man is both rich and generous.
Instead of md, we may equally use both.,., and
witn two adjectives or two nonns.
Ex.: This man is both rich and generous. *
Cet homme est riche et gMreux.
He was both a mariner and a soldier.
li^ait&lafoistnarinetsoldat.
laidnotffo there, nor shaU I go.
JS< connecting two uc^niivc pioposiiions may be
translated by and, oi- by nor without any other
Ex. : I did not go there, nor shall I go
Je »e suispas alU iu, e4 je n'irai pas.
1 did not go there and I shall not go.
JV. A-Aa may b.» se^n by the first ewnjple, with
nor, the veib of the aeootod pi^poelUon is used m tho
interrogative form.
oooKDiiTAn raoronnoirf.
303
Sx.
H« does not work, nor 4om ho sucoeed.
line traifattUpat tt U ne Hmitpat,
yeUher neter nor John Meepa.
When fit is repeated several timet, the first one is
toanslated by neither, the others by nor. The same
thing must be said about ou repeated, which is
rendered by either or.
Ex. : Neither Peter, nor John sleeps.
iVi Pieiye, niJean ne dorment.
Neither he nor I am happy.
Jfi lui, ni moi, nous ne ammnea Heureux,
Either your mother or your sister has
done that
Ou voire mire ou voire sceur a fait cela,
N, 5.— Attention must bo paid not to confound
either and neither used as* conjunctions, and either and
neither used as indefinite pronouns.
Hither meSDs : ran ou Pantre (de deiue).
Keither mcaoa : ni Pun ni Pautre ide deut}.
Any means : n'importe le^ud {de plu»i€ur$).
Aonetoeans: aueun (de pluHeurt).
Ex. : I will give ih9 book to either of the two
brothers.
Je doMerai le livre itim ou a Fautre 4m
deut fr'ere$. ; '
Any of the th^^ *
J^imj^e le^^ troie.
:■■ None of tbMn.
Av/eun d^entn eu^ "^ '
m
m
.,u
304i
psiRomif I or; antiflnf /. am^iiiiUL
■a^^it^tk*^. Mm'Mtff^hod^, And
Two m0«4s ars ^i9^d. ii^ w^iMtnHi m*»po«tiong,
t|l»y are tl^e i^Ucatif 8^ anti tho iipj^rativ-jt.
This premi wMufc is CAU«4,4ii|^||{f«r u atwd to
WQH^M an aetioii CMU^f, ngufar, a tbiag which is
at all times equally trae or false.
Bx. : TheBQn|(i«miigiH^
J^e toUil doiMft la lumiirf.
He Beems hardly to know that six aDd six
. , make twelve.
// smble 4 peine aavoir que six et tix font
doyze.
■^ ■*. — This tense is sometimes employed instead
of thefatoro wiJh an adverl> or a noun expressioff
fatarity.
Ex. : They come here to-night.
lU viennent ici ce soir.
Aly sister arrives next week.
^a 9<cur arrive la semaint prochaine.
Theff «ne now ploying.
This present, which is called compound, progressive,
or definite, expresses an action aetiially going on, and
not extending beyond the4>resent time.
limtcATOiK.moot.
Ex.: Th^y arc itow. pining.
Ilsai i A,Jmier.
I am w^io^ (joat now).
J'4eris (en ce moment).
:a^^.~AiDotcidiwiecedeiiUy, thr8f(tfrm must not
be used with those verba which expttJM a veiy short
action: aa, Icallybw, atod ^ih eOiie bther verbs,
such as : to eateetn, to hute, to feUr, to love, to see, to
'KMf to give.
Ton dt> not work. —I'do work.
The emphatwal pre^ettt expreHses an action with
force aad answers a contradiction.
Bx. : You do not work. — I do woi k.
Vous ne tracaiUes pas. — Qui, je travaille.
A man wUl fometimeggiva aima through twiMfy.
The future mi»y bo used Instead of the present to
express a natnral disposition to sonp'hlng.
fix. : A man will somotitnes give olim thiotiirh
vanity. "
On fait quelqaefuis rmmOne par vanitl
A small leak will sink a gi-cat ship.
Vm petite ovterivre fait cmiler bat m grand
vaineav,
ZwiUifotheretu toonaal kave^kUthed.
With the words whoever, tthathfer, when, Ufmv,
aftir, themext time, aceotaUng a$, wMU, as soon aa, do
oa, it will he as, the Knglish hin|h»ige UiMM the present
initea*of the ftjlnre we have ia IPt «nch.
pi
% wilt 9peftk ta him, the next tlmt l^ie
ciofnes.
•Aj /Ml', /xir/er<*t; /a prpchaiw foif q^il
it will be aa yoo wish,
, (fe Ufa amme vcm fe M^irera.
I will go there as fioon ae I hove finished.
^irailAavuim^wfavraiJlHi.
Ciatch Whatever comoe.
Aitrapez tout ee qui viendra,
Ittiperliiet tenit.
The Bame diatinctlon moBt be made for the three
ionoDS of the iniperfeot tense.
I'iThe imperfect or post tonso.
Kx. : The Boman array eubdaed Gaul.
J^'arnUe mnamesoumit la GauU.
JPrederick the Gre^^t defended Prussia.
^RiAWnc fe Grand iUfeiuUt ta Pnt8$e.
2o The empbatioal imperfect.
K*. ; Toil did not w^k yesterday.-I did Work.
., raw n'am pas tramilU hier. — OuL fai
travailll
tte did not know I ioVed yoo.^ tee, Ite
didjinownt.
/* n^ sqv^t pat ^ue Je v<m aimaii, ^ OuL
ilk wmii^
S« The eompoand or progressive imperfeot
wmoAtit^ Hoop. 3^.
<A : Sb« wu roading when I wrived.
He wwi hntitrfig wh«D |. mw him.
*ifLf'Z^\^!^'^ ''''*"' ''mperfeot, Mv/d i« aome*
ttiog|wh.ch fteqaently happeiw. Sach i« the e«M
With the ftdverbs often, Bcmetimet, etc*
^ > I would rery often steal awa^ fh)tt aU
company.
, Je m*4cariai» touvent de toute aoeiiti,
I would aometimee speiid foar or Qre houn
alone in the aelds. (Boyle).
Je pamiM gvelqwfois qmtn oh einq heuru
9na dan$ l» ehampi,
peneet most be ngoarooslj observed.
!•». : I r.w him yesterday.
JeVaivukier.
I have seen him (o-day.
*^e rot rtt av/ouTifAift .
3« l*e seeond^ature is sometime, used in Frwioh
W tfeaken the affirmation of a thing which is ml
This «»• is w>t to be met w/tb, In English
«J^: i«o»t^«ve neglected some pwcaotion.
'^^vatn^gligiquelqwprie^iicn,
tmpttnttiYf 111004
J«J»id belbre, this mood is «wJ in «ommandiAff
wftotting, entrstting, or permitting. !%• logt^'
■/il
nofomit'or iMoi.iaa (uuinui.
inore«tr^l5th. iaoremtrgy to the JmiMraUvo form.
: 4lhUtUm»^99mm»Uenee.
The Bogligh lapgaage hai thfee moods for 8a1>.
^ W?! ^^^^^* > ^ W»\ Wliy«d of tbe three.
the spbjanctive tep<Ia;to dlii^ar fit,m the Un-
Jfoage. itisDo Wfer 0664 in /am HJar conversation
•nd is to W soef, b«ly in hig^ ind Bokmn stylo and
m poetry.
Except In a few cases .gJyon We, the >rench
•nbJan^Jtiye Is i^plaeedinSnglkh by Me ;,r««f, the
mperffct and /fc '/u^we of the Indicative mood : or.
^y the injlmtive.
, Bx. : 1 ii^bi^er h^ does not see the danger, "
,'^P>^<^quHlnevoiep(utedmger,'
Bo you think he will come ?
P^Mez^ewqu'iltie^nef
What do yon wish me to do ?
Cwe rmUsz^^c^ que, jefa$$e t
n.e wbordinate Wto^^^^^ (f. Mo«i^/i, fes*, «»faw,
-pt, provided, ic}ether,that, m someUmea prMade
indlcaU (he iobjonctlve ; \n siich omW. the ^n.
- - *- -.
A ooDditiOB on wbi«h a Altera Mtion depends is
r^f "Wff» ^^^ P"*^* teMe of the sab.
jnwrtive mood, notwiUirttnd%tbe nse if the indie-
•tire in French.
Bx.: Ifhe be at home, I will speak to him.
^*te$icheglui,jeluiparUrau
If he be siek, I will visit him.
S^il est malade, firai U voir.
When the condition expresses a thing reaUy
•asting, we nse the indicative. '^
Bx.: Ifhe is sick, he does not complain
fil at malade, it ne »e plaint poi.
If he is here, I do not see him.
fl*i7 est ici, je ne le vois pas.
Though he seems simple, he has deceived
US.
Bien quHl paraisse naSf, il nous a irmpis.
^^r^rea»anabU,lwoMMep0aktohim,
A mere snpposition with indefinite time take^ the
imperfect of the subjunctive mood inste«l of the
indicative employed in French.,
*''• • ^^^J^^^ i-NwonaWe, I would speak to
^iimt rai$0Makle,je ImparUraii,
If he were sick, t would visit hfm.
S'il itait malade, /irais le voir.
r
hi II
. ; ,.'>.,
810
niMcmn or tmQLtn chuioub.
^tb« prMedio£r •Mmpfe the tim« It «onpltttlT
iiid«finit6; wb«D th« tim* ii deflnito, w« bm the
lodioatiye imperfbet
B».: Ifhewai«ck,h«dldnotoompWii.
S'il a m malade, il ne t'at poi plamt.
If he WM •( home, I did n(| see him.
If, B. - lo Instead of the imperf^teose of the
•nhjunct: /e mood, we coold nee thauld with the in-
nnitiTe.
20 The conjiAiotioo if may be understood with
ihmdd, were, and had\ lat, in such instances, the
atuuliary it placed before the nominative.
Bx. : Were I your connseller, I would adTiM
you not to'go there.
Si f itait votn (mteiUer, je voiit comiU
l^ait dene pat oiler H,
Had I seen him before. . . .
^0'^ l^<*vait vu atqtataoant.
»•» • •
M^*9 9«Hkatha*9imtkouMgotiker^
With the impersonal expressions it ett bm. il ett
«W«i«6fe, 17 ett me, U ett n^cetiairi, etc, thePrench
•ttbjwictive is replaced hy ^AovM with the infloitift
or ty the infliiitive alone. "»oi«Te
Bx.: It is good that yon shonid go there.
^ftt.bmfnevomfiUiezl^ .
It Is good for you to go there.
the ittbjupctive or the potential >wlth«4^
. •/ *xv« ^ to pnifve $oit rMti"
I do«Md that the boy AoaldU expelled
T|».e potential mood with Imav Imi»\t u* •
in the following ceaee: '*^""y'^"^*««»«mp|o)red
10 With ^*. in<^der that, meaoiog a;|, y^.
w g^ng OD. "'
|ady in order that y»a may .acceed.
*» In prayere and petition!
^ ^^* "^"^ "P«^«»c« the evils we
May yon live happy.
Ood gnint he may reeovor; *
I wish you may reach your end,
^tf »KA(»fte ^»« vm atUi^niex voire bu$
30 To «proae something prababU ai^d conje<,laraL
Bx.: Th« tK5.;^ ^y be „j^^^ ,^
think.
th9&yo)|
VOttt'
.1^
»M
•f. i>.
SIS
they mif be detd t\oW.
Ha 9(M pmt'*tr$ mctti iimnt4i^.
We tnny «ee hitn to-mo«|x>w.
ti u pitut que fioM k vi^lvkt^f^p,
i" With ipAa<«r«fr, hmt^wtr, vAovr^. '^
B». ! Whatever rtohM you may ht^e, b« bombl*.
Qiiei?«i«l r»<>AeMe« ^ pom <tye», 10^,
However ietrned yott may be.
Wherever you may go^ yoa will ini C^ocU
fin fiiilqm Wfv i^M f OM alUtt, t>^ r/tm-
Tliii word it U^n^Iated iqto Bagtiib by'e^tilTalevCii
sBoglWiby»fjw*.V
3x. i lt> but on^dey aloce lie Went »w»y.
tl n'y V^»'unjour qu'U eH paHi
?• .Signifying Icn^, iMi translated hywhtk,
"Bs^ : We set oat when it rained In torrvpts.
X'<m» parliiMB qu'U pleuvait p<it ^or-
■■"■ \"''' ^'"Wnli. - ■•' '■■■''■ ■• •••'.:•
8* I^ is tf«nala(ed by t^ittfnvf^ that, when it
&.: CtoBie hew, that I nay speak to you.
fil
:'» ••topoimiiJ:"*
<» «w, expiy^ing time, » tnin«liite<| by K<iWi
^ ;'<wi** ^u'i^ pa,f i4
ft** ^« i« tr»n«Uted bv /A<ui nfu*. . ^a^ • ,.
ioperioritr o. InfeHoH?^ .*/^' "^^^
p»»t:veofeqt,»lity. ^ " '^J^ «« •fter « ooift.
»«. i He w more learnoa th«i) j^.
They «ra nol HO rich ee ym^ '
B.:thj,^W^,,,^.^,„^^„^^
OnlerdgahqueHen «> ma^te^ij.
WiZeH timnelato. ^ meaning d »,<rf,„ ^
^ : I shall not bo «ati«M anie« I Jtno# W
8- «!«» equiratent to'.^p«ufc{i»/Ji tnin.1^ by ««.
^I>9^9ramUfit^ fir fear.
.vv
' IB-
11
■ i
■*lf:*r^
r»<
m
WWmiUtlli (MUMMAB.
rfiV"
■We^ : I »erw go mi wltbami ontolring a eold.
Hb. : How much yoa lilt* to talk I
Qi»« votw atfn«s d parUr (
Ewr maay foob there are in tba world I
Qn^U yad6§ot4 dam Umdndt I
UM, I" -^-^ F«noh «ip«»ion.,^«e i, „ot tmn.-
^•- ^•»J»y««, ho beliem not.
'^•dUqw out, UeroUqwmm.
* Both dMd and wonnded.
Tant morta que hUȤ4i.
J3.;ai», iignlfying parceq^hMtor equivalent be.
. «. : If you do not go. to school, it is because
jbu are a hutf fellow.
: »i vow n'<dUe pde AVicoU, c'eet que
.voue ^tespareetnuc.
..: lio MemlUgpow'qwi, itis tranilafod by loAy.
Bii : "Why did you not speak f
'Qiie ne paHiea-vome f
JtZa^ the meatiiDg of ara^, ^^, ,« translated
^m.'. lyi\n nol eUirt before I havo seen him.
^^Parl%rmpdeq%ejenel'aievu0
»«Mn Fr«^.to avoid the wpeUUon of some con.
joDctloos, each as :«», comw, ^MOiK^ («r#y«e.
wtdldnotoallonhl*. ^
Ijwict1»tl0ll is the ait of dividing a wrillaii «»«
po.a.on into ..ntences or puru of aern^ ^pa^;
which are r.qair«i hy the «enw. • "7 P»ax5fi
^Kere are oommoalj reckoned foar prin^^i .top. ■
Tfcecommo, Aiwri^.
The colon ^ e&Ht pe^.
The period, te point Jhal.
The comma.
J^. : The bosbond. wife, ««d ch:Mre«\re« rtok.
^^'"r'""'*^^*^ reluiin^ to U^ ^r^i^:
i:.*. . They H,ld their ia^nltar^, .jothei^ a«|
etoclc ' "» ,
316 »»<rfcipLM or iwoiltti. OMIUIAB.
4? Two or more verUi having the wmeMbjeot.
Kjc.: Peter <Irtr.b.,eate, and gleopi
6» Two or more aJverha modifying the W^e wort.
. I!x.: H« «Jway« acu sorely, alowlj, and prt.
^ In a direct address the comma h placed after
the object of the addroilB. , F ««« a^cer
^. : *^ 8pn, come t(0 me.
fil !^« ^•'^^P^'<»««t case IH aeparated by a conuw
^<m the remainder of the aeiitonco.
Bx. « We failing, ho will not go fiirther.
kJlU'^.T'' "^ ^ apposition is always placed
Wtwoon t^ commas. *""««u
mJi^^ ^l''^^'^' ^^ "««» to scfiiroto the parts of a
tat P'"!*""""" U»« •" «.IW !«,«. «d-,X
trot one sentence. ^^
?x. : Thoogh deep, yet dear ; thoogh geoUe
yet not dull. '
. Sij^ws swim on the sar&ce; bat pearia
tie at the bottom.
^ The semi-colon will wpairate propoalUona intrt.
POltCTtJATIOir. 31 y
^ pending on the «>ame verb .
Ex. : Philo*opher8 ameri that nalnre is unlimited
in her operations ; that she has Inex-
haustiblet«Jasare«; that knowledge will
always be progressive. ' '
It is used :
folLlf r * '^"''"''' ^'**"''^ '" '^^"'P'^** i" itself, bat
followed by some remark illustrating the subject
Ex.: You failed: you knew it.
20 Before a quotation, an example.
&J The Scripture say^ : " God is love."
beL • *"•"" "°™"^"« "P -^' ^ ^n said
rajthAil to Qod. ^
Bx.: 2»r God, cra;<,a«,i),-^
Honour the king, 4aw« fe ro»-.
The perioci is also osed after abbreviations
^ 'kk'**! ^•.R"**^',^^. iMJdressed the meeUng.
Such abbreviaUonii aa Tom Boh »-« i .m^ Z
a»e •bbreviaUng peri J. ' ' ^" ^'^ "*^^^
, Mft PKMOIPLM Of ijkbtiml ORAMMAB.
the Wrd« Inn 2nd: 3M, 4th sdmit of boini^ iii«d
without the period.
Bw^ae* ih«»* poinHa which mark the paases in dia-
course, there are a fi?<w othern which detooto a different
modulation of voice. They a^e :
The intonyygatioii point : (?)
The iBXOlainatioh point: (I)
The parenthesis : ()
TJu note of interrogation is used after an iater-
rogativogenteace; thai is, when a question is asked.
E». : Where do you cOme from ?
The note of exbtaination is used aftei- expressions of
sadden emotion, surprise, etc., etc.
Br. : Bl«wi the Lord^ my sonll
N,B, -In some oiums the meaning of tho sentence
\B indicated only by the pnnctuution.
H». : flow great was his saeriace f
How giie«it was this sacrifice I
The parenthesis is a clause containing some nseAil
remark; but which may be omitted without injurioir
the grammatical construction of the seftteace.
Ex. : To gaio a posthumous reputation; is to
save four or five lettei» (for what is a
name besides ?) from oblirion.
Ontheuae of eapiumeiUn.
^ Pomar^, all nouns began with a capital; bat as
this practice was troublesome and gave the pi-iotiog
•"'■''•■"■"'beKinwUh.oaplW^^"*'- "•*■
i° ^''""""^ "'"•■* I"", of Writing.
tk. Holy Sbi't ""• ^""l"". ".e M«.i.b:
-C nr:; rpT "'"-"•"'' "'•'«■ •'-". ■»-.-
B«- = P.t.r. Mo„,«.|, 8h.rbr«ok. Sl«e, ,k.
^ Proper adjective...
BnglifcJ,, Canadian, French
6. The ii«t word of a quotation.
7" The first word of an example.
Ex.: Temptation p,^^ our virtae.
o" tvery rabetantiro Anri «h: • .
titles of bwltt. P*-«ncipal word in the
««.: fi<«Hn'ft Ancient Histoiy
8j>^^efi«t word Of eve.y line in'poetry.
lOo The prononn/. and the interjection a
**•= I speak. Hear U8, O Loitl I
"»Name.oftheday.andthemonth«.
««: <>» Monday, the ei^Tfhih^ April
320 nmomu ov ■jroLnH oiAXMAiL
am not, ar« not
Bachelor of Divinity.
Bishop.
BlesMd Yii^in.
caiittot.
coaid not
Doctor of Divinity,
do not.
do you.
oven,
ever,
for ri.
give me.
bad not. •
«&u ■,!« aiu
B.D,
It
HIOI
fl
Bp..
t<
«
B.V.,
tl
U
Ckin't,
«
(1
Goaldo't,
l<
l(
D.D.,
<l
u
Don't,
«
<(
i>'ye,
(C
«
E'en,
u
l(
E'er,
«
(1
Por't,
M
i(
Oi'me,
«
l(
Hadn't,
i(
«
Haan'L
«
II
Haven't, «
He'd,
He'll, <«
Here's,
He's,
Td,
ni,
I'm,
Inst^
!•?%
I«n%
IVe,
iMl'em,
Let's,
H«yn%
a
i«
a
«
U
a
u
u
tt
u
((
a
11
«
.((
If
M
l(
uM not.
have notk
he had, he woakL
he will, he phal^
here is. .
he is.
Ihad^lwoold.
I will, I shall.
I am.
Instant (the prwent month),
in it.
U aot.
it is.
I have.
letth$iQ.
let OS.
may not.
JSrC
On't,
Shan't,
I- '
iMljid^f might liot,
mintrew.
321
WhoX
WcfB'?
WonWt,
J<m*d,
u
♦I
(I
II,
l(
II
II
tf
If
11
If
II
If
li
/ If
. *.i
" **.
u
If
II
If
■«
If
II-.
If.
if
Jt
■II.
ii
IBfteMl Of
II
•<i-
II
II.
II'
M
li
mltter.
never.
littlbber.
not.
of.
over.
OQ JL
•h»II not
"he had, woald.
8he 10, has.
the.
thiitis.
thwols.
they had, would,
they will,
they are,
they have,
it wae.
Iwtween. '
opon it.
was not
wehadjWOQid.
•we are.
Were not
we hive,
what is.
where is.
vho is, luto.
will not
wodld.
" ^!lr(Hlld not
;,' TOtt hjMl, would.
" you will
** 'you have.
H
If
If
M. .
If
. If
If
it
If
If
If
If
fi
n
If
If
II
If
II
If.
«
it
If
I* .
II
II
^. ■it»>s.
ANALYTICAL INDEX
A, 176.
A OK an, 215.
About, S66.
Above, 2S4.
Abroad, 26 .
Abbreviatiooa, 320.
Accord du terbe, 119.
— de Vattribut, J2».
A^eeti/s, Ifl. '
A^ectifa eom^j^tis, ]80.
■^ Itur eoHatruotwn, 181.
Adverbs, 104.
" ago, 1(19. •
" eonjmctif, 20^.
" e»nstnMion, 1 10, 294,
Aimer, 266.
Alkret renir, 20.
A JHtft, A /w, ,<c, 199.
Among, 369.
Anj tt soro?, 220.
Appotition. 131.
^rrmr, 246.
Arttelr, U. LS."!.
^»*«, 28'.'.
A(Undr», 2C0 >,
AUrtifif, 162.
At, 26S
'<4u>(iiMt»r, am-d(moi(3, asi,
^tUM, autuitt, 143, 2y# 292
-<««rc, 212. ': *. i
AmiHiairri, 61. »
^ree, jDrtr, 27(«. .. j
Avoir^ 248.
Btayuaup, it.
Bolow, 2?55.
Between, 239,
Bj H with, 270.
^, 76.
«
«
CatM« (worn (fe), 174.
C«{$ujet>, 126.
Oe yai, «e yv<, 85.
C%<reA<r, 258.
Chea, 160.
CWfe(rft/, 12«.
Cm^titH, 285.
Vomparatifs^ 17.
CompUment du twm, 132.
" rfe Vadjtelif, 138.
<<« «»H|Mira/^, 14^.
<tu rjp*rlatif, 147.
<<M tvrAr, 148.
rfMTrf. 149.
" cirodn«tono/e/,«l«4.
Gmdilionnel, ^1. *
Omjanei^vn, 111.
Oonjwjaimm, 47.
" cfc I'oiie, 50.
" " To har^" »|:
" rfw rtrlea irriffv^, G6. *
•• tUifteHf8.U' - •
* *i/#rr^fa#,J*, 1-8.. .
«»<.-«<isr-, 8*. ,^*
If-^f/V, 8i 240. .
»**'«; sfi. - .
**>««r% 8?; ,
2>*«|rfafU,....|rf«<«, WS.' • -
Ih .inatUrt\,ni. - • -- .
Dt^liumiirt),ft\. • •/
■ ii.
M
, «
Ii
4<
t«
• i
^(Vrhuknperhmru 147
^eraintegHe,9i)t.
AMALvtteAL immx.
313
--..-.. y,^, „,^,
^ {<»ri« iw comiioiiMi^t, 144.
M tnoiHn eH-moimi, Hi.
Otutti, dtsnaut, are, 281
^Owir. 241.
2><r«^ 261.
Down, 281.
^"» rfe &, *#, 220.
»9 <to), 66.
Either, .or...., 114.
^ft|W« tfs ranUettUnu. 204.
'5j./"«»rii«m,i|7i.i77.
£neor4, 107.
*^,^«^ Se9i
-M, ootii..,.uuL «02.
jOfotr, 244.
for, 1«8» 272.
Get (toX J«2'. -
K into^ wo; 278.
•♦•«|f(««Uto), 161.
[jwj«»«<OK>«!i«rV27o.
"^-117,801.
rmgultert (new), li; .
•• nritt, «8. .
trrifulien adterhtt, 10»,
'famau, 290, '
•'wyii'd, 280.
*^noir (to) how, |53.
f< (pronom), 231.
I^Mto), «3.
^»t« {nam de), 164.
^iwr, 260. .
L'tin ou I'aulrt, 303.
^'ajuieules, 818.
^«^srr^, 178.
Jo««re(no»id«), 171.
M»y, 64.
i^'we, 228.
M«r76V"*"'"^"«-
At plvi, 208.
^....yue, 297.
ir«,|.c«^NW M99.
IfoHpluM, 298.
^•ww, 7, 180.
On. prep., 102, 276.
^\{it prmvm), 128.
^rvi«j,(,M»«f), 175.
06, adverbe, 108
^*,i»r«mom, 211.
Ought, 7«.
Out, 279.
Over, 277.
ParHeipt, 9&, 264.
^A/m. 46,169.
^'»Stnd4fim, 46^ 170;
J*«/i(p«rM, 84,240.
Pendant, 168.
^*wr<, 247.
^<w....|>/ii#.., 145.
324
AIAttnCAI> (iTDIIf.
PoiiwMwMH^ $%, 198.
/VilMtM; 811.
/oim><f« 75.
fow, in.
Pr4m»tt 45, ){>4.
/Vi)E(fim<{(), 173.
/VvKMui, 41, 329«
Mnpmtumt, 801.
0M.312.
QfticonttHt 349.
J{^jH«9UM (Vertes), tflt
lHlfUi/kU (frmUMU 18.
•• (wriM), 87.
StJat^fi, 88, 801.
iMKV^ ctMgqMMN^ 209.
'8 tU pon^Mum, 15.
hUuU,«8.
I ^i^IaV* 18.
■■ T«nL itOmHU, fM.
\ Ta/rdmrt 259.
! T«mM {dt9 vtrbfi), 45.
1 TlMt {nktti^ $0t.
I Thii, thtt, 29, 198.
! IVntf, 229.'
i Tropf 288.
, (Til. VML 215.
' Vp. wditr, Sdl.
1 1^^44.217.
FbtOmV, 281.
j Wh«t «l vbich, 98, 210b
I WiU, 68.
With, 270.
• r» 288.
ft
• m
-H
■^